Tender document for construction project

Colchester MIND New Wellbeing Centre, Mersea Road, Colchester TENDER Job No. 42353 Specification Document

Author: Karl Curnock

Checked by: Paul Ruffell

Date: December 2013

Status: Issue 01

Internal and External - Alterations and Refurbishment Colchester Mind – TENDER Job No: 42353 Date: December 2013

Page 2 of 2

CONTENTS

1.0 NBS PRELIMINARIES (incl PROVISIONAL SUMS)

2.0 NBS MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP

3.0 SCHEDULE OF WORKS

4.0 M&E SCHEDULE OF WORKS

5.0 GENERAL SUMMARY

Internal and External - Alterations and Refurbishment Colchester MIND – TENDER Job No: 42353 Date: December 2013

SECTION 1.0:

NBS PRELIMINARIES (incl PROVISIONAL SUMS)

Colchester MIND Alteration and Refurbishment Works forNew Wellbeing Centre

18 December 2013

Preliminaries

Table of Contents

Title Page

A JCT 2011 Minor Works Building Contract 3

5PROJECT PARTICULARSA10

7TENDER AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTSA11

9THE SITE/ EXISTING BUILDINGSA12

11DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKA13

13JCT MINOR WORK BUILDING CONTRACT (MW)A20

17TENDERING/ SUBLETTING/ SUPPLYA30

22PROVISION, CONTENT AND USE OF DOCUMENTSA31

27MANAGEMENT OF THE WORKSA32

31QUALITY STANDARDS/ CONTROLA33

38SECURITY/ SAFETY/ PROTECTIONA34

45SPECIFIC LIMITATIONS ON METHOD/ SEQUENCE/ TIMING

A35

47FACILITIES/ TEMPORARY WORK/ SERVICESA36

51OPERATION/ MAINTENANCE OF THE FINISHED WORKSA37

54CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL COST ITEMS: MANAGEMENT AND STAFF

A40

56CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL COST ITEMS: SITE ACCOMMODATION

A41

58CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL COST ITEMS: SERVICES AND FACILITIES

A42

60CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL COST ITEMS: MECHANICAL PLANT

A43

62CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL COST ITEMS: TEMPORARY WORKS

A44

64WORK/ PRODUCTS BY/ ON BEHALF OF THE EMPLOYERA50

66PROVISIONAL WORK/ ITEMSA54

A

JCT 2011 Minor Works Building Contract

A10

PROJECT PARTICULARS

A10 PROJECT PARTICULARS

110 THE PROJECT• Name: Colchester MIND Wellbeing Centre.• Nature: Conversion and refurbishment of existing Doctors Surgery

into Colchester MIND Wellbeing Centre.• Location: 272A Mersea Road, Colchester CO2 8QZ .• Length of contract: 12 weeks.

120A EMPLOYER (CLIENT)

• Name: Colchester Mind.

• Address: St Marys House7 Church WalkColchesterEssexCO1 1NS.

• Contact: James McQuiggan.

130 PRINCIPAL CONTRACTOR (CDM)• Name: TBA.• Address: TBA.• Contact: TBA.• Telephone: TBA.• E-mail: TBA.

140 ARCHITECT/ CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR

• Name: Ingleton Wood LLP.

• Address: 874 The Crescent, Colchester Business Park,Colchester,Essex, CO4 9YQ.

• Contact: Karl Curnock.

• Telephone: 01206 224270..

• E-mail: [email protected].

150 CDM COORDINATOR• Name: Ingleton Wood LLP.• Address: 874 The Crescent, Colchester Business Park,

Colchester, Essex, CO4 9YQ.• Contact: Paul Ruffell.• Telephone: 01206 224270.• E-mail: [email protected] .

Preliminaries Page 5 of 66

£P

A11

TENDER AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A11 TENDER AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

110 TENDER DRAWINGS• The tender drawings are: as listed in drawing register 42353.

120 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

• The Contract Drawings: The same as the tender drawings.

160A PRECONSTRUCTION INFORMATION

• Format: The Preconstruction information is described in separatedocument appended to the tender documents.


£P

A12

THE SITE/ EXISTING BUILDINGS

A12 THE SITE/ EXISTING BUILDINGS

110 THE SITE• Description: Site resides within a residential area on Mersea Road

in Colchester. Residential properties are situated to both sides andto the rear of the property. Existing building is 1960s two storeydwelling converted into Doctors Surgery. External areas mainlylaid to asphalt finished car park to rear with minor shrubs and treeto front.

120 EXISTING BUILDINGS ON/ ADJACENT TO THE SITE

• Description: Site is surrounded on 3 sides by residential propertieswith Mersea Road to the front of the building .

200 ACCESS TO THE SITE• Description: Access via Mersea Road.• Limitations: Limited off site parking.

210 PARKING• Restrictions on parking of the Contractor's and employees'

vehicles: no restrictions on site, limited off site.

220 USE OF THE SITE

• General: Do not use the site for any purpose other than carryingout the Works.

• Limitations: none.

240 HEALTH AND SAFETY HAZARDS• General: The nature and condition of the site/ building cannot be

fully and certainly ascertained before it is opened up. However thefollowing hazards are or may be present:- Asbestos may be present.

• Information: The accuracy and sufficiency of this information is notguaranteed by the Employer or the Employer's representative.Ascertain if any additional information is required to ensure thesafety of all persons and the Works.

• Site staff: Draw to the attention of all personnel working on the sitethe nature of any possible contamination and the need to takeappropriate precautionary measures.

250 SITE VISIT

• Assessment: Ascertain the nature of the site, access thereto andall local conditions and restrictions likely to affect the execution of the Works.

• Arrangements for visit: contact Contract Administrator.


£P

A13

DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK

A13 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK

120 THE WORKS• Description: The works comprise of the complete internal and

external alteration and refurbishment to existing GP surgery onMersea Road and will include demolition of existing lobby withconstruction of new flat roof lobby extension. Including thereplacement of external windows and doors with new uPVCfinished in dark grey. Removal and replacement of existingsanitary ware throughout with full replacement of existing flooring.Including demolition and construction of internal walls. Withassociated M&E works, including new light fittings, radiators,electrical wiring and other works .


£P

A20

JCT MINOR WORK BUILDING CONTRACT (MW)

A20 JCT MINOR WORK BUILDING CONTRACT (MW)

JCT MINOR WORKS BUILDING CONTRACT• The Contract: JCT Minor Works Building Contract 2011 Edition.• Requirement: Allow for the obligations, liabilities and services

described.

THE RECITALS

First - THE WORKS AND THE CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR

• The work comprises: The works comprise of the complete internaland external alteration and refurbishment to existing GP surgeryon Mersea Road and will include demolition of existing lobby withconstruction of new flat roof lobby extension. Including thereplacement of external windows and doors with new uPVCfinished in dark grey. Removal and replacement of existingsanitary ware throughout with full replacement of existing flooring.Including demolition and construction of internal walls. Withassociated M&E works, including new light fittings, radiators,electrical wiring and other works .

• Architect/ Contract Administrator: See clause A10/140.

Second - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS• Contract drawings: As listed in clause A11/120.

Contract documents: The following have been prepared whichshow and describe the work to be done Materials andWorkmanship, Schedule of Works and drawings.

Third - PRICED DOCUMENTS

• Documents to be priced or provided by the Contractor: Schedule of Works.

THE ARTICLES

3 - ARCHITECT/ CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR• Architect/ Contract Administrator: See clause A10/140.

4 and 5 - CDM COORDINATOR/ PRINCIPAL CONTRACTOR• CDM Coordinator: See clause A10/150.• Principal Contractor: See clause A10/130.

CONTRACT PARTICULARS

Fourth Recital and Schedule 2 - BASE DATE

• Base date: 21st January 2014.

Fourth Recital and clause 4.2 - CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRYSCHEME (CIS)

• Employer at the Base Date is not a 'contractor' for the purposes of the CIS.


£P

Fifth Recital - CDM REGULATIONS• The project is notifiable.

Seventh Recital and Schedule 3 - SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS• Collaborative working: Paragraph 1 applies.• Health and safety: Paragraph 2 applies.• Cost savings and value improvements: Paragraph 3 applies.• Sustainable development and environmental considerations:

Paragraph 4 does not apply.• Performance indicators and monitoring: Paragraph 5 does not

apply.

• Notification and negotiation of disputes: Paragraph 6 applies.Where paragraph 6 applies, the respective nominees of the partiesare:- Employer's nominee: The Royal Institution of Chartered

Surveyors. .- Contractor's nominee: ________.

Or such replacement as each party may notify to the other fromtime to time.

Article 7 - ARBITRATION• Article 7 and Schedule 1 Apply.

Clause 1.1 - CDM PLANNING PERIOD• Shall mean the period of three weeks ending on the date of

possession.

Clause 2.2 - COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION

• Date for Commencement of the Works: 24th February 2014.

• Date for Completion: 23rd May 2014.

Clause 2.8 - LIQUIDATED DAMAGES• At the rate of £500 per or pro-rata thereto.

Clause 2.10 - RECTIFICATION PERIOD• Period: Twelve months from the date of practical completion.

Clause 4.3 - PERCENTAGE OF THE TOTAL VALUE OF THEWORK ETC.

• Percentage: 95.

Clause 4.4 - PERCENTAGE OF THE TOTAL AMOUNT TO BEPAID TO THE CONTRACTOR

• Percentage: 97.5.

Clause 4.8.1 - SUPPLY OF DOCUMENTATION FORCOMPUTATION OF AMOUNT TO BE FINALLY CERTIFIED

• Period: three months from the date of practical completion.

Clause 4.11 and Schedule 2 - CONTRIBUTION, LEVY AND TAXCHANGES

• Clause 4.11 and Schedule 2 will be deleted.


£P

Clause 5.3.2 - CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE - INJURY TOPERSONS OR PROPERTY

• Insurance cover (for any one occurrence or series of occurrencesarising out of one event): £5,000,000.

Clauses 5.4A, 5.4B and 5.4C - INSURANCE OF THE WORKSETC - ALTERNATIVE PROVISIONS

• Clause 5.4A applies.

Clauses 5.4A.1 and 5.4B.1.2 - PERCENTAGE TO COVERPROFESSIONAL FEES

• Addition: 15 per cent.

Clause 7.2 - ADJUDICATION• The Adjudicator is: TBA .• Nominating body: The Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors .

Schedule 1 paragraph 2.1 - ARBITRATION• Appointor of Arbitrator (and of any replacement): President or a

Vice president of the: The Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors .

THE CONDITIONS

SECTION 1: DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

1.4 - RECKONING PERIODS OF DAYS• Amendments: none.

1.7 - APPLICABLE LAW• Amendments: none.

SECTION 2: CARRYING OUT THE WORKS

SECTION 3: CONTROL OF THE WORKS

SECTION 4: PAYMENT

SECTION 5: INJURY, DAMAGE AND INSURANCE

SECTION 6: TERMINATION

SECTION 7: SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES

EXECUTION• The Contract: Will be executed underhand.


£P

A30

TENDERING/ SUBLETTING/ SUPPLY

A30 TENDERING/ SUBLETTING/ SUPPLY

MAIN CONTRACT TENDERING

110 SCOPE• General: These conditions are supplementary to those stated in

the Invitation to Tender and on the form of tender.

145 TENDERING PROCEDURE

• General: In accordance with NBS Guide to Tendering for Construction Projects.

• Errors: alternative 2 is to apply.

160 EXCLUSIONS• Inability to tender: Immediately inform if any parts of the work as

defined in the tender documents cannot be tendered.• Relevant parts of the work: Define those parts, stating reasons for

the inability to tender.

170 ACCEPTANCE OF TENDER• Acceptance: No guarantee is offered that any tender will be

recommended for acceptance or be accepted, or that reasons for non acceptance will be given.

• Costs: No liability is accepted for any cost incurred in thepreparation of any tender.

190 PERIOD OF VALIDITY

• Period: After submission or lodgement, keep tender open for consideration (unless previously withdrawn) for not less than 30days.

• Date for possession/ commencement: See section A20.

PRICING/ SUBMISSION OF DOCUMENTS

210 PRELIMINARIES IN THE SPECIFICATION• The Preliminaries/ General conditions sections (A10-A56 inclusive)

must not be relied on as complying with SMM7.

250 PRICED DOCUMENTS

• Alterations: Do not alter or qualify the priced documents withoutwritten consent. Tenders containing unauthorised alterations or qualifications may be rejected.

• Measurements: Where not stated, ascertain from the drawings.

• Deemed included: Costs relating to items, which are not priced,will be deemed to have been included elsewhere in the tender.

• Submit: with tender.

310 TENDER• General: Tenders must include for all work shown or described in

the tender documents as a whole or clearly apparent as beingnecessary for the complete and proper execution of the Works.


£P

440 SCHEDULE OF RATES• Schedule of rates (unpriced): Included with the tender documents.

The Contractor may insert additional items. All items must be fullypriced.

• Fully priced copy: Submit within one week of request. .

510 ALTERNATIVE METHOD TENDERS• General: In addition to and at the same time as tendering for the

Works as defined in the tender documents, alternative methods of construction/ installation may be submitted for consideration.Alternatives, which would involve significant changes to other work, may not be considered.

• Alternative tenders: Such alternatives will be deemed to bealternative tenders and each must include a complete and precisestatement of the effects on cost and programme.

• Safety method statement: Carry out a health and safety riskassessment for each alternative and where appropriate provide asafety method statement suitable for incorporation in the Healthand Safety Plan.

• Full technical data: Submit for each alternative together withdetails of any consequential amendments to the design and/ or construction of other parts of the Works.

• Submit: With tender..

515 ALTERNATIVE TIME TENDERS• General: In addition to and at the same time as tendering based

upon the date or period specified in section A20, an alternativetender based upon a different date for completion or period may besubmitted.

• Date for completion: If any such tender is accepted the date for completion inserted in the Contract will be the date stated in thealternative tender or determined from the period stated in thealternative tender.

530 SUBSTITUTE PRODUCTS

• Details: If products of different manufacture to those specified areproposed, submit details with the tender giving reasons for eachproposed substitution. Substitutions, which have not been notifiedat tender stage, may not be considered.

• Compliance: Substitutions accepted will be subject to theverification requirements of clause A31/200.


£P

550 HEALTH AND SAFETY INFORMATION• Content: Describe the organisation and resources to safeguard the

health and safety of operatives, including those of subcontractors,and of any person whom the Works may affect.

• Include:- A copy of the contractor's health and safety policy document,

including risk assessment procedures.- Accident and sickness records for the past five years.- Records of previous Health and Safety Executive enforcement

action.- Records of training and training policy.- The number and type of staff responsible for health and safety

on this project with details of their qualifications and duties.• Submit: With tender..

570 OUTLINE CONSTRUCTION PHASE HEALTH AND SAFETYPLAN

• Content: Submit the following information within one week of request:- Method statements on how risks from hazards identified in the

pre-construction information and other hazards identified by thecontractor will be addressed.

- Details of the management structure and responsibilities.- Arrangements for issuing health and safety directions.- Procedures for informing other contractors and employees of

health and safety hazards.- Selection procedures for ensuring competency of other

contractors, the self-employed and designers.- Procedures for communications between the project team, other

contractors and site operatives.- Arrangements for cooperation and coordination between

contractors.- Procedures for carrying out risk assessment and for managing

and controlling the risk.- Emergency procedures including those for fire prevention and

escape.- Arrangements for ensuring that all accidents, illness and

dangerous occurrences are recorded.- Arrangements for welfare facilities.- Procedures for ensuring that all persons on site have received

relevant health and safety information and training.- Arrangements for consulting with and taking the views of people

on site.- Arrangements for preparing site rules and drawing them to the

attention of those affected and ensuring their compliance.- Monitoring procedures to ensure compliance with site rules,

selection and management procedures, health and safetystandards and statutory requirements.

- Review procedures to obtain feedback.


£P

599 FREEDOM OF INFORMATION• Records: Retain, make available for inspection and supply on

request information reasonably required to allow response torequests made under the provisions of the Freedom of InformationAct.

• Determination: Submit requests received. Do not supplyinformation outside the project participants without express writtenpermission.

• Confidentiality: Maintain at all times.


£P

A31

PROVISION, CONTENT AND USE OF DOCUMENTS

A31 PROVISION, CONTENT AND USE OF DOCUMENTS

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS

110 DEFINITIONS• Meaning: Terms, derived terms and synonyms used in the

preliminaries/ general conditions and specification are as statedtherein or in the appropriate British Standard or British Standardglossary.

120 COMMUNICATION

• Definition: Includes advise, inform, submit, give notice, instruct,agree, confirm, seek or obtain information, consent or instructions,or make arrangements.

• Format: In writing to the person named in clause A10/140 unlessspecified otherwise.

• Response: Do not proceed until response has been received.

130 PRODUCTS• Definition: Materials, both manufactured and naturally occurring,

and goods, including components, equipment and accessories,intended for the permanent incorporation in the Works.

• Includes: Goods, plant, materials, site materials and things for incorporation into the Works.

135 SITE EQUIPMENT

• Definition: All appliances or things of whatsoever nature required inor about the construction for completion of the Works but notmaterials or other things intended to form or forming part of thePermanent Works.

• Includes: Construction appliances, vehicles, consumables, tools,temporary works, scaffolding, cabins and other site facilities.

140 DRAWINGS• Definitions: To BSRIA BG 6/2009 A design framework for building

services. Design activities and drawing definitions.• CAD data: In accordance with BS 1192.

145 CONTRACTOR'S CHOICE• Meaning: Selection delegated to the Contractor, but liability to

remain with the specifier.

155 SUBMIT PROPOSALS

• Meaning: Submit information in response to specifiedrequirements.


£P

160 TERMS USED IN SPECIFICATION• Remove: Disconnect, dismantle as necessary and take out the

designated products or work and associated accessories, fixings,supports, linings and bedding materials. Dispose of unwantedmaterials. Excludes taking out and disposing of associatedpipework, wiring, ductwork or other services.

• Fix: Receive, unload, handle, store, protect, place and fasten inposition and disposal of waste and surplus packaging including alllabour, materials and site equipment for that purpose.

• Supply and fix: As above, but including supply of products to befixed. All products to be supplied and fixed unless statedotherwise.

• Keep for reuse: Do not damage designated products or work.Clean off bedding and jointing materials. Stack neatly, adequatelyprotect and store until required by the Employer/ Purchaser or for use in the Works as instructed.

• Make good: Execute local remedial work to designated work. Makesecure, sound and neat. Excludes redecoration and/ or replacement.

• Replace: Supply and fix new products matching those removed.Execute work to match original new state of that removed.

• Repair: Execute remedial work to designated products. Makesecure, sound and neat. Excludes redecoration and/ or replacement.

• Refix: Fix removed products.

• Ease: Adjust moving parts of designated products or work toachieve free movement and good fit in open and closed positions.

• Match existing: Provide products and work of the sameappearance and features as the original, excluding ageing andweathering. Make joints between existing and new work as inconspicuous as possible.

• System: Equipment, accessories, controls, supports and ancillaryitems, including installation, necessary for that section of the workto function.

170 MANUFACTURER AND PRODUCT REFERENCE• Definition: When used in this combination:

- Manufacturer: The firm under whose name the particular productis marketed.

- Product reference: The proprietary brand name and/ or reference by which the particular product is identified.

• Currency: References are to the particular product as specified inthe manufacturer's technical literature current on the date of theinvitation to tender.


£P

200 SUBSTITUTION OF PRODUCTS• Products: If an alternative product to that specified is proposed,

obtain approval before ordering the product.• Reasons: Submit reasons for the proposed substitution.• Documentation: Submit relevant information, including:

- manufacturer and product reference;- cost;- availability;- relevant standards;- performance;- function;- compatibility of accessories;- proposed revisions to drawings and specification;- compatibility with adjacent work;- appearance;- copy of warranty/ guarantee.

• Alterations to adjacent work: If needed, advise scope, nature andcost.

• Manufacturers' guarantees: If substitution is accepted, submitbefore ordering products.

210 CROSS REFERENCES

• Accuracy: Check remainder of the annotation or item descriptionagainst the terminology used in the section or clause referred to.

• Related terminology: Where a numerical cross-reference is notgiven the relevant sections and clauses of the specification willapply.

• Relevant clauses: Clauses in the referred to specification sectiondealing with general matters, ancillary products and execution alsoapply.

• Discrepancy or ambiguity: Before proceeding, obtain clarificationor instructions.

220 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS• Conflicts: Specification prevails over referenced documents.

230 EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS

• Inadvertent omission: Wherever products are specified byproprietary name the phrase 'or equivalent' is to be deemedincluded.

240 SUBSTITUTION OF STANDARDS• Specification to British Standard or European Standard:

Substitution may be proposed complying with a grade or categorywithin a national standard of another Member State of the European Community or an international standard recognised inthe UK.

• Before ordering: Submit notification of all such substitutions.• Documentary evidence: Submit for verification when requested as

detailed in clause A31/200. Any submitted foreign languagedocuments must be accompanied by certified translations intoEnglish.


£P

250 CURRENCY OF DOCUMENTS• Currency: References to published documents are to the editions,

including amendments and revisions, current on the date of theInvitation to Tender.

260 SIZES• General dimensions: Products are specified by their co-ordinating

sizes.• Timber: Cross section dimensions shown on drawings are:

- Target sizes as defined in BS EN 336 for structural softwoodand hardwood sections.

- Finished sizes for non-structural softwood or hardwood sawnand further processed sections.

DOCUMENTS PROVIDED ON BEHALF OF THE EMPLOYER

410 ADDITIONAL COPIES OF DRAWINGS/ DOCUMENTS

• Additional copies: Issued free of charge.

440 DIMENSIONS• Scaled dimensions: Do not rely on.

450 MEASURED QUANTITIES

• Ordering products and constructing the Works: The accuracy andsufficiency of the measured quantities is not guaranteed.

• Precedence: The specification and drawings shall override themeasured quantities.

460 THE SPECIFICATION

• Coordination: All sections must be read in conjunction with MainContract Preliminaries/ General conditions.

DOCUMENTS PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR/SUBCONTRACTORS/ SUPPLIERS

630 TECHNICAL LITERATURE• Information: Keep on site for reference by all supervisory

personnel:- Manufacturers' current literature relating to all products to be

used in the Works.- Relevant British, EN or ISO Standards.

640 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS AND GUARANTEES

• Components and equipment: Obtain or retain copies, register withmanufacturer and hand over on or before completion of the Works.

• Information location: In Building Manual.

• Emergency call out services: Provide telephone numbers for useafter completion. Extent of cover: Twenty four hours, seven days aweek.


£P

A32

MANAGEMENT OF THE WORKS

A32 MANAGEMENT OF THE WORKS

GENERALLY

110 SUPERVISION• General: Accept responsibility for coordination, supervision and

administration of the Works, including subcontracts.• Coordination: Arrange and monitor a programme with each

subcontractor, supplier, local authority and statutory undertaker,and obtain and supply information as necessary for coordination of the work.

115 CONSIDERATE CONSTRUCTORS SCHEME

• Registration: Before starting work, register the site and pay theappropriate fee:

• Contact:- Address: Considerate Constructors Scheme Office, PO Box 75,

Great Amwell, Ware, Hertfordshire, SG12 0YX.- Tel. 01920 485959.- Fax. 01920 485958.- Free phone 0800 7831423- Web. www.ccscheme.org.uk- E mail. [email protected]

• Standard: Comply with the Scheme's Code of ConsideratePractice.- Minimum compliance level: Basic compliance .

120 INSURANCE

• Documentary evidence: Before starting work on site submit details,and/ or policies and receipts for the insurances required by theConditions of Contract.

130 INSURANCE CLAIMS

• Notice: If any event occurs which may give rise to any claim or proceeding in respect of loss or damage to the Works or injury or damage to persons or property arising out of the Works,immediately give notice to the Employer, the person named inclause A10/140 and the Insurers.

• Failure to notify: Indemnify the Employer against any loss, whichmay be caused by failure to give such notice.

140 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS• Information: Record accurately and retain:

- Daily maximum and minimum air temperatures (includingovernight).

- Delays due to adverse weather, including description of theweather, types of work affected and number of hours lost.

150 OWNERSHIP

• Alteration/ clearance work: Materials arising become the propertyof the Contractor except where otherwise stated. Remove from siteas work proceeds.


£P

PROGRAMME/ PROGRESS

210 PROGRAMME• Master programme: Immediately when requested and before

starting work on site submit in an approved form a master programme for the Works, which must include details of:- Planning and mobilisation by the Contractor - Subcontractor's work.- Running in, adjustment, commissioning and testing of all

engineering services and installations.- Work resulting from instructions issued in regard to the

expenditure of provisional sums.- Work by others concurrent with the Contract.

• Submit 2 copies.

245 START OF WORK ON SITE

• Notice: Before the proposed date for start of work on site giveminimum notice of 2 weeks.

260 SITE MEETINGS• General: Site meetings will be held to review progress and other

matters arising from administration of the Contract.• Frequency: every 4 weeks.• Location: held on site.• Accommodation: Ensure availability at the time of such meetings.• Attendees: Attend meetings and inform subcontractors and

suppliers when their presence is required.• Chairperson (who will also take and distribute minutes): Contract

Administrator.

280 PHOTOGRAPHS

• Number of locations: six.

• Frequency of intervals: every week.

• Image format: JPEG.

• Number of images from each location: one.

• Other requirements: none

290 NOTICE OF COMPLETION• Requirement: Give notice of the anticipated dates of completion of

the whole or parts of the Works.• Associated works: Ensure necessary access, services and

facilities are complete.• Period of notice (minimum): 2 weeks.


£P

310 EXTENSIONS OF TIME• Notice: When a notice of the cause of any delay or likely delay in

the progress of the works is given under the contract, writtennotice must also be given of all other causes which applyconcurrently.

• Details: As soon as possible submit:- Relevant particulars of the expected effects, if appropriate,

related to the concurrent causes.- An estimate of the extent, if any, of the expected delay in the

completion of the Works beyond the date for completion.- All other relevant information required.

CONTROL OF COST

420 REMOVAL/ REPLACEMENT OF EXISTING WORK

• Extent and location: Agree before commencement.

• Execution: Carry out in ways that minimize the extent of work.

430 PROPOSED INSTRUCTIONS• Estimates: If a proposed instruction requests an estimate of cost,

submit without delay and in any case within seven days.

440 MEASUREMENT• Covered work: Give notice before covering work required to be

measured.

470 PRODUCTS NOT INCORPORATED INTO THE WORKS

• Ownership: At the time of each valuation, supply details of thoseproducts not incorporated into the Works which are subject to anyreservation of title inconsistent with passing of property as requiredby the Conditions of Contract, together with their respectivevalues.

• Evidence: When requested, provide evidence of freedom of reservation of title.


£P

A33

QUALITY STANDARDS/ CONTROL

A33 QUALITY STANDARDS/ CONTROL

STANDARDS OF PRODUCTS AND EXECUTIONS

110 INCOMPLETE DOCUMENTATION• General: Where and to the extent that products or work are not

fully documented, they are to be:- Of a kind and standard appropriate to the nature and character

of that part of the Works where they will be used.- Suitable for the purposes stated or reasonably to be inferred

from the project documents.Contract documents: Omissions or errors in description and/ or quantity shall not vitiate the Contract nor release the Contractor from any obligations or liabilities under the Contract.

120 WORKMANSHIP SKILLS

• Operatives: Appropriately skilled and experienced for the type andquality of work.

• Registration: With Construction Skills Certification Scheme.• Evidence: Operatives must produce evidence of skills/

qualifications when requested.

130 QUALITY OF PRODUCTS• Generally: New. (Proposals for recycled products may be

considered).• Supply of each product: From the same source or manufacturer.• Whole quantity of each product required to complete the Works:

Consistent kind, size, quality and overall appearance.

• Tolerances: Where critical, measure a sufficient quantity todetermine compliance.

• Deterioration: Prevent. Order in suitable quantities to a programmeand use in appropriate sequence.

135 QUALITY OF EXECUTION

• Generally: Fix, apply, install or lay products securely, accurately,plumb, neatly and in alignment.

• Colour batching: Do not use different colour batches where theycan be seen together.

• Dimensions: Check on-site dimensions.• Finished work: Without defects, e.g. not damaged, disfigured, dirty,

faulty, or out of tolerance.• Location and fixing of products: Adjust joints open to view so they

are even and regular.


£P

140 COMPLIANCE• Compliance with proprietary specifications: Retain on site evidence

that the proprietary product specified has been supplied.• Compliance with performance specifications: Submit evidence of

compliance, including test reports indicating:- Properties tested.- Pass/ fail criteria.- Test methods and procedures.- Test results.- Identity of testing agency.- Test dates and times.- Identities of witnesses.- Analysis of results.

150 INSPECTIONS

• Products and executions: Inspection or any other action must notbe taken as approval unless confirmed in writing referring to:- Date of inspection.- Part of the work inspected.- Respects or characteristics which are approved.- Extent and purpose of the approval.- Any associated conditions.

160 RELATED WORK• Details: Provide all trades with necessary details of related types of

work. Before starting each new type or section of work ensure previous related work is:- Appropriately complete.- In accordance with the project documents.- To a suitable standard.- In a suitable condition to receive the new work.

• Preparatory work: Ensure all necessary preparatory work has beencarried out.

170 MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS/ INSTRUCTIONS

• General: Comply with manufacturer's printed recommendationsand instructions current on the date of the Invitation to tender.

• Changes to recommendations or instructions: Submit details.

• Ancillary products and accessories: Use those supplied or recommended by main product manufacturer.

• Agrément certified products: Comply with limitations,recommendations and requirements of relevant valid certificates.

180 WATER FOR THE WORKS• Mains supply: Clean and uncontaminated.• Other: Do not use until:

- Evidence of suitability is provided.- Tested to BS EN 1008 if instructed.


£P

SAMPLES/ APPROVALS

210 SAMPLES• Products or executions: Comply with all other specification

requirements and in respect of the stated or implied characteristicseither:- To an express approval.- To match a sample expressly approved as a standard for the

purpose.

220 APPROVAL OF PRODUCTS

• Submissions, samples, inspections and tests: Undertake or arrange to suit the Works programme.

• Approval: Relates to a sample of the product and not to theproduct as used in the Works. Do not confirm orders or use theproduct until approval of the sample has been obtained.

• Complying sample: Retain in good, clean condition on site.Remove when no longer required.

230 APPROVAL OF EXECUTION• Submissions, samples, inspections and tests: Undertake or

arrange to suit the Works programme.• Approval: Relates to the stated characteristics of the sample. (If

approval of the finished work as a whole is required this isspecified separately). Do not conceal, or proceed with affectedwork until compliance with requirements is confirmed.

• Complying sample: Retain in good, clean condition on site.Remove when no longer required.

ACCURACY/ SETTING OUT GENERALLY

320 SETTING OUT

• General: Submit details of methods and equipment to be used insetting out the Works.

• Levels and dimensions: Check and record the results on a copy of drawings. Notify discrepancies and obtain instructions beforeproceeding.

• Inform: When complete and before commencing construction.

330 APPEARANCE AND FIT• Tolerances and dimensions: If likely to be critical to execution or

difficult to achieve, as early as possible either:- Submit proposals; or - Arrange for inspection of appearance of relevant aspects of

partially finished work.• General tolerances (maximum): To BS 5606, tables 1 and 2.

360 RECORD DRAWINGS

• Site setting out drawing: Record details of all grid lines, setting-outstations, benchmarks and profiles. Retain on site throughout thecontract and hand over on completion.


£P

SERVICES GENERALLY

410 SERVICES REGULATIONS• New or existing services: Comply with the Byelaws or Regulations

of the relevant Statutory Authority.

435 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CERTIFICATE• Submit: When relevant electrical work is completed.• Original certificate: To be lodged in the Building Manual.

445 SERVICE RUNS

• General: Provide adequate space and support for services,including unobstructed routes and fixings.

• Ducts, chases and holes: Form during construction rather than cut.

• Coordination with other works: Submit details of locations, types/methods of fixing of services to fabric and identification of runs andfittings.

450 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SERVICES• Final tests and commissioning: Carry out so that services are in full

working order at completion of the Works. • Building Regulations notice: Copy to be lodged in the Building

Manual.

SUPERVISION/ INSPECTION/ DEFECTIVE WORK

525 ACCESS

• Extent: Provide at all reasonable times access to the Works and toother places of the Contractor or subcontractors where work isbeing prepared for the Contract.

• Designate: Contract Administrator..

530 OVERTIME WORKING• Notice: Prior to overtime being worked, submit details of times,

types and locations of work to be done.- Minimum period of notice: 1 week.

• Concealed work: If executed during overtime for which notice hasnot been given, it may be required to be opened up for inspectionand reinstated at the Contractor's expense.

540 DEFECTS IN EXISTING WORK

• Undocumented defects: When discovered, immediately givenotice. Do not proceed with affected related work until responsehas been received.

• Documented remedial work: Do not execute work which may:- Hinder access to defective products or work; or - Be rendered abortive by remedial work.


£P

560 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS• Timing: Agree and record dates and times of tests and inspections

to enable all affected parties to be represented.• Confirmation: One working day prior to each such test or

inspection. If sample or test is not ready, agree a new date andtime.

• Records: Submit a copy of test certificates and retain copies onsite.

590A RESISTANCE TO PASSAGE OF SOUND to counselling rooms

• Method: Precompletion testing..

• Compliance: Submit results of testing.,- Copies: Incorporate in the Building Manual.

610 DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS/ EXECUTIONS

• Proposals: Immediately any work or product is known, or appears,to be not in accordance with the Contract, submit proposals for opening up, inspection, testing, making good, adjustment of theContract Sum, or removal and re-execution.

• Acceptability: Such proposals may be unacceptable and contraryinstructions may be issued.

WORK AT OR AFTER COMPLETION

710 WORK BEFORE COMPLETION• General: Make good all damage consequent upon the Works.

Temporary markings, coverings and protective wrappings:Remove unless otherwise instructed.

• Cleaning: Clean the Works thoroughly inside and out, including allaccessible ducts and voids. Remove all splashes, deposits,efflorescence, rubbish and surplus materials.

• Cleaning materials and methods: As recommended bymanufacturers of products being cleaned, and must not damage or disfigure other materials or construction.

• COSHH dated data sheets: Obtain for all materials used for cleaning and ensure they are used only as recommended by their manufacturers.

• Minor faults: Touch up in newly painted work, carefully matchingcolour and brushing out edges. Repaint badly marked areas backto suitable breaks or junctions.

• Moving parts of new work: Adjust, ease and lubricate as necessaryto ensure easy and efficient operation, including doors, windows,drawers, ironmongery, appliances, valves and controls.

720 SECURITY AT COMPLETION• General: Leave the Works secure with, where appropriate, all

accesses closed and locked.• Keys: Account for and adequately label all keys and hand over to

Employer with itemized schedule, retaining duplicate schedulesigned by Employer as a receipt.


£P

730 MAKING GOOD DEFECTS• Remedial work: Arrange access with Contract Administrator.• Rectification: Give reasonable notice for access to the various

parts of the Works.• Completion: Notify when remedial works have been completed.


£P

A34

SECURITY/ SAFETY/ PROTECTION

A34 SECURITY/ SAFETY/ PROTECTION

SECURITY, HEALTH AND SAFETY

120A EXECUTION HAZARDS• Common hazards: Control by good management and site practice.

130A PRODUCT HAZARDS

• Hazardous substances: Site personnel levels must not exceedoccupational exposure standards and maximum exposure limitsstated in the current version of HSE document EH40: WorkplaceExposure Limits.

• Common hazards: Control by good management and site practice.

140 CONSTRUCTION PHASE HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN• Submission: Present to the Employer/ Client no later than two

weeks before commencement of work on site.• Confirmation: Do not start construction work until the Employer has

confirmed in writing that the Construction Phase Health and SafetyPlan includes the procedures and arrangements required by theCDM Regulations.

• Content: Develop the plan from and draw on the OutlineConstruction Phase Health and Safety Plan, clause A30/570, andthe Pre-tender Health and Safety Plan/ Preconstructioninformation.

150 SECURITY

• Protection: Safeguard the site, the Works, products, materials, andany existing buildings affected by the Works from damage andtheft.

• Access: Take all reasonable precautions to prevent unauthorizedaccess to the site, the Works and adjoining property.

• Special requirements: none.

160 STABILITY• Responsibility: Maintain the stability and structural integrity of the

Works and adjacent structures during the Contract.• Design loads: Obtain details, support as necessary and prevent

overloading.

210 EMPLOYER'S REPRESENTATIVES SITE VISITS

• Safety: Submit details in advance, to the Employer or the personidentified in clause A10/140, of safety provisions and procedures(including those relating to materials, which may be deleterious),which will require their compliance when visiting the site.

• Protective clothing and/ or equipment: Provide and maintain onsite for the Employer and the person stated in clause A10/140 andother visitors to the site.


£P

PROTECT AGAINST THE FOLLOWING

330 NOISE CONTROL• Standard: Comply with the recommendations of BS 5228-1, in

particular clause 7.3, to minimize noise levels during the executionof the Works.

• Noise levels from the Works: Maximum level: 85 dB(A) whenmeasured from The site boundary except between the hours of 9.00 am to 5.00 pm..

• Equipment: Fit compressors, percussion tools and vehicles witheffective silencers of a type recommended by manufacturers of thecompressors, tools or vehicles.

• Restrictions: Do not use:- Pneumatic drills and other noisy appliances without consent

during the hours of 7.30-10.00am and 3.30-6.30pm.- Radios or other audio equipment or permit employees to use in

ways or at times that may cause nuisance.

340 POLLUTION

• Prevention: Protect the site, the Works and the generalenvironment including the atmosphere, land, streams andwaterways against pollution.

• Contamination: If pollution occurs inform immediately, including tothe appropriate Authorities and provide relevant information.

350 PESTICIDES• Use: Not permitted.

360 NUISANCE

• Duty: Prevent nuisance from smoke, dust, rubbish, vermin andother causes.

• Surface water: Prevent hazardous build-up on site, in excavationsand to surrounding areas and roads.

370 ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS

• Duty: Report immediately any suspected materials discoveredduring execution of the Works.- Do not disturb.- Agree methods for safe removal or encapsulation.

371 DANGEROUS OR HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES• Duty: Report immediately suspected materials discovered during

execution of the Works.- Do not disturb.- Agree methods for safe removal or remediation.

380 FIRE PREVENTION

• Duty: Prevent personal injury or death, and damage to the Worksor other property from fire.

• Standard: Comply with Joint Code of Practice 'Fire Prevention onConstruction Sites', published by the Construction Confederationand The Fire Protection Association (The 'Joint Fire Code').


£P

390 SMOKING ON SITE• Smoking on site: Not permitted.

400 BURNING ON SITE• Burning on site: Not permitted.

410 MOISTURE

• Wetness or dampness: Prevent, where this may cause damage tothe Works.

• Drying out: Control humidity and the application of heat to prevent:- Blistering and failure of adhesion.- Damage due to trapped moisture.- Excessive movement.

420 INFECTED TIMBER/ CONTAMINATED MATERIALS• Removal: Where instructed to remove material affected by fungal/

insect attack from the building, minimize the risk of infecting other parts of the building.

• Testing: carry out and keep records of appropriate tests todemonstrate that hazards presented by concentrations of airborneparticles, toxins and other micro organisms are within acceptablelevels.

430 WASTE

• Includes: Rubbish, debris, spoil, surplus material, containers andpackaging.

• General: Minimize production. Prevent accumulations. Keep thesite and Works clean and tidy.

• Handling: Collect and store in suitable containers. Removefrequently and dispose off site in a safe and competent manner:- Non-hazardous material: In a manner approved by the Waste

Regulation Authority.- Hazardous material: As directed by the Waste Regulation

Authority and in accordance with relevant regulations.

• Recyclable material: Sort and dispose at a Materials RecyclingFacility approved by the Waste Regulation Authority.

• Voids and cavities in the construction: Remove rubbish, dirt and residues before closing in.

• Waste transfer documentation: Retain on site.

460 POWER ACTUATED FIXING SYSTEMS• Use: Not permitted.


£P

PROTECT THE FOLLOWING

510 EXISTING SERVICES• Confirmation: Notify all service authorities, statutory undertakers

and/ or adjacent owners of proposed works not less than one weekbefore commencing site operations.

• Identification: Before starting work, check and mark positions of utilities/ services. Where positions are not shown on drawingsobtain relevant details from service authorities, statutoryundertakers or other owners.

• Work adjacent to services:- Comply with service authority's/ statutory undertaker's

recommendations.- Adequately protect, and prevent damage to services: Do not

interfere with their operation without consent of serviceauthorities/ statutory undertakers or other owners.

• Identifying services:- Below ground: Use signboards, giving type and depth;- Overhead: Use headroom markers.

• Damage to services: If any results from execution of the Works:- Immediately give notice and notify appropriate service authority/

statutory undertaker.- Make arrangements for the work to be made good without delay

to the satisfaction of service authority/ statutory undertaker or other owner as appropriate.

- Any measures taken to deal with an emergency will not affectthe extent of the Contractor's liability.

• Marker tapes or protective covers: Replace, if disturbed during siteoperations, to service authority's/ statutory undertakersrecommendations.

520 ROADS AND FOOTPATHS• Duty: Maintain roads and footpaths within and adjacent to the site

and keep clear of mud and debris.• Damage caused by site traffic or otherwise consequent upon the

Works: Make good to the satisfaction of the Employer, LocalAuthority or other owner.

540A RETAINED TREES/ SHRUBS/ GRASSED AREAS to front of siteonly as shown on external works drawing

• Protection: Preserve and prevent damage, except those notrequired.

• Replacement: Mature trees and shrubs if uprooted, destroyed, or damaged beyond reasonable chance of survival in their originalshape, as a consequence of the Contractor's negligence, must bereplaced with those of a similar type and age at the Contractor'sexpense.


£P

550A RETAINED TREES to front of site only as shown on externalworks drawing, single tree remaining.

• Protected area: Unless agreed otherwise do not:- Dump spoil or rubbish, excavate or disturb topsoil, park vehicles

or plant, store materials or place temporary accommodationwithin an area which is the larger of the branch spread of the tree or an area with a radius of half the tree's height, measuredfrom the trunk.

- Sever roots exceeding 25 mm in diameter. If unintentionallysevered give notice and seek advice.

- Change level of ground within an area 3 m beyond branchspread.

570 EXISTING WORK

• Protection: Prevent damage to existing work, structures or other property during the course of the work.

• Removal: Minimum amount necessary.

• Replacement work: To match existing.

580 BUILDING INTERIORS• Protection: Prevent damage from exposure to the environment,

including weather, flora, fauna, and other causes of materialdegradation during the course of the work.

620 ADJOINING PROPERTY• Permission: Obtain as necessary from owners if requiring to erect

scaffolding on or otherwise use adjoining property.

625 ADJOINING PROPERTY RESTRICTIONS

• Precautions:- Prevent trespass of workpeople and take precautions to prevent

damage to adjoining property.- Pay all charges.- Remove and make good on completion or when directed.

• Damage: Bear cost of repairing damage arising from execution of the Works.

630 EXISTING STRUCTURES• Duty: Check proposed methods of work for effects on adjacent

structures inside and outside the site boundary.• Supports: During execution of the Works:

- Provide and maintain all incidental shoring, strutting, needlingand other supports as may be necessary to preserve stability of existing structures on the site or adjoining, that may beendangered or affected by the Works.

- Do not remove until new work is strong enough to supportexisting structure.

- Prevent overstressing of completed work when removingsupports.

• Adjacent structures: Monitor and immediately report excessivemovement.

• Standard: Comply with BS 5975 and BS EN 12812.


£P

640 MATERIALS FOR RECYCLING/ REUSE• Duty: Sort and prevent damage to stated products or materials,

clean off bedding and jointing materials and other contaminants.• Storage: Stack neatly and protect until required by the Employer or

for use in the Works as instructed.


£P

A35

SPECIFIC LIMITATIONS ON METHOD/ SEQUENCE/TIMING

A35 SPECIFIC LIMITATIONS ON METHOD/ SEQUENCE/ TIMING

170 WORKING HOURS• Specific limitations: Monday - Friday 7.30am - 5.30pm, Saturday

and Sunday no working.


£P

A36

FACILITIES/ TEMPORARY WORK/ SERVICES

A36 FACILITIES/ TEMPORARY WORK/ SERVICES

GENERALLY

110 SPOIL HEAPS, TEMPORARY WORKS AND SERVICES• Location: Give notice and details of intended siting.• Maintenance: Alter, adapt and move as necessary. Remove when

no longer required and make good.

ACCOMMODATION

210 ROOM FOR MEETINGS

• Facilities: Provide suitable temporary accommodation for sitemeetings, adequately heated and lit. The room may be part of theContractor's own site offices.

• Furniture and Equipment: Provide table and chairs for sevenpeople.

230 TEMPORARY ACCOMMODATION• Proposals for temporary accommodation and storage for the

Works: Submit two weeks prior to starting on site.• Details to be included: Type of accommodation and storage, its

siting and the programme for site installation and removal.

TEMPORARY WORKS

340 NAME BOARDS/ ADVERTISEMENTS

• General: Obtain approval, including statutory consents, andprovide a temporary name board displaying:- Title of project: New Wellbeing Centre.- Name of Employer: Colchester MIND.- Names of Consultants: Ingleton Wood LLP.- Names of Contractor and Subcontractors: TBC.- Special requirements: none.

SERVICES AND FACILITIES

410 LIGHTING• Finishing work and inspection: Provide temporary lighting, the

intensity and direction of which closely resembles that delivered bythe permanent installation.


£P

420 LIGHTING AND POWER• Supply: Electricity from the Employer's mains may be used for the

Works as follows:- Metering: Metered by the Contractor and charged to the

Contractor..- Point of supply: TBC.- Available capacity: TBC.- Frequency: 50 Hz.- Phase: TBC.- Current: Alternating.

• Continuity: The Employer will not be responsible for theconsequences of failure or restriction in supply.

430 WATER

• Supply: The Employer's mains may be used for the Works asfollows:- Metering: Metered by the Contractor and charged to the

Contractor..- Source: TBC.- Location of supply point: TBC.- Conditions/ Restrictions: TBC.

• Continuity: The Employer will not be responsible for theconsequences of failure or restriction in supply.

440 TELEPHONES• Direct communication: As soon as practicable after the Date of

Possession provide the Contractor's person in charge with amobile telephone.

520 USE OF PERMANENT HEATING SYSTEM

• Permanent heating installation: May be used for drying out theWorks/ services and controlling temperature and humidity levels.

• Installation: If used:- Take responsibility for operation, maintenance and remedial

work. - Arrange supervision by and indemnification of the appropriate

Subcontractors.- Pay costs arising.

530 BENEFICIAL USE OF INSTALLED SYSTEMS• Permanent systems: Do not use for the Works.

540 METER READINGS• Charges for service supplies: Where to be apportioned ensure

that:- Meter readings are taken by relevant authority at possession

and/ or completion as appropriate.- Copies of readings are supplied to interested parties.


£P

570 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT• General: Provide for the sole use of those acting on behalf of the

Employer, in sizes to be specified:- Safety helmets to BS EN 397, neither damaged nor time

expired. Number required: two.- High visibility waistcoats to BS EN 471 Class 2. Number

required: two.- Safety boots with steel insole and toecap to BS EN ISO 20345.

Pairs required: two.- Disposable respirators to BS EN 149.FFP1S.- Eye protection to BS EN 166.- Ear protection - muffs to BS EN 352-1, plugs to BS EN 352-2- Hand protection - to BS EN 388, 407, 420 or 511 as appropriate.


£P

A37

OPERATION/ MAINTENANCE OF THE FINISHEDWORKS

A37 OPERATION/ MAINTENANCE OF THE FINISHED WORKS

GENERALLY

110 THE BUILDING MANUAL• Responsibility: contractor• Content: Obtain and provide comprehensive information for

owners and users of the completed Works. Include an overview of the main design principles and describe key components andsystems within the finished Works, so affording a completeunderstanding of the Works, including all buildings and their systems to enable efficient and safe operation and maintenance.

• Specific requirements: none.• Format: Hard copy and CD.• Number of copies: 2 of each.

• Delivery to: Contract Administator. by (date) Practical Completion.

115 THE HEALTH AND SAFETY FILE

• Responsibility: Contractor.

• Content: Obtain and provide the following information: (a) a brief description of the work carried out;

(b) any residual hazards which remain and how they have beendealt with (for example surveys or other information concerningasbestos);

(c) key structural principles and safe working loads for floors androofs, particularly where these may preclude placing scaffolding or heavy machinery there;

(d) information regarding the removal or dismantling of installedplant and equipment (for example any special arrangements for lifting, order or other special instructions for dismantling etc);

(e) health and safety information about equipment provided for cleaning or maintaining the structure;

(f) the nature, location and markings of significant services,including underground cables; gas supply equipment; fire-fightingservices etc;

(g) information and as-built drawings of the structure, its plant andequipment (for example, the means of safe access to and fromservice voids, fire doors and compartmentalisation etc). .

• Format: Hard copy and CD

• Delivery to: Contract Administrator By (date): Practical Completion.


£P

155 CONTENT OF THE BUILDING MANUAL• General: Details of the property, the parties, fire safety strategy,

operational requirements and constraints of a general nature.• Building fabric: Design criteria, maintenance details, product

details, and environmental and trafficking conditions.• Building services: Description and operation of systems,

diagrammatic drawings, record drawings, identification of services,product details, equipment settings, maintenance schedules,consumable items, spares and emergency procedures.

• Documentation: Guarantees, warranties, maintenanceagreements, test certificates and reports.

160 PRESENTATION OF BUILDING MANUAL

• Format: A4 size, plastics covered, loose leaf, four ring binders withhard covers, each indexed, divided and appropriately cover titled.

• Selected drawings needed to illustrate or locate items mentionedin the Manual: Where larger than A4, to be folded andaccommodated in the binders so that they may be unfoldedwithout being detached from the rings.

• As-built drawings: The main sets may form annexes to the Manual.


£P

A40

CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL COST ITEMS:MANAGEMENT AND STAFF

A40 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL COST ITEMS: MANAGEMENT AND STAFF

110 MANAGEMENT AND STAFF• Cost significant items: CONTRACTOR TO INSERT VALUE.


£P

A41

CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL COST ITEMS: SITEACCOMMODATION

A41 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL COST ITEMS: SITE ACCOMMODATION

110 SITE ACCOMMODATION• Details: Site accommodation required or made/ not made available

by the Employer: See section A36.• Cost significant items: CONTRACTOR TO INSERT VALUE.


£P

A42

CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL COST ITEMS: SERVICESAND FACILITIES

A42 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL COST ITEMS: SERVICES AND FACILITIES

110 SERVICES AND FACILITIES• Details: Services or facilities required or made/ not made available

by the Employer: See section A36.• Cost significant items: CONTRACTOR TO INSERT VALUE.


£P

A43

CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL COST ITEMS:MECHANICAL PLANT

A43 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL COST ITEMS: MECHANICAL PLANT

110 MECHANICAL PLANT• Cost significant items: CONTRACTOR TO INSERT VALUE.


£P

A44

CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL COST ITEMS:TEMPORARY WORKS

A44 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL COST ITEMS: TEMPORARY WORKS

110 TEMPORARY WORKS• Details: Temporary works required or made/ not made available by

the Employer: See section A36.• Cost significant items: CONTRACTOR TO INSERT VALUE.


£P

A50

WORK/ PRODUCTS BY/ ON BEHALF OF THEEMPLOYER

A50 WORK/ PRODUCTS BY/ ON BEHALF OF THE EMPLOYER

120A PRODUCTS PROVIDED BY/ ON BEHALF OF EMPLOYER• General: Client direct furniture, fittings, equipment etc. Contractor

is to fix. Materials delivered are to be used for no other purposethan the Works.

• Handling: Accept delivery, check against receipts and take intoappropriate storage.

• Surplus products: Keep safe and obtain instructions.


£P

A54

PROVISIONAL WORK/ ITEMS

A54 PROVISIONAL WORK/ ITEMS

110 PROVISIONAL SUMS FOR DEFINED WORK• Item: Asbestos Works.• Description of work: Works relating to inspection and removal of

asbestos materials.• Provisional Sums: Include £5,000.• Allow for general attendance.

590 CONTINGENCIES

• Provisional sum: Include: £5,000.


£P


SECTION 2.0:

NBS MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

Colchester MIND - Alteration and Refurbishment Works

18 December 2013

Materials and Workmanship

Table of Contents

Title Page

C Demolition/ Alteration/ Renovation 4

6DemolitionC20

D Groundwork 9

11Excavating and fillingD20

E In situ concrete/Large precast concrete 14

16In situ concreteE10

19Reinforcement for in situ concreteE30

21Worked finishes to in situ concreteE41

F Masonry 22

24Brick/ block wallingF10

27Accessories/ sundry items for brick/ block/ stone wallingF30

G Structural/Carcassing metal/timber 30

32Carpentry/ timber framing/ first fixingG20

H Cladding/Covering 34

36Fibre cement profiled sheet cladding/ coveringH30

39Lead sheet coverings/ flashingsH71

J Waterproofing 40

42Reinforced bitumen membrane roof coveringsJ41

K Linings/Sheathing/Dry partitioning 43

45Plasterboard dry linings/ partitions/ ceilingsK10

L Windows/Doors/Stairs 47

49Windows/ Rooflights/ Screens/ LouvresL10

51Doors/ shutters/ hatchesL20

54General glazingL40

M Surface finishes 56

58Cement based levelling/ wearing screedsM10

61Plastered/ Rendered/ Roughcast coatingsM20

64Stone/ Concrete/ Quarry/ Ceramic tiling/ MosaicM40

67Rubber/ plastics/ cork/ lino/ carpet tiling/ sheetingM50

71Painting/ clear finishingM60

N Furniture/Equipment 74

76Domestic kitchen fittings, furnishings and equipmentN11

78Sanitary appliances and fittingsN13

P Building fabric sundries 79

81Fire stopping systemsP12

84Unframed isolated trims/ skirtings/ sundry itemsP20

87Door/ window ironmongeryP21

Q Paving/Planting/Fencing/Site furniture 92

94Kerbs/ edgings/ channels/ paving accessoriesQ10

96Granular sub-bases to roads/ pavingsQ20

99Asphalt roads/ pavingsQ22

101Slab/ brick/ sett/ cobble pavingsQ25

R Disposal systems 102

104Rainwater drainage systemsR10

107Above ground foul drainage systemsR11

110Below ground drainage systemsR12

Z Building fabric reference specification 112

114Purpose made joineryZ10

116Preservative/ fire retardant treatmentZ12

118Fixings and adhesivesZ20

120MortarsZ21

123SealantsZ22

C

Demolition/ Alteration/ Renovation

C20 Demolition

5 SURVEY• Scope: Before starting deconstruction/ demolition work, examine

available information, and carry out a survey of:- the structure or structures to be deconstructed/ demolished,- the site on which the structure or structures stand, and- the surrounding area.

• Report and method statements: Submit, describing:- Form, condition and details of the structure or structures, the site

and the surrounding area.Extent: as per drawing 200 .

- Type, location and condition of features of historical,archaeological, geological or ecological importance.

- Type, location and condition of adjoining or surroundingpremises that might be adversely affected by removal of thestructure or structures or by noise, vibration and/ or dustgenerated during deconstruction/ demolition.

- Identity and location of services above and below ground,including those required for the Contractor's use, andarrangements for their disconnection and removal.

- Form and location of flammable, toxic or hazardous materials,including lead-based paint, and proposed methods for their removal and disposal.

- Form and location of materials identified for reuse or recycling,and proposed methods for removal and temporary storage.

- Proposed programme of work, including sequence and methodsof deconstruction/ demolition.

- Details of specific pre-weakening required.- Arrangements for protection of personnel and the general public,

including exclusion of unauthorized persons.- Arrangements for control of site transport and traffic.- Special requirements: none .

10 EXTENT OF DECONSTRUCTION/ DEMOLITION• General: Subject to retention requirements specified elsewhere,

deconstruct/ demolish structures down to finish floor levelinternally, externally to foundation level, as per drawing 200 .

15 BENCH MARKS

• Unrecorded bench marks and other survey information: Givenotice when found. Do not remove marks or destroy the fabric onwhich they are found.

25 LOCATION OF SERVICES• Services affected by the Works: Locate and mark positions.• Mains services marking: Arrange with the appropriate authorities

for services to be located and marked.

Material and Workmanship Page 6 of 123

£P

35 LIVE FOUL AND SURFACE WATER DRAINS• General: Protect drains and fittings still in use. Keep free of debris

and ensure normal flow during deconstruction/ demolition work.• Damage: Make good damage arising from deconstruction/

demolition work. Leave clean and in working order at completion of deconstruction/ demolition work.

50 WORKMANSHIP• Standard: Demolish structures in accordance with BS 6187.• Operatives: Appropriately skilled and experienced for the type of

work. Holding, or in training to obtain, relevant CITB Certificates of Competence.

• Site staff responsible for supervision and control of work:Experienced in the assessment of risks involved and methods of deconstruction/ demolition to be used.

55 SITE HAZARDS

• Precautions: Prevent fire and/ or explosion caused by gas and/ or vapour from tanks, pipes, etc.

• Dust: Reduce by periodically spraying with an appropriate wettingagent, or contain.- Lead dust: Submit method statement for control, containment

and clean-up regimes.• Site operatives and general public: Protect from vibration,

dangerous fumes and dust arising during the course of the Works.

60 ADJOINING PROPERTY• Temporary support and protection: Provide. Maintain and alter, as

necessary, as work proceeds. Do not leave unnecessary or unstable projections.

• Defects: Report immediately on discovery.

• Damage: Minimize. Repair promptly to ensure safety, stability,weather protection and security.

• Support to foundations: Do not disturb.

70 PARTLY DECONSTRUCTED/ DEMOLISHED STRUCTURES

• General: Leave partly in a stable condition, with adequatetemporary support at each stage to prevent risk of uncontrolledcollapse. Make secure outside working hours.

• Temporary works: Prevent overloading due to debris.• Access: Prevent access by unauthorized persons.

71 DANGEROUS OPENINGS• General: Provide guarding at all times, including outside of working

hours. Illuminate during hours of darkness.• Access: Prevent access by unauthorized persons.

76 ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS – UNKNOWNOCCURENCES

• Discovery: Give notice immediately of suspected asbestos-containing materials when discovered during deconstruction/demolition work. Avoid disturbing such materials.

• Removal: Submit statutory risk assessments and details of proposed methods for safe removal.


£P

78 UNFORESEEN HAZARDS• Discovery: Give notice immediately when hazards, such as

unrecorded voids, tanks, chemicals, are discovered duringdeconstruction/ demolition.

• Removal: Submit details of proposed methods for filling, removal,etc.

85 SITE CONDITION AT COMPLETION• Debris: Clear away and leave the site tidy on completion.• Special requirements: none.

86 SITE LEVELS AT COMPLETION

• Levels: Grade the site to follow the levels of adjacent areas.

90 CONTRACTOR'S PROPERTY• Components and materials arising from the deconstruction/

demolition work: Property of the Contractor except whereotherwise provided.

• Action: Remove from site as work proceeds where not to bereused or recycled for site use.


£P

C20

Demolition

D

Groundwork

D20

Excavating and filling

D20 Excavating and filling

20 STRIPPING TOPSOIL• General: Excavate from areas where there will be re-grading or

construction work.- Depth of removal: 150mm.

23 EXCAVATIONS AND BACKFILLING

• Prior to commencing excavation: Excavate trial pits adjacent toexisting foundations to determine extent and formation levels.- Allow for inspection of trial pits.- Allow time for amendment of details if required.

Time period: 1 week.

• Requirement: Where excavations are close; complete all workincluding backfilling to the lower excavation before the higher excavation is made.

• Backfill material:- Up to higher excavations formation level: Concrete as E10.- Above higher excavations formation level: Hardcore filling.

25 INSPECTING FORMATIONS• Notice: Make advance arrangements for inspection of formations

for foundations and filling formations .

30 OBSTRUCTIONS

• Recorded foundations, beds, drains, etc: Break out and seal off drain ends. Remove contaminated earth.

• Unrecorded foundations, beds, basements, filling, tanks, servicepipes, drains, etc: Give notice.

33 NEW FOUNDATIONS CROSSING OLD FOUNDATIONS ORWALLS

• New foundation/ wall:- Break out: The old foundation/ wall.

Length of breaking out: Width of the new foundation/ wall, plus 50 mm on either side of new foundation.Depth of breaking out: As necessary to permit the constructionof the new foundation to its design cross section. .

• New ground supported slabs:- Break out: The old foundation/ wall to a depth below the slab

formation level of at least 300 mm..Backfill: Obtain instructions if depth of fill will be greater than 600mm, otherwise backfill with compacted hardcore.

35 EXCESS EXCAVATIONS

• Excavation taken wider than required: Backfill as clause 60 .

• Excavation taken deeper than required: Backfill with well graded granular material or lean mix concrete .

40A SURPLUS EXCAVATED MATERIAL• Topsoil: remove all spoil from site• Remaining material: Remove from site.


£P

50 HAZARDOUS, AGGRESSIVE OR UNSTABLE MATERIALS• Generally: Do not import or use fill materials which would, either in

themselves or in combination with other material or ground water,give rise to a health hazard, damage to building structures or instability in the filling.

53 WATERGeneral: Keep excavations free from water until foundations andbelow ground constructions are completed.

55 PLACING FILL GENERALLY

• Excavations and areas to be filled: Free from loose soil, rubbishand standing water.

• Freezing conditions: Do not use frozen materials or materialscontaining ice. Do not place fill on frozen surfaces.

• Fill against structures, membranes or buried services: Place andcompact in a sequence and manner which will ensure stability andavoid damage.

58 GEOSYNTHETIC SHEET• Type: geotextile.• Recycled content: none permitted.• Jointing: 300mm overlap.• Preparation of subgrade: Before laying geotextile sheet, remove

humps and sharp projections. Fill hollows.• Protect from:

- Exposure to light.- Contaminants.- Materials listed as potentially deleterious by geotextile

manufacturer.- Wind uplift.

60 BACKFILLING AROUND FOUNDATIONS

• Under oversite concrete and pavings: Hardcore.

• Under grassed or landscaped areas: Material excavated from thetrench, laid and compacted in 300 mm layers.

62 FROST SUSCEPTIBILITY• General: Except as allowed below, fill must be non frost-

susceptible as defined in Highways Agency 'Specification for Highway Works', clause 801.17.

• Frost-susceptible fill: Use only within the external walls of buildingsbelow spaces that will be heated. Protect from frost duringconstruction.

65 HARDCORE

• Fill: Granular material, free from harmful matter and excessive dustor clay, well graded, all pieces less than 75 mm in any direction,and in any one layer only one of the following:- Crushed hard rock or quarry waste.- Crushed concrete, brick or tile, free from plaster.- Gravel or hoggin.

• Filling: Spread and level both backfilling and general filling inlayers not exceeding 150 mm. Thoroughly compact each layer.


£P

75 BLINDING TO HARDCORE• Surfaces to receive sheet overlays or concrete: Blind with:

- Concrete where shown on drawings; or - Sand, fine gravel, or other approved fine material applied to

provide a closed smooth surface.• Permissible deviation on surface level: +0 -25 mm.


£P

E

In situ concrete/Large precast concrete

E10

In situ concrete

E10 In situ concrete

15 SPECIFICATION• Concrete generally: To BS 8500-2.• Exchange of information: Provide concrete producer with

information required by BS 8500-1, clauses 4 and 5.

20 DESIGNATED CONCRETE FOR REINFORCED GROUNDFLOOR SLAB

• Designation: FND3..

• Fibres: Not required.

• Aggregates:- Size (maximum): 20 mm.- Coarse recycled aggregates: Not permitted..- Additional aggregate requirements: Rounded coarse aggregate.

• Special requirements for cement/ combinations: None.

• Consistence class: S3..

• Chloride class: normal.• Admixtures: none.• Additional mix requirements: none.

35 SUBSTITUTION OF STANDARDIZED PRESCRIBED FORDESIGNATED CONCRETE

• General: Conform to BS 8500-2, clause 8.• Substitution: In accordance with BS 8500-1, table A.7.

- Proposals: Submit for each substitution, stating reasons.• Site mixing: Conform to BS 8000-2.1, subsections 2, 3 and 4.

- Restrictions: Maximum pour size of 1 m³..

45 PROPERTIES OF FRESH CONCRETE

• Adjustments to suit construction process: Determine with concreteproducer. Maintain conformity to the specification.

50 PREMATURE WATER LOSS• Requirement: Prevent water loss from concrete laid on absorbent

substrates.- Underlay: Polyethylene sheet 250 micrometres thick.- Installation: Lap edges 150 mm.

60 PLACING AND COMPACTING

• Surfaces to receive concrete: Clean, with no debris, tying wireclippings, fastenings or free water.

• Timing: Place as soon as practicable after mixing and whilesufficiently plastic for full compaction.

• Temperature limitations for concrete: 30°C (maximum) and 5°C(minimum). Do not place against frozen or frost covered surfaces.

• Compaction: Fully compact to full depth to remove entrapped air especially around reinforcement, cast-in accessories, into cornersof formwork and at joints. Continue until air bubbles cease toappear on the top surface.- Methods of compaction: To suit consistence class and use of

concrete.


£P

70 CURING AND PROTECTING• Evaporation from surfaces of concrete: Prevent throughout curing

period.- Surfaces covered by formwork: Retain formwork in position and,

where necessary to satisfy curing period, cover surfaces immediately after striking.

- Top surfaces: Cover immediately after placing and compacting.Replace cover immediately after any finishing operations.

• Curing periods:- Surfaces which in the finished building will be exposed to the

elements, and wearing surfaces of floors and pavements: 10days (minimum).

- Other structural concrete surfaces: 5 days (minimum).• Protection: Protect concrete from shock, indentation and physical

damage.


£P

E30

Reinforcement for in situ concrete

E30 Reinforcement for in situ concrete

30 FABRIC REINFORCEMENT for ground floor slabs• Standard: To BS 4483.• Strength grade: B500B.

40 CONDITION OF REINFORCEMENT

• At time of placing concrete: Free from corrosive pitting, loose millscale, loose rust and contaminants which may adversely affect thereinforcement, concrete, or bond between the two.

55 LAPS IN REINFORCEMENT• Laps in bar reinforcement (minimum): Generally 38 x bar diameter,

but bars at top of beams 52 x bar diameter.• Laps in fabric reinforcement (minimum): 40 x bar diameter.

70 FIXING REINFORCEMENT• Standard: To BS 7973-1 and -2.• Installation: Provide adequate support, tie securely and maintain

the specified cover.- Tying wire: 16 gauge black annealed. Prevent intrusion into the

concrete cover.


£P

E41

Worked finishes to in situ concrete

E41 Worked finishes to in situ concrete

10 FINISHING• Timing: Carry out at optimum times in relation to setting and

hardening of concrete.• Prohibited treatments to surfaces:

- Wetting to assist surface working.- Sprinkling cement.

40 TROWELLED FINISH FOR WEARING SURFACES

• Surface on completion: Uniform and smooth, free from trowelmarks and blemishes.


£P

F

Masonry

F10

Brick/ block walling

F10 Brick/ block walling

5 FACING BRICKWORK above DPC to new cavity wall• Bricks: To BS EN 771-1.

- Manufacturer: contractors choice.Product reference: to match existing.

- Recycled content: none permitted.- Special shapes: none.

• Mortar: As section Z21.- Standard: To BS EN 998-2.- Mix: 1:1:6 cement:lime:sand..

• Bond: to match existing.

• Joints: to match existing.

36A CONCRETE BLOCKS to external face

• Manufacturer: Acheson & Glover.- Web: www.acheson-glover.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Alphatherm Lightweight Concrete Block

• Size: 440 x 215 x 100 mm.

37A CONCRETE BLOCKS to internal face• Manufacturer: H+H UK Ltd.

- Web: www.hhcelcon.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Celcon Standard Grade Blocks

• Thickness: 100 mm.

51 BASIC WORKMANSHIP

• Bond where not specified: Half lap stretcher.

• Mortar joints: Fill all vertical joints. Lay bricks, solid and cellular blocks on a full bed.

• AAC block thin mortar adhesive and gypsum block adhesive joints:Fill vertical joints. Lay blocks on a full bed.

• Clay block joints:- Thin layer mortar: Lay blocks on a full bed.- Interlocking perpends: Butted.

• Quoins and advance work: Rack back.• Locations for equal levelling of cavity wall leaves:

- Every course containing vertical twist type ties or other rigid ties.- Every third tie course for double triangle/ butterfly ties.- Courses in which lintels are to be bedded.

• Lift height (maximum) for walling using cement gauged or hydraulic lime mortar: 1.2 m above any other part of work at anytime.

• Daily lift height (maximum) for walling using cement gauged or hydraulic lime mortar: 1.5 m for any one leaf.

• Lift height (maximum) for walling using thin joint mortar glue: 1.3 mabove any other part of work at any time.


£P

60 ALTERATIONS/ EXTENSIONS• Coursing: Line up with existing work.• Block bonding new walls to existing: Unless agreed otherwise cut

pocket requirements as follows:- Width: Full thickness of new wall.- Depth (minimum): 100 mm.- Vertical spacing: As follows: - Brick to brick: 4 courses high at 8 course centres.- Block to block: Every other course.- Pocket joints: Fully filled with mortar.

• New and existing facework in the same plane: Bonded together atevery course to achieve continuity of bond and coursing.

• Support of existing work: Fully consolidate joint above insertedlintel or masonry with semidry mortar to support existing structure.

90 CRACKED BRICKS IN EXISTING FACEWORK

• Replacement: Prior to repointing adjacent cracked joints, cut outand replace with matching sound bricks to approval.

• Jointing mortar: As section Z21.- Standard: To BS EN 998-2.- Mix: 1:1:6 cement:lime:sand..

91 CRACKED JOINTS IN EXISTING FACEWORK WHICH IS NOTTO BE REPOINTED

• Crack width determining need for joint remedial work: Hairlinecracks, less than 1 mm wide, excluded..

• Preparation: Cut out joints to form a rectangular recess of 15-20mm depth. Clean and dampen joints sufficiently to control suction.

• Joint profile: To match existing.• Repointing mortar: As section Z21.

- Standard: To BS EN 998-2.- Mix: 1:1:6 cement:lime:sand..


£P

F30

Accessories/ sundry items for brick/ block/ stonewalling

F30 Accessories/ sundry items for brick/ block/ stone walling

5 CAVITIES• Concrete fill to base of cavity:• Concrete generally: To BS EN 206-1 and BS 8500-2.

- Designated concrete: GEN1 or Standard mix ST2 with highworkability.

- Extent: Maintain 75 mm between top of fill and external groundlevel and a minimum of 225 mm between top of fill and groundlevel dpc.

• Cleanliness: Keep cavity faces, ties and dpcs free from mortar anddebris.

8A WEEP HOLE

• Manufacturer: Cavity Trays Ltd.- Web: www.cavitytrays.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Euroweep-vent

• Colour: Grey.

• Duct extension: Not required.

• Render front cover: Required.

10A FULL FILL CAVITY INSULATION• Manufacturer: Rockwool Ltd.

- Web: www.rockwool.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Rockwool Cavity Wall Batts

• Thickness: 100 mm.

18A CAVITY CLOSER to new external walls

• Manufacturer: Cavity Trays Ltd.- Web: www.cavitytrays.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Quickcloser

20 CAVITY WALL TIES FOR ALL CAVITY WALLS• Standard: To BS 1243.

- Type: Butterfly .• Material/ finish: Steel galvanised after manufacture .• Sizes: minimum 200mm .

28 FIXING TIES IN MASONRY CAVITY WALLS• Embedment in mortar beds (minimum): 50 mm.• Placement: Sloping slightly downwards towards outer leaf without

bending. Drip centred in the cavity and pointing downwards.• Spacing: Staggered in alternate courses.

- Horizontal centres: 900mm .- Vertical centres: 450mm .

• Provision of additional ties: Within 225 mm of reveals of unbondedopenings at not more than 300 mm centres vertically .


£P

39A WALL STARTERS• Manufacturer: Expamet Building Products.

- Web: www.expamet.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Wall Starters

• Type: WS120.• Accessories: MSGFIX, Stainless steel.

46A DPC• Manufacturer: Cavity Trays Ltd.

- Web: www.cavitytrays.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Caviroll Premium DPC

• Width: 100 mm.

56A CAVITY TRAY

• Manufacturer: Cavity Trays Ltd.- Web: www.cavitytrays.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Type M Cavitray

• Location: to new external door opening .• Attached lead flashing: Not required.• Drop length: 150 mm.

62 SITE FORMED DPC/ CAVITY TRAY JUNCTIONS/ STOP ENDS• Three dimensional changes in shape: Form to provide a free

draining and watertight installation.• Alternative use of preformed cloaks/ stop ends: Submit proposals.

66 INSTALLATION OF HORIZONTAL DPCS

• Placement: In continuous lengths on full even bed of fresh mortar,with 100 mm laps at joints and full laps at angles.

• Width: At least full width of masonry leaf. Edges of dpc not coveredwith mortar or projecting into cavity.

• Overlying construction: Immediately cover with full even bed of mortar to receive next masonry course.

• Overall finished joint thickness: As close to normal as practicable.

• Ground level dpcs joint with damp proof membrane: Continuousand effectively sealed.

• Low level dpcs in external walls: Install not less than 150 mmabove adjoining finished ground level.

• Sill dpcs form and placement: In one piece and turned up at theback when the sill is in contact with inner leaf.

• Dpcs crossing cavity: Provide support to prevent sagging.

74 INSTALLATION OF VERTICAL DPCS• Form: In one piece wherever possible.

- Joints: Upper part overlapping lower not less than 100 mm.

• Dpcs to jambs of openings: Fully lap behind cavity tray/ lintel athead and over horizontal dpc at sill. Project not less than 25 mminto cavity and maintain full contact with frames.

• Fixing of jamb dpcs to back of built in timber frames: Secure usinggalvanized clout nails or staples.


£P

76A SEALANT to junction between brick and render • Manufacturer: BASF plc, Construction Chemicals .

- Web: www.basf-cc.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Masterflex 472

• Colour: Grey.• Accessories: None.

85A LINTELS to newly formed external door opening• Manufacturer: Catnic.

- Web: www.catnic.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Catnic CX110/100

• Material: Stainless steel.

• Length: as door opening.


£P

G

Structural/Carcassing metal/timber

G20

Carpentry/ timber framing/ first fixing

G20 Carpentry/ timber framing/ first fixing

2 TIMBER PROCUREMENT• Timber (including timber for wood based products): Obtained from

well managed forests/ plantations in accordance with: - The laws governing forest management in the producer country

or countries.- International agreements such as the Convention on

International Trade in Endangered Species of wild fauna andflora (CITES).

• Documentation: Provide either:- Documentary evidence (which has been or can be

independently verified) regarding the provenance of all timber supplied, or

- Evidence that suppliers have adopted and are implementing aformal environmental purchasing policy for timber and woodbased products.

5 STRUCTURAL SOFTWOOD FOR JOISTS• Grading standard: To BS 4978, BS EN 14081-1, or other national

equivalent and so marked.- Timber of a target thickness less than 100 mm and not specified

for wet exposure: Graded at an average moisture content notexceeding 20% with no reading being in excess of 24% andclearly marked as 'DRY' or 'KD' (kiln dried).

- Timber graded undried (green) and specified for installation athigher moisture contents: Clearly marked as 'WET' or 'GRN'.

• Strength class to BS EN 338: C16.• Treatment: Organic solvent impregnation to NBS section Z12 and

Wood Protection Association Commodity Specification C8, Servicelife: 40 years.

10 UNGRADED SOFTWOOD for internal nonstructural use

• Quality of timber: Free from decay, insect attack (except pinholeborers) and with no knots wider than half the width of the section.

• Surface finish: regularised.

• Treatment: untreated.

30 SELECTION AND USE OF TIMBER• Timber members damaged, crushed or split beyond the limits

permitted by their grading: Do not use.

32 NOTCHES, HOLES AND JOINTS IN TIMBER• Notches and holes: Position in relation to knots or other defects

such that the strength of members will not be reduced.• Scarf joints, finger joints and splice plates: Do not use without

approval.


£P

35 PROCESSING TREATED TIMBER• Cutting and machining: Carry out as much as possible before

treatment.• Extensively processed timber: Retreat timber sawn lengthways,

thicknessed, planed, ploughed, etc.• Surfaces exposed by minor cutting/ drilling: Treat with two flood

coats of a solution recommended by main treatment solutionmanufacturer.

40 MOISTURE CONTENT

• Moisture content of wood and wood based products at time of installation: Not more than:- Covered in generally unheated spaces: 24%.- Covered in generally heated spaces: 20%.- Internal in continuously heated spaces: 20%.

50 ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS

• Provision: Position and fix additional studs, noggings and/ or battens to support edges of sheet materials, and wall/ floor/ ceilingmounted appliances, fixtures, etc. shown on drawings.

• Material properties: Timber to be of adequate size and have thesame treatment as adjacent timber supports.

55 JOISTS GENERALLY• Centres: Equal, and not exceeding designed spacing.• Bowed joists: Installed with positive camber.• End joists: Positioned about 50 mm from masonry walls.

60 JOISTS ON HANGERS

• Hangers: Bedded directly on and hard against supportingconstruction. Do not use packs or bed on mortar.

• Joists: Cut to leave not more than 6 mm gap at each end. Rebatedto lie flush with underside of hangers.

• Fixing to hangers: A nail in every hole.

65A JOIST HANGERS• Manufacturer: Expamet Building Products.

- Web: www.expamet.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: SPH Joist Hangers

• Type: Standard.• Size:

- Depth: 100 mm.- Width: 50 mm.

90A RESTRAINT STRAPS

• Manufacturer: Expamet Building Products.- Web: www.expamet.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Restraint Straps

• Type: Standard, stainless steel (STSS).

• Length: minimum 1000mm.


£P

H

Cladding/Covering

H30

Fibre cement profiled sheet cladding/ covering

H30 Fibre cement profiled sheet cladding/ covering

10A FIBRE CEMENT to front elevation• Support structure: 25x38mm softwood treated battens every

600mm centres, bolted to existing external facade.• External sheets: To BS EN 494, Type NT (nonasbestos).

- Manufacturer: JamesHardie.Product reference: HardiePlank.

- Finish/ Colour: Khaki brown.

• Fittings: As recommended by cladding manufacturer.

• Primary cladding/ covering sheet fasteners: Self-drilling andtapping steel screws with oversize hole forming wings andassembled sealing washers and plastics caps..- Fastener profile location: crown.- Number of fasteners per sheet width:

Side laps size: 30mm.- Sealing: One row butyl rubber sealant tape. .

• Breather membrane: not required.Additional;EPDM tape; To cover the vertical joints between planks andbetween planks and trims/windows/doors.MetalTrim profiles; For internal and external cornersStarting profile secured into timber battens at bottom edge(stainless steel, with ventilation mesh and integral drip edge)Corner Details; The wall battens should be fitted so that theyoverlap at the corner forming a solid corner to which to fixHardiePlank® cladding and the corner profiles: HardieTrim®NT3™ fibre cement profiles or MetalTrim profiles.

70 FIXING GENERALLY• Cut edges: Clean, true lines.• Sheet orientation: Smooth surface uppermost and exposed joints

of side laps away from prevailing wind. Lay verge sheetsterminating with a crown.

• Sheet ends, laps and raking cut edges: Fully supported, withfixings at top of lap.

• Fasteners: Drill holes. Position at regular intervals in straight lines,centred on support bearings.- Hook/ Crook bolt and non wing device type fasteners: Position

centrally within oversized drilled holes.

• Debris and dust: Remove before fixing sheets.

• Completion: Check fixings to ensure watertightness and thatsheets are secure.

73 FIXING FIBRE CEMENT SHEETS• Holes for primary fixings: 2 mm larger than diameter of fasteners

(unless self-drilling type that create suitable clearance) and locatednot less than 40 mm from edge of sheets and fittings.

• Mitre joints: Open butt, 3-6 mm wide.- Box/ Check joints: Not permitted.


£P

80 SEALING LAPS ON EXTERNAL SHEETS• Sealant tape: Types recommended for the purpose by sheet

manufacturer.• Position of tape: Below fixing positions in straight, unbroken lines

parallel to and slightly back from edge of sheet.• End lap sealant tape position:

- Single line tape: Immediately below line of fasteners.- Second line tape (where specified): Slightly set back from the

edge of the external sheet.• Side lap sealant tape position:

- Single line tape: Outside line of fasteners.- Second line tape (where specified): On the other side of the

fasteners.


£P

H71

Lead sheet coverings/ flashings

H71 Lead sheet coverings/ flashings

2A REFER TO BAUDER SPEC


£P

REF No: PROJECT NAME: COLCHESTER MIND NBS SECTION H71 RELATED LEADWORK CLAUSES (to be read in conjunction with Section J41) 770A NON- LEAD COUNTER-FLASHINGS (CHASES UP TO 18 MM WITHOUT A DPC)

• Location: Counter-flashings to abutment upstands • Thickness: 3.5 mm. • Lengths: These should not exceed 1500 mm when one edge is wedged and pointed into a

chase in masonry. Where counter-flashings are built into bitumen sheet roofing (sandwiched between layers) the maximum length should be reduced to 1000 mm.

• Installation: All counter-flashing sections to be lapped by 150 mm and wedged at 300 mm centres. All work should be carried out by competent tradesmen in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.

• Chase preparation: Cut a chase in the mortar bed course (normally 10 mm approx.) to a depth of 25 mm, providing sufficent space to insert both the counter-flashing and the wedges. All chases should be brushed clean and sealed using Bauder sealant primer prior to the application of the Bauder Mastic Sealant.

• Sealant: Bauder Mastic Sealant, colour: Grey. 780A NON-LEAD COUNTER-FLASHINGS (CHASES UP TO 18 MM WHERE A DPC IS

PRESENT) • Location: Counter-flashings to abutment upstands • Thickness: 3.5 mm. • Lengths: these should not exceed 1500 mm when one edge is wedged and pointed into a


• Installation: All counter-flashing sections to be lapped by 150 mm and base clipped with wedges provided at 300 mm centres. All work should be carried out by competent tradesmen in accordance with current British Codes of Practice and the manufacturers instructions.

• Chase preparation: Cut a chase in the mortar bed course (normally 10 mm width approx.) to a depth of 25 mm. In addition, cut a rebate in the top of the brick course under the joint to increase the overall chase width to not more than 18 mm and to a depth of 25 mm, so that there is sufficent space to insert both the counter-flashing and the wedges, without damaging the DPC. All chases should be brushed clean and sealed using Bauder sealant primer prior to the application of the Bauder Mastic Sealant.

• Sealant: Bauder Mastic Sealant, colour: Grey.

785B NEW NON-LEAD COUNTER-FLASHINGS BELOW WINDOW CILLS / DOOR THRESHOLDS

• Thickness: 3.5 mm • Lengths: these should not exceed 1500 mm when one edge is wedged and pointed into a


• Installation: All lead counter-flashing sections to be lapped by 150 mm and base clipped fixed to woodwork at 300 mm centres. All work should be carried out by competent tradesmen in accordance with current British Codes of Practice and the manufacturers instructions.

• Gaps: Seal all gaps between lead and door/window cills with Bauder sealant. • Sealant: Bauder Mastic Sealant, colour: Grey.

J

Waterproofing

J41

Reinforced bitumen membrane roof coverings

J41 Reinforced bitumen membrane roof coverings

10A REFER TO BAUDER SPEC


£P

REF No: PROJECT NAME: COLCHESTER MIND NBS SECTION J41 - DESCRIPTION OF WORKS Section J41 deals with the installation of the Bauder Waterproofing System, comprising coverings of multiple layers of reinforced bituminous membranes laid and jointed using self-adhesive and/or torch application as required. It includes where required, the vapour control layer, thermal insulation, underlayer and capping sheet membranes (root resistant for green roof systems) and presumes the deck substrate and roof falls as stated within the specification below. Accessories are included where relevant. It is intended for use on projects where the detailed design is completed by the specifier (architect or landscape architect) with technical assistance from the manufacturer as required and should be read in conjunction with any project specific drawings provided. SCOPE OF WORKS This section includes:

• The Bauder waterproofing system. • Related Bauder system accessories • Thermal insulation that meets the required U Value. • Internal rainwater outlets (but not the connected drainage/plumbing goods)

This section does not include:

• Construction of the structural deck. • Proprietary rainwater drainage / plumbing – refer NBS section R10 • Lightning protection – refer NBS Engineering Services, Section W60. • Lead sheet coverings / flashings – See NBS Section H71.

J41 REINFORCED BITUMEN MEMBRANE ROOF COVERINGS To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions. TYPES OF COVERING 110 BUILT-UP REINFORCED BITUMEN MEMBRANE WARM DECK ROOF COVERING

• Roof area: Single Storey Roof • Substrate: New Plywood deck (designed and constructed to provide a minimum finished

slope of 1°). - Preparation: As clause 610A.

• Vapour control layer: BauderTEC KSD Mica, 2.5 mm thick aluminium lined, elastomeric bitumen self-adhesive vapour . Installation as clause 670G

• Insulation: Bauder PIR FA-TE flat board, fire resistant, aluminium foil faced, zero ODP, highly efficient rigid urethane insulation 120mm total thickness to achieve the required U-Value (refer Clause 230). Installation as clause 680A

• Insulation to upstands: Vertical upstands to roof light kerbs, access hatches i.e. builders kerbs (but excluding proprietary insulated integrated rooflight units) and changes of level, the Insulation is to be the same thickness and meet the same thermal value as used for the flat area. Installation as clause 681D

• Vertical upstands to insulated cavity wall abutment s only: 30 mm thick, BauderPIR flat board, fire resistant, zero ODP, highly efficient rigid urethane insulation. In compliance with Part L of the current Building Regulations, the insulation to wall abutments should be 300 mm

REF No: PROJECT NAME: COLCHESTER MIND

in height from the deck surface to the top of the upstand, with the vertical insulation being installed before the flat, so as to retain the insulation at the base. Installation as clause 681D

• Waterproof covering: BAUDER TOTAL ROOF SYSTEM - System manufacturer: Bauder Limited, 70, Landseer Road, Ipswich, Suffolk, IP3 0DH.

Tel: 01473 257 671. Fax: 01473 230 761. Email: [email protected] Web: www.bauder.co.uk

- Underlayer: BauderTEC KSA DUO, 3 mm thick, 200g/m² glass-fibre reinforced, elastomeric self-adhesive bitumen underlayer.

Attachment: As clauses 710, 747A - Top layer / Cap sheet: Bauder K5K, 5 mm thick, 250g/m² polyester reinforced, elastomeric

bitumen torch applied capping sheet, charcoal grey finish. Attachment: As clauses 710, 750A - Flashings and detail work: Bauder K5K capping sheet, charcoal grey finish. Install as

clause 775A • Surface protection: Designated areas of maintenance access walkway defined using Bauder

K5K capping sheet, Brown finish. Install as clause 863A. • Accessories: -

- Proprietary pipe penetration conduit pipes (supplied by others), as clause 480A. Installation in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.

- Proprietary pipe supports (supplied by others), as clause 480B. Installation in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

- Proprietary soil vent pipe covers (supplied by others), as clause 480C. Installation in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.

- Bauder Insulation upstand support brackets. Installation, as clause 775A. - Bauder 61 mm x 61 mm PIR angle fillets. Installation, as clause 775A. - Supply and install new Bauder Bituminous Standard Insulated Vertical Outlets, quantity

as required, 100 mm or 150 mm nominal bore, to fit the specified drainage pipework and complete with pre-attached bitumen connection flange and dome grating. The appropriate depth extension unit (supplied separately) must when this outlet is used within warm roof construction. Installation as clause 784B.

• Additional Requirements: 210, 230, 515, 520, 530, 540, 560, 561, 562, 910A, 940, 950B • Supply and install Bauder Euroglaze rooflights, in accordance with Section L10, clause 460

and the separately supplied Bauder rooflight schedule. Latchways Constant Force Post System (supplied direct by Latchways), part number 65690-00 approved for use within Bauder bituminous systems. Refer to Section N25 and the manufacturer’s recommendations and installation guidance.

• Contact: Latchways plc, Hopton Park, DEVIZES, Wiltshire, SN10 2JP Telephone: +44 (0)1380 732700. email: [email protected]

- For associated lead work, refer to Section H71 for the following items: - Provision for forming a chase and installing lead substitute counter-flashings to brickwork or concrete upstands (with no DPCc present). Refer H71, clause 770A. Provision for forming a chase and installing lead substitute counter-flashings to brickwork or concrete upstands (with a DPC present). Refer H71, clause 780A.

PERFORMANCE 210 ROOF PERFORMANCE

• General: Secure, free draining and weather tight.

230 INSULATION


• Thermal transmittance (U-Value) of roof: 0.17 W/m²K • Finished Surface: Suitably even, stable and robust to receive roof covering. • Insulation compliance: To relevant British Standard or Agrément certified.

PRODUCTS 320 PRIMER

• Type: Any commercially available Bituminous Priming Solution meeting characteristics of BS 8217, clause 5.6.2. supplied by approved installer, or Bitumen cut back with volatile solvent.

• Characteristics when tested to BS EN 13357: - Volatile solvent content (minimum): 40% by mass. - Viscosity (maximum) (STV at 25°C, 4 mm orifice): 10s.

320A FAST DRYING PRIMER

• Type: Any commercially available fast drying Bituminous Priming Solution meeting characteristics of BS 8217, clause 5.6.2., supplied by an approved installer.

330 TIMBER TRIMS, ETC

• Quality: Planed. Free from wane, pitch pockets, decay and insect attack (except ambrosia beetle damage).

• Moisture content at time of covering (maximum): 22%. • Preservative treatment: Please note organic solvent based timber preservatives are not

permitted, as these attack bitumen based materials.

331 PREFORMED METAL HARD EDGE INSULATION PROTECTI ON ANGLES • Material: Galvanised mild steel • Thickness: 1mm • Dimensions: 50 mm x 50 mm • Length: 3 m max.

335A ANGLE FILLETS

• Material: Treated timber angle fillets - Size (minimum): 50mm x 50 mm.

• Quality: Planed. Free from wane, pitch pockets, decay and insect attack (except ambrosia beetle damage).

• Moisture content at time of covering (maximum ): 22%. • Preservative treatment: Please note organic solvent based timber preservatives are not

permitted, as these attack bitumen based materials. EXECUTION GENERALLY 515 ADVERSE WEATHER

• General: Do not lay coverings in high winds, wet or damp conditions or in extremes of temperature unless effective temporary cover is provided over working area.

• Unfinished areas of roof: Keep dry, protect edges of laid membrane from wind action. 520 INCOMPLETE WORK

• End of working day: Provide temporary seal to prevent water infiltration. • On resumption of work: Cut away tail of membrane from completed area and remove from

roof.

REF No: PROJECT NAME: COLCHESTER MIND 530 APPLYING PRIMERS

• Coverage per coat (minimum): As per manufacturer’s recommendations. • Surface coverage: Even and full. • Coats: Fully bond. Allow volatiles to dry off thoroughly between coats.

540 APPLYING BONDING COMPOUNDS

• Temperature of compound: Suitable to achieve bond over whole surface. Do not overheat. 560 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP REQUIREMENTS

• Installation of the Bauder waterproofing system may only be carried out by trained and certified operatives approved by Bauder Ltd and who carry current ID badges. These should be available for inspection at all times.

• Workmanship must comply with Codes of Practice BS 8217:2005 (or alternatively Bauder Ltd.’s specification where otherwise stated). Non-compliant workmanship will not be permitted, even if the system is watertight. The client will be told that all such faults must be remedied, before the Guarantee is issued.

• All waterproofing materials and system components must be supplied by Bauder Ltd, unless otherwise stated. Any sub-standard materials or un-authorised alternatives will be rejected. Any building work which is the responsibility of the roofing contractor and has a bearing on the life of the Bauder System must be carried out by properly trained and qualified tradesmen.

• Any structural damage, peculiarities or details discovered that might affect the performance of the Bauder system, should be reported immediately to the client’s representative and Bauder Limited in order that they may assist in overcoming the problem.

• The contractor is to ensure water tightness of the roof at all times. Proper day joints must be formed at the end of each working day to provide a temporary seal. No mopping or loose covers will be permitted.

• Where building works are to be carried out by other trades, following completion of the waterproofing, the contractor must make adequate provision for supplying protection to prevent damage to the new membranes. The final inspection will not be carried out by the Bauder Site Technician or the Bauder nominated Independent surveyor until all associated trades are complete and the roof areas are clear from all debris and protection layers.

• It is imperative that the Bauder Approved Contractor conforms to the workmanship criteria as listed above. Any deviation will result in the contract being considered unguaranteeable.

• All mechanical and electrical work to plant and equipment should be carried out by competent mechanical and electrical qualified tradesmen. All plant is to be reinstated and re-commissioned on completion of the roofing works in accordance with the client's detailed specification.

• Where building works are to be carried out by other trades, following completion of the waterproofing, the contractor must make adequate provision for supplying protection to prevent damage to the new waterproofing.

• If any items of plant/equipment are to be situated on the finished roof, a sacrificial layer of Bauder capping sheet is to be loose laid beneath. This is to extend a minimum 25mm past the point of contact on all sides. In the case of heavy items it may be necessary to introduce a load-spreading slab, please contact Bauder for further advice.

• All lead work to be carried out by skilled tradesmen and in accordance with current codes of practice and the recommendations of the Lead Development Association.

561 SITE INSPECTIONS

• Bauder Site Technicians will carry out regular inspections of the project during the course of the works. The Approved Contractor must give reasonable notice to Bauder of their intention to commence laying capping sheet. This will allow a discretionary inspection of the underlayer to take place, so that any remedial treatment necessary can be carried out prior to installing


the capping sheet. This is particularly important when tapered insulation has been used to ensure that any areas of standing water that may remain can be addressed.

• Bauder must be notified when the roof is ready for final inspection and all related works and snagging complete. See also clauses 910A or 910B (Landscaped roofs).

562 HEALTH & SAFETY INFORMATION – ROOFING WORK

1. Suitable precautions must be taken to prevent accidents occurring when roofing systems are being installed.

2. The contractor must ensure that adequate measures are taken to effectively prevent injury to

members of the public and other persons using the premises.

3. Whenever possible, access to the roof should be made via internal staircases rather than by temporary means. Where this is not available, it is the responsibility of the contractor to ensure a safe means of access and a safe working place is established though the risk assessment process.

4. Where microwave equipment is installed at roof level, care must be taken to prevent persons

working on the roof from being exposed to large doses of microwave radiation.

5. Similarly, the contractor should liaise with the client to ensure that there are no extract outlets situated on the roof where noxious or harmful emissions could affect persons working. Suitable precautions will be necessary to prevent exposure where this situation arises.

6. The contractor is responsible for providing adequate fire fighting equipment in the form of

extinguishers during work on the roof. These should be kept in easily accessible locations and be suitably signed.

7. The contractor must ensure that suitable written method statements and risk assessments are

available for the work being undertaken. It is essential that working at height and manual handling methods be fully assessed as roofing materials are heavy and can cause serious injury.

8. The contractor must ensure that suitable information about the roof covering is provided to the

Client at the end of the work to ensure that work in future can be carried out safely. This information will form part of the Health and Safety File.

9. All persons working on the roof should be provided with, and wear, suitable personal protective

equipment and wet weather gear as identified in the risk assessment. Training must be provided to all contract staff on the safe use of the equipment.

10. The installer must observe Product Safety Datasheets and complete COSHH assessments

relevant to the materials being used.

11. No work must be carried out on fragile roofs or where there are skylights unless a suitable risk assessment has been completed and precautions taken to prevent persons falling through fragile roofs and openings.

12. HSE guidance must be followed when carrying out any work involving interference with

asbestos.

13. Current CDM Regulations must be observed.


SUBSTRATES / VAPOUR CONTROL LAYERS / WARM ROOF INSU LATION 610A SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES (PLYWOOD)

• Substrates generally: Secure, clean, dry, smooth, and free from frost, contaminants, voids and protrusions. The new WPB plywood deck, thickness as specified by client, should be BBA certified, conforming to BS EN 1995 & CPD/CE compliant, fixed directly to either the joists or firings using non corroding ring shank nails or recommended screw fasteners.

• Falls: Where provided, the falls/cross-falls should be designed to 1:40 to achieve minimum finished falls of 1:80 to comply with drainage requirements of BS 6229:2003 and current codes of practice BS 8217:2005. No deflections or back-falls present if the deck is designed to achieve a 0° level finished surface (e.g. when using tapered insulation to provide falls).

• Preliminary work: Complete including: - Formation of upstands, kerbs, box gutters, sumps, grooves, chases and expansion joints.

- Fixing of battens, fillets and anchoring plugs/strips. • Moisture content and stability of substrate: Must not impair roof integrity. • Preparation: All such items to be rectified as necessary to eliminate the possibility of

puncturing the new waterproofing system. • Taping of board joints: Tape centrally over board joints with 200mm wide strips of Bauder

R333 taping strip. These can be retained temporarily in place with clout nails, prior to the self-adhesive vapour barrier being laid.

• Priming: Prime all areas receiving the new waterproofing with fast drying bitumen primer, as clause 320A, and ensure this is thoroughly dry before applying the new waterproofing.

640 FIXING TIMBER TRIMS

• Fasteners: type/length appropriate and suitable to particular deck substrate. • Fixing centres (maximum): 500 mm.

641 INSTALLING PREFORMED METAL HARD EDGE INSULATIO N PROTECTION ANGLES

• Location: Use to provide hard edge protection at all internal gutter channels on warm roofs where the insulation from the flat area steps down to meet the insulation in the gutter sole.

• Preparation: Surface to be inspected and cleaned if necessary using white spirit to remove any contaminants, dirt or dust or alternatively primed with bituminous primer. Prepared material to be thoroughly dry before use

• Installation: The 50 x 50 mm galvanised mild steel angle to be adhered to the exposed leading edge of the insulation using a small thin intermittent line of Bauder Polyurethane membrane adhesive along the upper surface/edge. The purpose being to retain the metal in position to prevent any post-installation movement.

670G LAYING VAPOUR CONTROL LAYER

• Attachment: Cold applied and fully bonded to substrate in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.

• Side and end laps: minimum 100 mm, laid with all laps torch sealed to provide a 5-10 mm bitumen bead extrusion. Installation methods as recommended by manufacturer.

• Penetrations: Fully seal using bonding methods recommended by manufacturer. • Edges of insulation at roof edges, abutments, upsta nds, kerbs, penetrations and the

like : Enclose, with vapour control layer: - Dressed up 150 mm above surface of insulation, thus providing 100 mm (minimum) seal when overlapped by the roof covering. - Care should be taken to ensure adhesion when the temperature is below + 5º C.

REF No: PROJECT NAME: COLCHESTER MIND 680A LAYING WARM ROOF INSULATION

• Setting out: - Long edges: Fully supported (if metal deck - run at right angles to metal deck troughs) - End edges: Fully supported. - Joints: close butted together. - End joints: Stagger.

• Bedding: Fully bed into torch activated bonding stripes of vapour control layer surface. • Multiple board layers: Where the total thickness of insulation required is greater than can be

achieved by a single standard board, then additional boards of the same product can be adhered to make up the total thickness required. These additional boards should be bonded using Bauder Insulation Adhesive, either in linear stripes or snake bonded, achieving no less than an minimum overall bond of 50%.

• Protection to exposed edges of insulation: Reduced thickness treated timber batten as clause 640 (or equivalent plywood construction), a minimum width of 150 mm and 10 mm less in thickness than the insulation to accommodate the build-up of the waterproofing layers – all securely fixed to the deck. Outer edges chamfered at changes in level.

• Completion: Boards must be in good condition, well-fitting and stable. 681D INSTALLING WARM ROOF INSULATION (INSULATED UPS TANDS)

• Attachment: Mechanically fastened through the vapour control layer into the vertical upstand structure, as clause 355B. Board joints to be close butted. Upstand insulation boards should be installed before the insulation to the flat areas so that the vertical upstand insulation is retained both at the base and at the top. At vertical wall abutments that are cavity insulated, retention is obtained by mechanical fixing of the Bauder insulation support bracket.

• Protective hard edges: treated timber battens or Bauder Insulated upstand brackets (as appropriate to given detail situation) must be used at all right angled edges e.g. top edges of parapet walls or abutment upstands.

• Encapsulation seal: Provision must be allowed for forming a minimum 100 mm lap seal between the vapour control layer and underlayer, where the insulation finishes.

WATERPROOF COVERINGS/ ACCESSORIES

710 LAYING REINFORCED BITUMEN MEMBRANES GENERALLY • Direction of laying: Unrolled up the slope.

- Where practicable, install so that water drains over and not into laps. • Side and end laps (minimum): 100 mm, with the exception of mineral surfaced membranes,

where side laps are 80 mm, but the head laps to remain 100 mm. • Head and side laps: Offset. • Intermediate and top layer/Capping sheet: Fully bond. • Successive layers: Apply without delay. Do not trap moisture. • Strips of bitumen membrane for 'linear' details: Cut from length of roll e.g. gutter sole

pieces. • Detail flashings: to be cut from width of roll. • Completed coverings: Firmly attached, fully sealed, smooth, weather proof and free draining.

740A TORCH-ON BONDING OF REINFORCED BITUMEN UNDERL AYER

• Bond: Partially bonded in the approved Bauder manner. • Laps: Head and side laps to be 100 mm. All laps to upstands, edge details, flashings, etc., to

be a minimum 100 mm. The underlayer must be taken up all upstands, edge details, in accordance with current British Standards and the manufacturer’s recommendations.

• Underlayer inspection: The Approved Contractor must give reasonable notice to the nominated Bauder Site Technician of their intention to commence laying capping sheet. This


will allow a discretionary inspection of the underlayer to take place, so that any remedial treatment necessary can be carried out prior to installing the capping sheet.

• Alternative detailing membrane (flammable abutments ): For application to areas constructed from potentially flammable materials, such as timber, plywood OSB/3 etc. or where considered appropriate to minimise fire risk, the Bauder Self-Adhesive Underlayer appropriate to the specified system must be used for the underlayer detailing.

747A SELF-ADHESIVE BONDING OF REINFORCED BITUMEN U NDERLAYER

• Bond: Full over whole surface, with no air pockets. • Underlayer: Cold applied and fully bonded by removing the release foil sheet and installing in

the approved Bauder manner, using the Bauder long handled roller to extrude a 5-10 mm bead of bitumen. Head laps to be 100 mm side laps to be 80 mm, lapping red strip over blue and torch sealing. All laps to upstands, edge details, flashings, etc., to be 100 mm. The underlayer must be taken up all upstands, edge details, in accordance with current British Standards and the manufacturer’s recommendations.

• Alternative underlayer for detail work: For detailing to un-insulated abutment upstands, where the waterproofing is to be applied to rough or uneven non-combustible surfaces i.e. brickwork or concrete, it is permissible for the installing contractor to use the Bauder underlayer appropriate to the specified system where this product is considered to be better for application to these surfaces. For all other situations, and particularly to vertical insulation, the Bauder Self-Adhesive Underlayer appropriate to the specified system must be used.

• Underlayer inspection: The Approved Contractor must give reasonable notice to the nominated Bauder Site Technician of their intention to commence laying capping sheet. This will allow a discretionary inspection of the underlayer to take place, so that any remedial treatment necessary can be carried out prior to installing the capping sheet.

750A LAYING MINERAL FACED REINFORCED BITUMEN TORCH- ON CAPPING SHEET

• Bond: Full over whole surface, with no air pockets. • Excess compound at laps of top layer/ capping sheet : Leave as a 5 mm - 10 mm

continuous bitumen bead extrusion. • Laying top layer: Fully bonded to the underlayer by torching in the approved Bauder manner.

Head laps to be 100 mm, side laps to be 80 mm. All laps to upstands, edge details, flashings, etc. to be 100 mm.

• Final Inspection: The finished roof must be thoroughly inspected by the Bauder Site Technician. This is to ensure that any remedial treatment that is necessary can be carried out prior to issuing the guarantee. Failure to ensure the instigation of this inspection will result in the issuing of the Bauder guarantee being put in jeopardy.

775A SKIRTINGS AND UPSTANDS

• Insulated upstand brackets: Bauder insulated upstand support brackets must be used at all vertical abutment wall upstands (where the wall cavity is insulated) in conjunction with 30 mm Bauder insulation. These are to be fixed at 400mm centres using suitable fixings through the vapour barrier, so that the top edge is a minimum of 300mm above the surface of the deck. A 3mm gap should be left between adjacent sections. The detail is to be carried out in accordance with the Bauder detail drawing, where provided.

• Angle fillets: Bauder PIR angle Fillets (61 mm x 61 mm) must be used at all right angled upstands, provisionally bonded in Bauder PUR membrane adhesive and subsequently retained once the underlay detailing is applied. Under no circumstances must fillets of an alternative material be incorporated (i.e. cork, fibre, etc.) as this would invalidate the guarantee.

• Layers of bitumen membrane: Carry in staggered formation up the upstand, with each layer fully bonded.

• Upstands:


• At ends of rolls: Underlay layer only, form with bitumen membrane carried up without using separate strip.

• Elsewhere: Form with matching strips of bitumen membrane, maintaining laps. • Additional fixing of bitumen membranes: Mechanically fix the top leading edge of all

upstand details in excess of 250 mm in height using appropriate fasteners. In the event of doubt, Bauder should be consulted regarding any specific requirement.

• Upstand details (minimum height): 150 mm. This must be taken from the surface of the finished landscaping. Special attention should be paid to all structures, such as rooflights, counter-flashings, window and door cills, pipes etc. Bauder cannot take responsibility for water ingress over waterproofing details constructed below the recommended minimum height.

• Flashings: Separate flashings must always be formed. Capping sheet taken up the upstand in one piece will not be permitted.

775B SKIRTINGS AND UPSTANDS

• Angle fillets: as per clause 335A, must be incorporated at all right angled upstand abutments, screw fixed to the structural deck. Alternatively, BauderPIR angle fillets may be used, bonded using cold applied Bauder polyurethane membrane adhesive. Under no circumstances must fillets of an alternative material be incorporated (i.e. cork, fibre, etc.) as this would invalidate the guarantee.

• Layers of bitumen membrane : Carry in staggered formation up the upstand, with each layer fully bonded.

• Upstands: - At ends of rolls: Underlay layer only - Form with specified bitumen membrane carried up without using separate strip.

• Elsewhere: Form with matching strips of bitumen membrane, maintaining laps. • Additional fixing of bitumen membranes : Mechanically fix all upstands in excess of 250 mm

in height using appropriate fasteners. In the event of doubt, Bauder should be consulted regarding any specific requirement.

• Upstand details (minimum height): 150 mm minimum, taken from the surface of the finished landscaping. Special attention should be paid to all structures, such as rooflights, counter-flashings, window and door cills, pipes etc. Bauder cannot take responsibility for water ingress over waterproofing details constructed below the recommended minimum height.

• Flashings: Separate flashings must always be formed. Capping sheet taken up the upstand in one piece will not be permitted.

784B ROOF DRAINAGE OUTLETS

• Product name: Bauder Bituminous Standard Insulated Vertical Outlet • Material: Cast polyurethane body with integral bituminous connection flange. • Product size/ reference: 100 mm to fit 110 mm pipework (Part Nr. GB60260100).

150 mm to fit 160 mm pipework (Part Nr. GB60260150). • Flow rate: Based upon vertical pipework and a 35 mm head of water pressure – according to

BS EN 1206:3:2000. - 100 mm - 7.4 litres/sec. - 150 mm - 7.2 litres/sec.

• Pipe connection: Bauder Standard Insulated Vertical Outlets are suitable for connection to: - uPVC “O” ring socketed soil grade pipe to BS 4514: 1983 - Socketed and socket-less cast iron pipework to BS 416:1973 and EN 887. Socketed

pipework will require cold caulking or PVC to cast iron adaptors. Socket-less pipework can be connection using an appropriate SML mechanical coupling.

- HDPE pipework with appropriate SML mechanical coupling • Type of grate/ fittings: supplied with a tough polyamide leaf guard.


• Insulation Extension - Warm roofs only: When the outlet is used as part of a warm roof build-up and the insulation thickness exceeds 50 mm, an additional extension component must be used. The Bauder Standard Extension Unit is available in two sizes: - 50mm -120 mm (ref. Part Nr. GB60261050) - 120mm - 220 mm (ref. Part Nr. GB60261120)

The extension unit must be mechanically fixed through the PUR rim to the structural deck. • Installation requirements: These outlets are components that form part of the Bauder

waterproofing system and for guarantee reasons, should only be installed by Bauder Approved installers. Connectivity to below deck drainage pipework to be the responsibility of the plumbing contractor.

• Fixing: The outlet is to be secured through the rim to the structural deck by a minimum of four fasteners appropriate to obtain an adequate attachment to the deck substrate material. Some deck structures require preparatory works before the outlets can be installed: - - Concrete decks – the opening for the outlet to be either pre-cast or core-drilled so that the

outlet can be installed at the same time as the vapour barrier layer. Provision for a 250 mm dia. opening is required.

- Profiled metal decks – these also require a 250 mm dia. Opening cut into the decking, but in addition will require a 600 x 600 x 1.25 mm galvanised steel reinforcing plate secured to the deck before the outlet can be installed. This item has a pre-cut 250 mm dia. hole and is available from Bauder as accessory item, ref: Part Nr. GB60266250.

- For detailed information, refer to the product installation guidelines.

COMPLETION 910A INSPECTION

• Interim and final roof inspections: Strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements for guarantee.

• Notification: It is the responsibility of the approved contractor to advise Bauder Ltd when the roof is ready for Final Inspection.

• Other requirements: Please also refer to preliminaries / general conditions. • Site contact details - Site Technician: Mike Goo dchild, Tel: 07889 680430 • Technical Contact Details - Area Sales Manager: And rew Leggett , Tel: 07881 245022

940 COMPLETION

• Roof areas: Clean. • Outlets: Clear. • Work necessary to provide a weather tight finish: Complete. • Storage of materials on finished surface: Not permitted. • Completed membrane: Do not damage. Protect from chemicals, traffic and adjacent or high

level working. 950B GUARANTEE

• A 20 year product and workmanship guarantee is to be provided upon completion following a Final Inspection by Bauder. Details regarding the full terms and conditions are available separately from Bauder Ltd upon request. This system must installed by a Bauder Approved Contractor, to be eligible for guarantee.

K

Linings/Sheathing/Dry partitioning

K10

Plasterboard dry linings/ partitions/ ceilings

K10 Plasterboard dry linings/ partitions/ ceilings

15 LINING ON TIMBER INTERNAL DDA WC PARTITIONS• Substrate: Studs at 400mm centres.• Linings: 12.5mm plasterboard.

- Recycled content: submit proposals.• Fixing: screws at 300mm centres.• Finishing: skim coat plaster.

- Primer/ Sealer: As recommended by board manufacturer for apaint finish..

- Accessories: Metal beads/ stops recommended by boardmanufacturer..

15A LINING ON TIMBER INTERNAL PARTITIONS

• Substrate: Studs at 400mm centres.

• Linings: 12.5mm acoustic plasterboard.- Recycled content: submit proposals.

• Fixing: screws at 300mm centres.• Finishing: skim coat plaster.

- Primer/ Sealer: As recommended by board manufacturer for apaint finish..

- Accessories: Metal beads/ stops recommended by boardmanufacturer..

25 LINING ON TIMBER FRAMED CEILINGS• Substrate: joists at 400mm centres.• Linings: Two layers 12.5 mm plasterboard. Staggard-joints.

- Recycled content: submit proposals.

• Fixing: screws at 300mm centres.

• Finishing: skim coat plaster.- Primer/ Sealer: As recommended by board manufacturer for a

paint finish.- Accessories: Metal beads/ stops recommended by board

manufacturer..

65 DRY LINING GENERALLY

• General: Use fixing, jointing, sealing and finishing materials,components and installation methods recommended by boardmanufacturer.

• Plasterboards: To BS EN 520.• Cutting plasterboards: Neatly and accurately without damaging

core or tearing paper facing. Minimize cut edges.• Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers.• Finishing: Neatly to give flush, smooth, flat surfaces free from

bowing and abrupt changes of level.

67 SKIM COAT PLASTER FINISH

• Plaster type: multi-finish.- Thickness: 2-3 mm.

• Joints: Fill and tape except where coincident with metal beads.

• Finish: Tight, matt, smooth surface with no hollows, abruptchanges of level or trowel marks.


£P

69 INSTALLING BEADS/ STOPS• Cutting: Neatly using mitres at return angles.• Fixing: Securely using longest possible lengths, plumb, square and

true to line and level, ensuring full contact of wings with substrate.• Finishing: After joint compounds/ plasters have been applied,

remove surplus material while still wet from surfaces of beadsexposed to view.

70 ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS• Framing: Accurately position and securely fix to give full support to:

- Partition heads running parallel with, but offset from mainstructural supports.

- Fixtures, fittings and services.- Board edges and lining perimeters.

85 MINERAL WOOL INSULATION

• Fitting insulation: Closely butted joints and no gaps. Preventslumping.

• Electrical cables overlaid by insulation: Size accordingly.

87 SEALING GAPS AND AIR PATHS• Sealing: Apply sealant to perimeter abutments and around

openings as a continuous bead with no gaps.- Gaps between floor and underside of plasterboard: After sealing,

fill with joint compound.

90 SEAMLESS JOINTING

• Filling and taping: Fill joints, gaps and internal angles with jointingcompound and cover with continuous lengths of tape, fully bedded.

• Finishing: Feather out jointing compound to give a flush, smooth,seamless surface.

• Nail/ screw depressions and minor indents: Fill to give a flushsurface.


£P

L

Windows/Doors/Stairs

L10

Windows/ Rooflights/ Screens/ Louvres

L10 Windows/ Rooflights/ Screens/ Louvres

30A PVC-U WINDOWS to all windows• Manufacturer: Deceuninck Ltd. or similar approved

- Web: www.deceuninck.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: 2500 Chamfered Windows – Casement,

Internally Glazed• Window:

- Style: top hung.- Outer frame size: 52 mm.- Transoms and mullions: 68 mm.

Joints: Cruciform.

• Window frame:- Couplings: Lightweight.- Extensions, sills and weathering trims: Not required.- Bay corner posts: Not required.

• Colour: Dark grey RAL 7042 to exterior, RAL 9016, white tointernal face.

• Glazing: Double glazed.- Glazing beads: internal.- Options: Not required.

• Ironmongery: As section P21.

• Ventilation: Trickle ventilator to head.

• Accessories: Finishing trims and Reveal liners.

65 PRIMING/ SEALING• Wood surfaces inaccessible after installation: Prime or seal as

specified before fixing components.

75A SEALANT

• Manufacturer: Sika Limited.- Web: www.sika.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Sikaflex® Construction+ iCure

• Colour: White.

80 IRONMONGERY• Fixing: Assemble and fix carefully and accurately using fasteners

with matching finish supplied by ironmongery manufacturer. Do not damage ironmongery and adjacent surfaces.

• Checking/ adjusting/ lubricating: Carry out at completion andensure correct functioning.


£P

L20

Doors/ shutters/ hatches

L20 Doors/ shutters/ hatches

10 TIMBER PROCUREMENT• Timber (including timber for wood-based products): Obtained from

well-managed forests and/ or plantations in accordance with: - The laws governing forest management in the producer country

or countries.- International agreements such as the Convention on

International Trade in Endangered Species of wild fauna andflora (CITES).

• Documentation: Provide either:- Documentary evidence (which has been or can be

independently verified) regarding the provenance of all timber supplied.

- Evidence that suppliers have adopted and are implementing aformal environmental purchasing policy for timber and wood-based products.

20 WOOD FLUSH DOORS FD 30S FIRE RESISTING AND SMOKECONTROL

• Manufacturer: contractors choice.- Product reference: contractors choice.

• Facings: American White Oak.• Lippings: American white oak.• Preservative treatment: none.• Finish as delivered: American white oak.• Glazing/ Infill details: none.

- Manifestation: none.- Beading: none.

• Other requirements: Intumescent strips and smoke strips.Doors to be have solid core, contractor to submit information of doors used prior to installation for approval .

45 DOORS TO MAIN ENTRANCE – ALUMINIUM

• Manufacturer: Comar.- Product reference: Comar 7.

• Finish as delivered: RAL 7042 to external or internal faces.

• Glazing/ Infill details: double glazed units .- Manifestation: required, to have client logo.- Beading: internal.

• Ironmongery: electronic PIR sensor, with key lock over ride systemwith three settings, close, auto, open .

• Other requirements: none.


£P

45A PVC-U DOOR/ DOOR FRAME PROFILES for rear elevation doors• Manufacturer: Deceuninck.

- Web: www.deceuinck.com- Product reference: 2500 Chamfered door, internally glazed- Security features in accordance with PAS 24

• Door profile: Residential.- Colour: Dark grey RAL 7042 to exterior, RAL 9016, White

interior.

Glazing: Double glazed to top half - Glazing beads: internalIronmongery: as section P21

50A WOOD DOOR FRAMES internal

• Manufacturer: contractors choice.- Product reference: contractors choice.

• Finish as delivered: Prepared and primed as section M60..

• Fixing: Built in with cramps as section Z20..- Spacing of fixings (frames not predrilled): Maximum 150 mm

from ends of each jamb, adjacent to each hanging point and at600 mm maximum centres.Schedule of components:-Linings - width of wall x 32mmArchitraves - 44 x 18mm, pencil roundStops - 44 x 18mmAll finished in painted softwood

70 FIRE RESISTANCE• Requirement: Specified performance to be the minimum period

attained when tested for integrity in accordance with BS 476-22,BS EN 1634-1 or BS EN 1634-3.

75 FIRE RESISTING/ SMOKE CONTROL DOORS/ DOORSETS

• Gaps between frames and supporting construction: Filled asnecessary in accordance with door/ doorset manufacturer'sinstructions.

80A SEALANT• Manufacturer: Sika Limited.

- Web: www.sika.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Sikaflex® Construction+ iCure

• Colour: White.

85 FIXING IRONMONGERY GENERALLY• Fasteners: Supplied by ironmongery manufacturer.

- Finish/ Corrosion resistance: To match ironmongery.• Holes for components: No larger than required for satisfactory fit/

operation.

• Adjacent surfaces: Undamaged.

• Moving parts: Adjusted, lubricated and functioning correctly atcompletion.


£P

L40

General glazing

L40 General glazing

10 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY• Glazing:

- Generally: To BS 6262.- Integrity: Wind and watertight under all conditions. Make full

allowance for deflections and other movements.• Glass:

- Standards: Generally to BS 952 and to the relevant parts of:BS EN 572 for basic soda lime silicate glass.BS EN 1096 for coated glass.BS EN 12150 for thermally toughened soda lime silicate glass.BS EN ISO 12543 for laminated glass.

- Quality: Free from scratches, bubbles and other defects.- Dimensional tolerances: Panes/ sheets to be accurately sized.

• Material compatibility: Glass/ plastics, surround materials, sealersprimers and paints/ clear finishes to be compatible. Comply withglazing/ sealant manufacturers' recommendations.

20 REMOVAL OF GLASS/ PLASTICS FOR REUSE• Existing glass/ plastics, glazing compound, beads, etc.: Remove

carefully, avoiding damage to frame, to leave clean, smoothrebates free from obstructions and debris. Clean glazing, beadsand other components that are to be reused.

• Deterioration of frame/ surround: Submit report on defectsrevealed by removal of glazing.- Affected areas: Do not reglaze until instructed.

30 PREPARATION

• Surrounds, rebates, grooves and beads: Clean and prepare beforeinstalling glazing.

50A GLASS FOR RECEPTION AREA SCREEN

• Manufacturer: Pilkington Building Products - UK.- Web: www.pilkington.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Eclipse Advantage™ Toughened Glass

• Thickness: 8 mm.• Colour: Clear.

57A GLASS TYPE• Manufacturer: Pilkington Building Products - UK.

- Web: www.pilkington.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Suncool™ High Performance Glass

• Type: Toughened.• Thickness: 6 mm.

• Colour: Clear.


£P

95A FROSTED WINDOW FILM• Manufacturer: The Window Film Company UK Ltd.

- Web: www.windowfilm.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Frostbrite® Window Film.


£P

M

Surface finishes

M10

Cement based levelling/ wearing screeds

M10 Cement based levelling/ wearing screeds

7A PROPRIETARY QUICK DRYING LEVELLING SCREEDS TONEW ENTRANCE FOYER

• Substrate: In situ concrete slab.• Screed manufacturer: Ardex.

- Product reference: A 38.• Screed construction: Fully bonded, as clause 30..• Supply and lay Ardex P 51 primer to existing floor

surface/substrate- In strict accordance with manufacturers instructions and

recommendationsThickness:

- Nominal: 60mm.- Maximum: 70mm.

• Mix:- Cement: manufacturers standard.- Proportions (cement:sand): Manufacturer's standard.

• Finish: Trowelled.- To receive: textile floorcoverings.

30 FULLY BONDED CONSTRUCTION• Removing mortar matrix: Shortly before laying screed, expose

coarse aggregate over entire area of hardened base.• Texture of surface: Suitable to accept screed and achieve a full

bond over complete area.• Bonding coat: As recommended by screed manufacturer.

45 AGGREGATES AND CEMENTS

• Sand: To BS EN 13139.- Grading limits: In accordance with BS 8204-1, Table B.1.

• Coarse aggregates:- Standard: To BS EN 12620.

• Cement:- Cement types: In accordance with BS 8204-1, clause 5.1.3.

47 ADMIXTURES• Standards; In accordance with BS 8204-1, Table 1.• Calcium chloride: Do not use in admixtures.

50 MIXING• Water content: Minimum necessary to achieve full compaction.• Mixing: Mix materials thoroughly to uniform consistency in a

suitable forced action mechanical mixer.

52 COMPACTION

• General: Compact thoroughly over entire area.

• Screeds over 50 mm thick: Lay in two layers of equal thickness.Roughen surface of compacted lower layer then immediately layupper layer.


£P

55 JOINTS IN LEVELLING SCREEDS• Laying screeds: Lay continuously using 'wet screeds' between

strips or bays. Minimize defined joints.

80 TROWELLED FINISH TO WEARING SCREEDS• Floating: To an even texture with no ridges or steps.• Trowelling: Successively trowel at intervals, applying sufficient

pressure to close surface and give a uniform, smooth finish freefrom trowel marks and other blemishes.

90 CURING

• Curing period (minimum): As soon as screed has set sufficiently,closely cover with polyethylene sheeting for period recommendedby screed manufacturer..

• Drying after curing: Allow screeds to dry gradually.


£P

M20

Plastered/ Rendered/ Roughcast coatings

M20 Plastered/ Rendered/ Roughcast coatings

19A RENDER SYSTEM• Manufacturer: Sto Ltd.

- Web: www.sto.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: StoRend Cote System

• Substrate: Concrete blockwork.- Preparation: StoPrep Contact - Bonding bridge paint coat.

• Levelling coat: StoLevell Cote- Number of coats: 2.- Overall thickness: 18 mm (minimum).

• Intermediate coat: Sto-Primer

• Decorative finish render: StoSilco K cement free silicone render.- Colour: TBC.- Texture: Smooth - Stolit/ Sto Silco MP.

• Accessories: Sto Render Stop beads and Sto PVC Mesh Anglebeads.

30A THISTLE MULTI FINISH to all internal block and plasterboardwalls

• Manufacturer: British Gypsum.- Web: www.british-gypsum.com.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Thistle Multi Finish

60 CEMENTS FOR MORTARS• Cement: To BS EN 197-1 and CE marked.

- Types: Portland cement, CEM I.Portland slag cement, CEM II.Portland fly ash cement, CEM II.

- Strength class: 32.5, 42.5 or 52.5.

• Sulfate resisting cement: To BS 4027 and Kitemarked.- Strength class: 42.5.

• Masonry cement: To BS EN 998-1 and Kitemarked- Class: MC 12.5 (with air entraining agent).

62 ADMIXTURES FOR CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS• Air entraining (plasticizing) admixtures: To BS EN 934-2 and

compatible with other mortar constituents.• Other admixtures: Submit proposals.• Prohibited admixtures: Calcium chloride and admixtures containing

calcium chloride.

65 MIXING• Render mortars (site-made):

- Batching: By volume using gauge boxes or buckets.- Mix proportions: Based on damp sand. Adjust for dry sand.

• Mixes: Of uniform consistence and free from lumps.


£P

67 COLD WEATHER• Internal work: Take precautions to prevent damage to internal

coatings when air temperature is below 3°C.• External work: Avoid when air temperature is at or below 5°C and

falling or below 3°C and rising.

71 SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES• General: Suitable to receive coatings. Sound, free from

contamination and loose areas.

82 BEADS/ STOPS

• Location: External angles and stop ends.

• Materials:- External render: Stainless steel.- Internal plaster/ render: Galvanized steel.

• Fixing: Secure and true to line and level.- Beads/ stops to external render: Fix mechanically.

87 APPLICATION OF COATINGS• General: Apply coatings firmly and achieve good adhesion.• Appearance of finished surfaces: Even and consistent. Free from

rippling, hollows, ridges, cracks and crazing.- Accuracy: Finish to a true plane with walls and reveals plumb

and square.• Drying out: Prevent excessively rapid or localized drying out.• Keying undercoats: Cross scratch (plaster coatings) and comb

(render coatings). Do not penetrate undercoat.

93 CURING AND DRYING OF RENDER COATINGS

• Curing: Keep each coat damp by covering with polyethylene sheetand/ or spraying with water - Curing period (minimum): As recommended by render

manufacturer.

• Drying: Allow each coat to dry thoroughly, with shrinkagesubstantially complete before applying next coat.

99 RENDER FINAL COAT - PLAIN FLOATED FINISH• Finish: Even, open texture free from laitance.


£P

M40

Stone/ Concrete/ Quarry/ Ceramic tiling/ Mosaic

M40 Stone/ Concrete/ Quarry/ Ceramic tiling/ Mosaic

5A TILING TO• Tiles: splash back to wash handbasins and to kitchenette walls .

- Manufacturer/ Supplier: H&R Johnsons.Product reference: Prismatics.

- Colour: white.- Size: 200 x 100mm, stretcher bond.- Recycled content: as manufacture.- Other requirements: Contractor to allow for pricing group 2 .

• Background/ Base: Previously painted plaster .- Preparation: Clean and degrease.

Background/Base: New skim plaster - Preparation: Provide 2 no. mist coats emulsion.

• Bedding: Adhesive bed – notched trowel method, as clause 50. .- Adhesive: as recommended by tile manufacturer.

• Joint width: as spacer lugs.

• Grout: white.Movement joints: none.

15 NEW BACKGROUNDS/BASES• Background drying times (minimum):

- Brick/block walls: 6 weeks.- Rendering: 2 weeks.- Gypsum plaster: 4 weeks.

• Base drying times (minimum):- Concrete slabs: 6 weeks.- Cement:sand screeds: 3 weeks.

20 EXISTING BACKGROUNDS/BASES GENERALLY

• Efflorescence, laitance, dirt, loose and defective material: Removeand make good defective areas with materials compatible withbackground/base and bedding.

• Deposits of oil, grease and other materials incompatible with thebedding: Remove.

• Tile, paint and other nonporous surfaces: Clean.

• Wet backgrounds: Dry before tiling.

• Paint with unsatisfactory adhesion: Remove so as not to impair bedding adhesion.

25 NEW PLASTER• Plaster primer: Apply if recommended by adhesive manufacturer.


£P

30 FIXING GENERALLY• Colour/ shade: Avoid unintended variations within tiles for use in

each area/ room.- Variegated tiles: Mix thoroughly.

• Adhesive: Compatible with background/ base.• Cut tiles: Neat and accurate.• Fixing: Provide adhesion over entire background/ base and tile

backs.• Final appearance: Before bedding material sets, make

adjustments necessary to give true, regular appearance to tilesand joints.

• Deviation of surface: Measure from underside of a 2 mstraightedge with 3 mm thick feet placed anywhere on surface.The straightedge should not be obstructed by the tiles/ mosaicsand no gap should be greater than 6 mm, i.e. a tolerance of + 3mm.

• Surplus bedding material: Clean from joints and face of tiles/mosaics.

35 SETTING OUT

• Joints: True to line, continuous and without steps.- Joints on walls: Horizontal, vertical and aligned round corners.- Joints in floors: Parallel to main axis of space or specified

features.

• Cut tiles: Minimise number, maximise size and locateunobtrusively.

• Joints in adjoining floors and walls: Align.• Joints in adjoining floors and skirtings: Align.

50 ADHESIVE BED - NOTCHED TROWEL METHOD TO WALLS• Application: By 3 mm floated coat of adhesive to dry background.

Comb surface.• Tiling: Press tiles firmly onto float coat.

70 GROUTING

• Sequence: Grout when bed/adhesive has set sufficient to preventdisturbance of tiles.

• Joints: 6 mm deep (or depth of tile if less). Free from dust anddebris.

• Grouting: Fill joints completely, tool to profile, clean off surface.Leave free from blemishes.

• Polishing: When grout is hard, polish tiling with dry cloth.


£P

M50

Rubber/ plastics/ cork/ lino/ carpet tiling/ sheeting

M50 Rubber/ plastics/ cork/ lino/ carpet tiling/ sheeting

10A REFER TO FINISHES SCHEDULE .

15A CARPET TILING to areas noted in finishes schedule

• Base Preparation: remove existing carpet.

• Carpet tiles:- Manufacturer: Forbo.

Product reference: Create Space 2.- Recycled content: as manufactured.- Size: 450 x 450mm.- Colour/ pattern: TBC.

• Method of laying: Fully adhere all tiles with release adhesiverecommended by tile manufacturer.

15B CARPET TILING to areas noted in finishes schedule• Base Preparation: remove existing carpet.• Carpet tiles:

- Manufacturer: Forbo.Product reference: Arran.

- Recycled content: as manufactured.- Size: 450 x 450mm.- Colour/ pattern: TBC.

• Method of laying: Fully adhere all tiles with release adhesiverecommended by tile manufacturer.

15C CARPET TILE TO VINYL TRANSITION STRIP

• Manufacturer: Forbo Flooring Systems UK Ltd.- Web: www.forbo-flooring.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: WA Transition strip

• Size: 3000mm lengths maximum.

• Colour: grey.

15D CARPET TILE TO CARPET TIILE TRANSITION STRIP• Manufacturer: Forbo Flooring Systems UK Ltd.

- Web: www.forbo-flooring.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: WA Transition strip

• Size: 3000mm lengths maximum.• Colour: grey.


£P

20A HETEROGENEOUS PVC FLOOR COVERING• Manufacturer: Forbo Flooring Systems UK Ltd.

- Web: www.forbo-flooring.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Forbo Step Surestep Original

• Colour: Stone.Type: Self coved skirting as clause 80A

Cove former: 38mmradius tapered to architraves. Securely bond tobase and background using contact adhesive. Accurately mitre atcorners.Top edge trim: Captile C8 – supply only – to be fitted by otherswhere wall finish is PVC Cladding or ceramic tiles. HCS48 PVC capping strip to all other areas. Securely bond to background usingcontact adhesive, with top edge straight and parallel with floor.Turn flooring material up wall, securely bond to cove former andbackground using adhesive specified for fixing to base, and easetop of material into edge trim. Accurately mitre at corners. All jointsto be hot welded in accordance with the manufacturer'sinstructions.Height: 100mm

460 SMOOTHING/LEVELLING UNDERLAYMENT COMPOUND

Forbo Flooring in association with Eurocol manufacture a range of smoothing underlayment compounds.Forbo Eurocol 920 Europlan Alphy

Forbo Eurocol 920 Europlan AlphyA self-smoothing, tension-free hardening leveling compound for stony subfloors and especially for anhydrite subfloors anddesigned for leveling in layers between 0.5 and 30mm thickness.Smooth and impervious subfloors (ceramic, granolithic, terrazzo),asphalt and bituminous floors to be primed with 044 Europrimer Multi. Highly absorbent subfloors to be primed with 044 Europrimer Multi or 049 Europrimer ABS. See clause M50/10 and 20'Preparation' for details.Consult Forbo Flooring Ltd's technical literature for details.

Type: Water/powder mixManufacturer: Forbo Flooring, PO Box 1, Kirkcaldy, Fife KY1 2SBTel: 01592 643777 Fax: 01592 643999E-mail: [email protected] Web: www.forbo-flooring.co.ukProduct reference: Forbo Eurocol 920 Europlan AlphyApplication: Toothed smoothing trowel. Protect fresh layers againstdraughts and direct sunlight.

40 LAYING COVERINGS ON NEW WET LAID BASES

• Base drying aids: Not used for at least four days prior to moisturecontent test.

• Base moisture content test: Carry out in accordance with BS 5325,Annexe A or BS 8203, Annexe A.

• Commencement of laying coverings: Not until all readings show 75% relative humidity or less.


£P

45 EXISTING FLOOR COVERING REMOVED• Substrate: Clear of covering and as much adhesive as possible.

Skim with smoothing compound to give smooth, even surface.

60 SETTING OUT TILES• Method: Set out from centre of area/ room so that wherever

possible:- Tiles along opposite edges are of equal size.- Edge tiles are more than 50% of full tile width.

65 LAYING COVERINGS

• Base/ substrate condition: Rigid, dry, smooth, free from grease,dirt and other contaminants.

• Use a primer where recommended by adhesive manufacturer.Allow to dry thoroughly.

• Adhesive: As specified, as recommended by coveringmanufacturer or, as approved.

• Conditioning of materials prior to laying: As recommended bymanufacturer.

• Environment: Before, during and after laying, provide adequateventilation and maintain temperature and humidity approximatelyat levels which will prevail after building is occupied.

• Finished coverings: Accurately fitted, tightly jointed, securelybonded, smooth and free from air bubbles, rippling, adhesivemarks, stains, trowel ridges and high spots.

75 STAIR NOSINGS AND TRIMS• Manufacturer: Gradus .

- Product reference: XT Aluminium .

• Material/ finish: Aluminium .

• Fixing: Secure, level with mitred joints. Adjusted to suit thicknessof covering with continuous strips of hardboard or plywood.Packing strips and nosings bedded in gap-filling adhesive.- Screw fixing with matching plugs: required .

80A COVE FORMERS

• Manufacturer: Forbo Flooring Systems UK Ltd.- Web: www.forbo-flooring.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: PR Cove Former.

85 WASTE• Spare covering material: Retain suitable material for patching. On

completion submit pieces for selection. Hand over selected piecesto Employer.


£P

M60

Painting/ clear finishing

M60 Painting/ clear finishing

10A SEE FINISHES SCHEDULE FOR FULL PAINTINGSPECIFICATION .

12A GLOSS PAINT to windows and external doors

• Manufacturer: Glidden, brand of ICI Paints/AkzoNobel.- Web: www.duluxtrade.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Acrylic Gloss

• Colour: white.

14A MATT PAINT to all internal wall surfaces• Manufacturer: Dulux Trade, brand of AkzoNobel.

- Web: www.duluxtrade.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Diamond Quick Drying Matt

• Colour: as finishes schedule.

14B VINYL SILK PAINT to ceilings• Manufacturer: Crown Trade, product of Crown Paints Ltd.

- Web: www.crownpaintspec.oc.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Trade Vinyl Silk

• Colour: White.

14C SATIN PAINTto previously decorated and new interior joinery

• Manufacturer: Dulux Trade, brand of AkzoNobel.- Web: www.duluxtrade.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Satinwood

• Colour: white.

14D SATIN PAINT to fascias and soffits• Manufacturer: Dulux Trade, brand of AkzoNobel.

- Web: www.duluxtrade.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Weathershield Exterior Quick Drying Satin

• System code: 00017411.• Colour: White.

16A VARNISH to staircase handrails

• Manufacturer: Crown Trade, product of Crown Paints Ltd.- Web: www.crownpaintspec.oc.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Quick Drying Varnish

• Finish: Satin.


£P

18A SPECIAL COATING to external gas pipe• Manufacturer: Hammerite, brand of ICI Paints/AkzoNobel.

- Web: www.hammerite.co.uk.- Product reference: Metal Paint Hammered Finish

• Colour: Black.• Pack: Can.

30 PREPARATION GENERALLY• Standard: In accordance with BS 6150.• Risk assessment and method statement for hazardous materials:

Prepare for operations, disposal of waste, containment andreoccupation, and obtain approval before commencing work.

• Preparation materials: Types recommended by their manufacturers and the coating manufacturer for the situation andsurfaces being prepared.

• Substrates: Sufficiently dry in depth to suit coating.

• Efflorescence salts, dirt, grease and oil: Remove.

• Surface irregularities: Provide smooth finish.

• Organic growths and infected coatings:- Remove with assistance of biocidal solution.- Apply residual effect biocidal solution to inhibit regrowth.

• Joints, cracks, holes and other depressions: Fill with stoppers/fillers. Provide smooth finish.

• Dust, particles and residues from preparation: Remove anddispose of safely.

• Doors, opening windows and other moving parts:- Ease, if necessary, before coating.- Prime resulting bare areas.

32 PREVIOUSLY COATED SURFACES GENERALLY• Preparation: In accordance with BS 6150, clause 11.5.• Contaminated or hazardous surfaces: Give notice of:

- Coatings suspected of containing lead.- Substrates suspected of containing asbestos or other hazardous

materials.- Significant rot, corrosion or other degradation of substrates.

• Risk assessment and method statement for hazardous materials:Prepare for operations, disposal of waste, containment andreoccupation, and obtain approval before commencing work.

• Removing coatings: Do not damage substrate and adjacentsurfaces or adversely affect subsequent coatings.

• Loose, flaking or otherwise defective areas: Carefully remove to afirm edge.

• Alkali affected coatings: Completely remove.

• Retained coatings:- Thoroughly clean.- Gloss coated surfaces: Provide key.

• Partly removed coatings: Apply additional preparatory coats.

• Completely stripped surfaces: Prepare as for uncoated surfaces.


£P

37 WOOD PREPARATION• General: Provide smooth, even finish with lightly rounded arrises.• Degraded or weathered surface wood: Take back surface to

provide suitable substrate.• Degraded substrate wood: Repair with sound material of same

species.• Heads of fasteners: Countersink sufficient to hold stoppers/ fillers.• Resinous areas and knots: Apply two coats of knotting.• Defective primer: Take back to bare wood and reprime.

43 PLASTER PREPARATION

• Nibs, trowel marks and plaster splashes: Scrape off.

• Overtrowelled 'polished' areas: Provide suitable key.

45 PREVIOUSLY PAINTED WINDOW FRAMES

• Paint encroaching beyond glass sight line: Remove.

• Loose and defective putty: Remove.

• Putty cavities and junctions between previously painted surfacesand glass: Clean thoroughly.

• Finishing:- Patch prime, reputty, as necessary and allow to harden.- Seal and coat as soon as sufficiently hard.

55 EXISTING GUTTERS• Dirt and debris: Remove from inside of gutters.• Defective joints: Clean and seal with suitable jointing material.• Suspected hazardous materials: submit method statement.

61 COATING GENERALLY

• Application standard: In accordance with BS 6150, clause 9.

• Conditions: Maintain suitable temperature, humidity and air quality.

• Surfaces: Clean and dry at time of application.

• Thinning and intermixing: Not permitted unless recommended bymanufacturer.

• Priming coats: Apply as soon as possible on same day aspreparation is completed.

• Finish:- Even, smooth and of uniform colour.- Free from brush marks, sags, runs and other defects.- Cut in neatly.

• Doors, opening windows and other moving parts: Ease beforecoating and between coats.


£P

N

Furniture/Equipment

N11

Domestic kitchen fittings, furnishings and equipment

N11 Domestic kitchen fittings, furnishings and equipment

10A FITTED BASE UNITS AND WALL UNITS• Manufacturer: Howdens.

- Product reference: Burford.• Dimensions: To BS EN 1116.• Surface finishes: To BS 6222-3.• Doors and drawer fronts:

- Finish and colour: Laminate Oak.- Edges: solid.

• Side panels, plinths and shelves:- Finish and colour: Laminated Oak.- Edges: solid.

• Accessories: door handles, door hinges, drawer runners etc. all asper Burford packages..

20 WORKTOPS

• Manufacturer: Howdens.- Product reference: burford.

• Material: melamine (black).

• Dimensions: to suit kitchenette.

• Exposed edges: black melamine capping.

• Support: none.

30A SINKS, TAPS, TRAPS AND WASTES• As per Ideal Standard specification document

50A SILICONE SEALANT

• Manufacturer: Bostik Ltd.- Web: www.bostik.co.uk.- Product reference: Anti-germ Kitchen and Bathroom Sealant

• Colour: White.Sealent to be applied to the following areas;Toilet basinToilet SVP penetrations to wallWindow revealsWindow boardsWorktopsSink surroundsVinyl floor and skirting junctions Beading to top of tiles


£P

N13

Sanitary appliances and fittings

N13 Sanitary appliances and fittings

10A REFER TO SANITARY SCHEDULE

70 INSTALLATION GENERALLY

• Assembly and fixing: Fix appliances securely to structure, withouttaking support from pipelines, level and plumb and so that surfacesdesigned to fall drain as intended.

• Jointing and bedding compounds: Recommended bymanufacturers of appliances, accessories and pipes, to formwatertight joints between appliances and backgrounds (except cisterns) and between appliances and discharge pipes.

75 CISTERNS• Cistern operating components: Obtain from cistern manufacturer.

- Float operated valve: Matched to pressure of water supply.• Overflow pipe: Fixed to falls, and located to give visible warning of

discharge. Agree position.


£P

P

Building fabric sundries

P12

Fire stopping systems

P12 Fire stopping systems

GENERAL

10 FIRE STOPPING through floor voids• Resistance to fire: To BS 476-20 and -22, 30 minutes integrity and

insulation..• Reaction to fire: In accordance with Building Regulations, Class 0. .• Penetration seal: Pipe collars as clause 43..

- Size: 100mm.

• Capping sealant: Fire resisting silicone..- Colour: grey.

PRODUCTS

36A INTUMESCENT FOAM to pipe collars

• Manufacturer: Sealmaster.- Web: www.sealmaster.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Sealmaster Firefoam

• Sealing material: Intumescent, dry foam joint filler

43A FIRE PROTECTION SEALS• Manufacturer: Hepworth.

- Web: www.hepworth.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: HepSoil Fire Protection Seal

• Pipeline nominal size: 110 mm - S500/4 mm.

• Fire rating: 3 hours.

47A INTUMESCENT MASTIC for services penetrating walls and floors

• Manufacturer: Promat UK Ltd.- Web: www.promat.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: PROMASEAL® silicone mastic

• Sealing material: PROMASEAL® silicone mastic

EXECUTION

62 EXECUTION GENERALLY• Gaps: Seal gaps between building elements and services, to

provide fire resistance and resist the passage of smoke.• Adjacent surfaces: Prevent overrun of sealant or mortar on to

finished surfaces.


£P

64 APPLYING INTUMESCENT FOAM• New joints: Remove builder's debris, mortar droppings, grease,

and other contaminants.• Old joints: Clean and remove existing sealant from each joint.• Priming: Lightly moisten substrate with water.• Application: Fill joint to approximately half its depth, and allow

foam to expand to face of joint.• Trimming: no.

68 FIXING PIPE COLLARS

• Collar fixing: Plugged and screwed with 38 mm x No. 10 woodscrews.

• Gap around collar: fill with intumescent foam.

• Length of wraps: Project 50 mm from each side of the element.

73 APPLYING SEALANTS GENERALLY

• Application: As section Z22.

COMPLETION

91 CLEANING• Masking tapes: Remove.• Cleaning: Clean off splashes and droppings. Wipe down finishes.

92 INSPECTION

• Notice for inspection (minimum): 1 week.


£P

P20

Unframed isolated trims/ skirtings/ sundry items

P20 Unframed isolated trims/ skirtings/ sundry items

10 SOFTWOOD window boards• Quality of wood and fixing: To BS 1186-3.

- Species: European softwood.- Class: class 2.

• Moisture content at time of fixing: 12-19%.• Preservative treatment: Water-based microemulsion, as section

Z12 or WPA Commodity Specification C5; Desired service life 30years.

• Fire rating: To BS 476-7, Class 1.

• Profile: Rounded.- Finished size: match existing.

• Finish as delivered: Prepared and primed.

• Fixing: Plugged and screwed at 450 mm centres..

10A SOFTWOOD new skirting boards

• Quality of wood and fixing: To BS 1186-3.- Species: European softwood.- Class: class 2.

• Moisture content at time of fixing: 12-19%.• Preservative treatment: Water-based microemulsion, as section

Z12 or WPA Commodity Specification C5; Desired service life 30years.

• Fire rating: To BS 476-7, Class 1.• Profile: Bull nosed.

- Finished size: match existing.• Finish as delivered: Prepared and primed.• Fixing: Plugged and screwed at 450 mm centres..

30 PROPRIETARY benching to office spaces

• Manufacturer: contractors choice.- Product reference: as contractors choice.

• Size: Maximum 3m runs, with maximum depth of 700mm.- Thickness: 38mm.

• Finish/ Colour: American White Oak laminate on high-densitychipboard.

• Accessories: stainless steel leg supports every 1200mm centres(maximum).

• Fixing: galvanised screws to timber wall battern anchoring pointsand leg supports.- Jointing: mitre joints to corners, with mechanically fixed

benching ends to runs longer than 3m. Fix with stainless steelbrackets screw fixed to underside of bench.- Holes to be core drilled, minimum 50mm from rear of fixedbench, with suitable black ABS plastic cable tidies (60mm Hafeletwo part swivel flap desk cable tidy grommet .


£P

35 MEDIUM DENSITY FIBREBOARD For shelving units tofundraising cupboard and office spaces as indicated on drawing201

• Manufacturer: contractors choice.- Product reference: Contractors choice.

• Standard: To BS EN 622-5.- Type: MDF – general purpose, dry conditions. .- Formaldehyde class: To BS EN 622-1, Class E1.

• Fire rating: To BS 476-7, Class 1..• Thickness: 12mm minimum.• Edges: Chamfered and rounded..• Finish: Prepared and primed, M60/14C..• Recycled content: 60% (minimum) to BS EN ISO 14021..• Support/ Fixing: stainless steel wall mounted adjustable rails, with

bracket support arms screw fixed to MDF board, minimum 2 per board..

60 LEG SUPPORTS for benching

• Material: stainless steel.- Finish/ Colour: as manufactured.

• Size: to suit benching desk heights, maximum 32mm diameter.

• Fixing: Galvanised screws.

80 INSTALLATION GENERALLY• Joinery workmanship: As section Z10.• Metal workmanship: As section Z11.• Methods of fixing and fasteners: As section Z20.• Straight runs: To be in one piece, or in long lengths with as few

joints as possible. • Running joints: Location and method of forming to be agreed

where not detailed. • Joints at angles: Mitred unless shown otherwise. .• Position and level: To be agreed where not detailed.


£P

P21

Door/ window ironmongery

P21 Door/ window ironmongery

2 QUANTITIES AND LOCATIONS• Quantities and locations of ironmongery are on the door schedule

and within the Schedule of Works .• Fixing: As sections L10 and L20.


£P

7 DOOR TYPESContractor is to read the following in conjunction with the below specification, schedule of works and the door schedule.All ironmongery noted below is to be sourced from Dorplan.

Type 111524 Thumb turn lock11260/21 Lever handle, both sides11596 Kick plates, both sides11603 Floor mounted doorstop3x 20319/B Hinges40101 Doorcloser 30103 LatchFinished in stainless steel

Signs; DDA toilet - 11632Unisex Toilet - 11633Female Toilet - 11631Male Toilet - 11630

Type 211260/21 Lever handle, both sides11596 Kick plates, both sides10204 Thumb turn lock11603 Door stop3x 20319/B Hinges40101 Doorcloser 30103 LatchFinished in stainless steel

Signs; General Fire Logo 11640

Type 311260/21 Lever handle, both sides11596 Kick plates, both sides11603 Door stop3x 20319/B Hinges40101 Doorcloser 30103 LatchElectronic strike 70217 or similar approved.Finished in stainless steel


Type 411260/21 Lever handle, both sides11596 Kick plates, both sides11603 Door stop3x 20319/B Hinges40101 Doorcloser 30103 LatchFinished in stainless steel



£P

Type 511260/21 Lever handle, both sides11596 Kick plates, both sides11603 Door stop3x 20319/B Hinges40101 Doorcloser 30103 Latch70103 Mechanical combination lockFinished in stainless steel


Type 611260/21 Lever handle - pair 11596 Kick plates, both sides11603 Door stop3x 20319/B Hinges2x 50101/2 Straight shoot bolts to slave door 30103 Latch32010 Europrofile lock12872 EscutcheonsFinished in stainless steel

Signs; General Fire Logo 11640 x 2

Type 7 (minor door 526mm)11260/21 Lever handle11603 Door stop2x 20319/B Hinges30103 LatchFinished in stainless steel


8 DOOR HINGES to all new doors• Manufacturer: Dorplan .

- Product reference: 3 x 20319/B .• Type: Washered butt hinge .• Size: 102 x 76 mm. .• Material/ finish: Satin stainless steel. .• Other requirements: none .

10A POWER DRIVEN SLIDING DOOR GEAR to new lobby doors• Manufacturer: DORMA UK Ltd.

- Web: www.dorma-uk.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: ES 200

• Accessories: none.


£P

12 OVERHEAD DOOR CLOSERS to all new internal doors• Standard: To BS EN 1154.

- Devices to fire/ smoke control doors: CE marked.• Manufacturer: Dorplan .

- Product reference: 40101 .• Power size: Adjustable 2–6. .• Other functions: none .• Casing finish: colour as door furniture .• Operational adjustment:

- Variable power: Matched to size, weight and location of doors. Fully closing latched doors and holding unlatched doors closed.

- Closing against smoke seals of fire doors: Positive. No gaps.

22A CYLINDER RIM NIGHT LATCHES AND LOCKS to external doors

• Manufacturer: Häfele UK Ltd.- Web: www.hafele.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Cylinder Mortice Lock

• Type: 911.03.297.

• Accessories: 911.03.728.

28A DOOR LATCHES to all doors as noted in schedule• Standard: To BS EN 12209.• Manufacturer: Dorplan .

- Product reference: 30103 .• Material/ finish: as finished .• Latch spring strength: Select to prevent unsprung lever handles

drooping.

32 PANIC EXIT DEVICES to all external exit doors

• Standard: To BS EN 1125.- Devices for locked doors on escape routes: CE marked.

• Manufacturer: Dorplan .- Product reference: 60220 .

• Type: Push pad. .

• Material/ finish: stainless steel .

• Additional requirements: none .

36A PRIVACY INDICATOR BOLTS to all toilet doors• Manufacturer: Dorplan .

- Product reference: 10204 .• Material/ finish: stainless steel .• Emergency release facility: Required.

38 LEVER HANDLES to all doors• Standard: To BS EN 1906.• Manufacturer: Dorplan .

- Product reference: 11260/21 .

• Style: 'D' handle return .

• Size: 21mm .

• Material/ finish: stainless steel .

• Mounting: Screw fixed plates with fixed spindle. .


£P

46 KICK PLATES to all new doors• Manufacturer: Dorplan .

- Product reference: 11596 .• Size: to suit door, to both sides .• Material/ finish: stainless steel .• Mounting: screw fixed .

50 DOOR STOPS to all new doors• Manufacturer: Dorplan .

- Product reference: 11603 .

• Type: Floor mounted rubber buffer on stainless steel shoe for concrete fixing .

60A THRESHOLD WEATHERSTRIP to all external uPVC doors

• Manufacturer: Sealmaster.- Web: www.sealmaster.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Cyclone threshold seal ref TDS - 45mm x

13mm.• Material: Neoprene.• Size: 45mm x 13mm.• Finish: Satin silver.

72 WINDOW HINGES to top hung windows• Manufacturer: Deceuninck Ltd .

- Product reference: 2500 chamfered .• Type: stormproof .• Size: 63mm .• Material/ finish: stainless steel .

72A WINDOW HINGES to top hung windows

• Manufacturer: Deceuninck Ltd .- Product reference: 2500 chamfered .

• Type: stormproof .

• Size: 63mm .

• Material/ finish: stainless steel .All windows to have maximum 100mm restricted opening.

84A WINDOW HANDLES to all new windows as noted within sectionL10

• Manufacturer: as per window manufacturer .- Product reference: as per window manufacturer .

• Type: key locking .• Material/ finish: uPVC white finished .• Features: none .

92A DRAUGHT PROOFING to all new and existing doors andwindows.

• Manufacturer: Häfele UK Ltd.- Web: www.hafele.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Draught Proofing Components

• Type: 950.17.297.


£P

Q

Paving/Planting/Fencing/Site furniture

Q10

Kerbs/ edgings/ channels/ paving accessories

Q10 Kerbs/ edgings/ channels/ paving accessories

65A ROAD MARKING• Manufacturer: contractors choice.

- Product reference: Hot applied thermoplastic line marking.• Colour: white and yellow.• Surface to receive markings: Clean and dry, loose material

removed.• Application: Uniform, with no streaks or ragged edges.

Width of lines; industry standard of 100mmSymbols; Disabled marking, in yellow.

Keep Clear, in whiteAll as shown on drawing 102

80 REGULARITY OF PAVED SURFACES

• Maximum undulation of (non-tactile) paving surface: 3 mm.- Method of measurement: Under a 1 m straight edge placed

anywhere on the surface (where appropriate in relation to thegeometry of the surface).

• Difference in level between adjacent units (maximum):- Joints flush with the surface: Twice the joint width (with 5 mm

max difference in level).- Recessed, filled joints: 2 mm.

Recess depth (maximum): 5 mm.- Unfilled joints: 2 mm.

• Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.


£P

Q20

Granular sub-bases to roads/ pavings

Q20 Granular sub-bases to roads/ pavings

10 THICKNESSES OF SUB-BASES• Thicknesses: As specified in the relevant paving section.

30 EXCAVATION AND COMPACTION OF SUBGRADES

• Final excavation to formation level: Carry out immediately beforecompaction of subgrade.

• Soft spots and voids: Give notice.

• Old drainage and service trenches: Excavate to remove soft or degraded material, then backfill with specified granular sub-basematerial and compact..

• Wet conditions: Do not excavate or compact when the subgrademay be damaged or destabilized.

• Compaction: Thoroughly, by roller or other suitable means,adequate to resist subsidence or deformation of the subgradeduring construction and of the completed roads/ pavings when inuse. Take particular care to compact fully at intrusions, perimetersand where local excavation and backfilling has taken place.

40 SUB-BASES• Granular material: Of a known suitability for use in sub-bases, free

from ice, harmful matter and excessive dust or clay, well graded,all pieces less than 75 mm in any direction, and selected from oneof the following:- Crushed rock (other than argillaceous rock) or quarry waste.- Crushed concrete, crushed brick or tile, free from plaster, timber

and metal.- Gravel or hoggin with not more clay content than is required to

bind the material together, and with no large lumps of clay.- Natural sand or gravel.

45 LAYING AND COMPACTING SUB-BASES

• Subgrade: Not frozen and free from loose soil, rubbish andstanding water.

• Structures, membranes and buried services: Ensure stability andavoid damage.

• General: Spread and level in layers.• Compaction:

- Timing: As soon as possible after laying.- Method: By roller or other suitable means, adequate to resist

subsidence or deformation of the sub-base during constructionand of the completed paving when in use. Take particular careto compact fully at intrusions, perimeters and where localexcavation and backfilling has taken place.

50 ACCURACY

• Permissible deviation from required levels, falls and cambers(maximum):- Subgrade: ± 20 mm.- Sub-base: ± 12 mm.


£P

60 SURFACES TO RECEIVE SAND BEDDING FOR PAVING• Blind surface: As necessary before compaction to ensure that

surface is tight and dense enough to prevent laying course sandbeing lost into it during construction or use.

• Material: Sand or PFA.

70 PROTECTION• Sub-bases: As soon as practicable, cover with subsequent layers,

specified elsewhere.• Subgrades and sub-bases: Prevent degradation by construction

traffic, construction operations and inclement weather.


£P

Q22

Asphalt roads/ pavings

Q22 Asphalt roads/ pavings

10A ASPHALT CONCRETE TO CAR PARK To repair works• Standard: BS EN 13108-1.• Surface course: Coated chippings..

- Compacted thickness: to suit damaged section.• Reclaimed content:

- Standard: To BS EN 13108-8.- Value (maximum): Surface course 10%, other courses 50%.

30 LAYING GENERALLY

• Preparation: Remove all loose material, rubbish and standingwater.

• Adjacent work: Form neat junctions. Do not damage.

• Channels, kerbs, inspection covers etc: Keep clean.

• Permissible deviation from the required levels, falls and cambers(maximum): In accordance with BS 594987, Table 7.

• New paving:- Keep traffic free until it has cooled to prevailing atmospheric

temperature.- Do not allow rollers to stand at any time.- Prevent damage.- Lines and levels: With regular falls to prevent ponding.- Overall texture: Smooth, even and free from dragging, tearing or

segregation.- Condition on completion: Clean.


£P

Q25

Slab/ brick/ sett/ cobble pavings

Q25 Slab/ brick/ sett/ cobble pavings

11 LAYING PAVINGS• Cutting: Cleanly and accurately, without spalling, to give neat

junctions with edgings and adjoining finishes. • Lines and levels of finished surface: Smooth and even with falls to

prevent ponding.• Bedding of units: Firm so that rocking or subsidence does not

occur or develop.

• Appearance: Even and regular with even joint widths and free of mortar and sand stains.

16 LEVELS OF PAVING

• Permissible deviation from specified levels (generally):± 6 mm.

• Regularity of paved surfaces- Maximum undulations in the surface of pavings (except tactile

paving surfaces) under a 1 m straight edge placed anywhere onthe surface (where appropriate in relation to the geometry of thesurface): 3 mm.

- Joints between paving units or utility access covers:Joints flush with the surface: difference in level betweenadjacent units to be no more than twice the joint width (with a 5mm max difference in level).Recessed, filled joints: difference in level between adjacent unitsto be no greater than 2 mm; the recess to be no deeper than 5mm.Unfilled joints: difference in level between adjacent units to beno greater than 2 mm.

• Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.

21 PROTECTION FROM TRAFFIC

• Mortar bedded pavings: Keep free from pedestrian traffic for 4days and vehicular traffic for 10 days after laying.

• Access: Restrict access to paved areas to prevent damage fromsite traffic and plant.

31A CONCRETE FLAG PAVING• Manufacturer: Marshalls plc.

- Web: www.marshalls.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Standard Paving

• Size/ Edge: 450 x 450 x 50 mm, Square edge.• Colour: Buff.• Fibre reinforcement: Not required.


£P

R

Disposal systems

R10

Rainwater drainage systems

R10 Rainwater drainage systems

16A PVC-U GUTTERS to new roof construction• Manufacturer: Eurocell Profiles Ltd.

- Web: www.eurocell.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: Half round gutter

• System colour: Black.• Gutter: Length 4000 mm, ref RWG4.

• Fittings:- Unions: Gutter union, ref RWU1.- Angles: Not required.- Outlets: RWO1 Running outlet- Stop ends: External, ref RWE1.- Brackets: RWFB1 Fascia bracket

• Accessories: Contractor's choice.

16B EXISTING PVC-U GUTTERS AND DOWNPIPES• Clear all existing downpipes and gutters, ensure free flowing.

All retained gutters and downpipe clips and connections to bechecked and where damaged or ill fitting to be maked good.

26A RAINWATER OUTLETS New hopper headto flat roof construction• Manufacturer: Aquaflow.

- Web: www.aquaflow.co.uk.- Product reference: 112mm Hopper head, finished in black.

Screw fixed to block wall, with bitument felt flashing .

26B RAINWATER OUTLETS New hopper headto flat roof construction

• Manufacturer: Polypipe.- Web: www.polypipe.co.uk.- Product reference: UG493 Universal Adapter, finished in black .

35A PVC-U PIPEWORK• Manufacturer: Eurocell Profiles Ltd.

- Web: www.eurocell.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: 68 mm round downpipe

• System colour: Black.• Pipe: Length 2500 mm, ref RWP25.• Fittings:

- Sockets: Ref RWS1.- Bends and offsets: Not required.- Branches: Not required.- Shoes: Ref RWB3.- Brackets: Clip, single fix, ref RWC3.- Adaptors and accessorie: Not required.


£P

50 INSTALLATION GENERALLY• Discharge of rainwater: Complete, and without leakage or noise

nuisance.• Components: Obtain from same manufacturer for each type of

pipework and guttering.• Allowance for thermal and building movement: Provide and

maintain clearance as fixing and jointing proceeds.• Fixings and fasteners: As section Z20.

60 GUTTERS LAID TO FALL

• Setting out: To true line and even gradient to prevent ponding or backfall. Position high points of gutters as close as practical to theroof and low points not more than 50 mm below the roof.

• Joints: Watertight.

• Roofing underlay: Dressed into gutter.

65 GUTTERS LAID LEVEL

• Setting out: Level and as close as practical to roof.

• Joints: Watertight.• Roofing underlay: Dressed into gutter.

70 PIPEWORK• Fixing: Securely, plumb and/ or true to line with additional supports

as necessary to support pipe collars, particularly at changes indirection.

• Cut ends of pipes and gutters: Clean and square with burrs andswarf removed.

80 INTERNAL PIPEWORK TEST - ENGLAND, WALES, IRELANDAND NORTHERN IRELAND

• Preparation: Temporarily seal open ends of pipework with plugs.

• Testing: Connect a 'U' tube water gauge and pump air intopipework until gauge registers 38 mm.

• Required performance:- Allow a period for temperature stabilization, after which the

pressure of 38 mm is to be maintained without loss for not lessthan 3 minutes.


£P

R11

Above ground foul drainage systems

R11 Above ground foul drainage systems

21A 110 MM SOLVENT SOIL SYSTEM to new Accessible toilet• Manufacturer: FloPlast Ltd.

- Web: www.floplast.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: 110 mm Solvent Soil System

• Type: SS1 plain end pipe, length 3 m.• System colour: Grey.

• Fittings:- Offsets: Not required.- Soil pipe bends: Not required.- Branches: Not required.

• Access fittings: Not required.- Pipe couplings: SS107 expansion coupling .

• Brackets: SS82 pipe clip.- Fixings: Plastics plugs.

• Accessories: none.

45A AIR ADMITTANCE VALVES• Manufacturer: FloPlast Ltd.

- Web: www.floplast.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: AF110.

• Colour: Grey.

50 INSTALLATION GENERALLY• Standards: To BS EN 12056-1, BS EN 12056-2 (including National

Annexes NA-NG) and BS EN 12056-5.

• Drainage from appliances: Quick, quiet and complete, withoutblockage, crossflow, backfall, leakage, odours, noise nuisance or risk to health.

• Components: From same manufacturer for each type of pipework.

• Access: Provide access fittings in convenient locations to permitcleaning and testing of pipework.

• Thermal and building movement: Provide and maintain clearanceas fixing and jointing proceeds.

• Fixings: Allow the pipe to slide.- Finish: Plated, sherardized, galvanized or other nonferrous.- Compatibility: Suitable for the purpose, material being fixed and

substrate.

60 PIPEWORK• Fixing: Securely plumb and/ or true to line. Fix lengths of discharge

stack pipes at or just below socket collar or coupling.- Additional supports: Provide as necessary at junctions and

changes in direction.• Cut ends of pipes: Clean and square with burrs and swarf

removed.


£P

70 PIPEWORK TEST• Preparation: Temporarily seal open ends of pipework using plugs.• Testing: Connect a 'U' tube water gauge and pump air into

pipework until gauge registers 38 mm.• Required performance: Allow a period for temperature

stabilisation, after which the pressure of 38 mm is to be maintainedwithout loss for at least 3 minutes.


£P

R12

Below ground drainage systems

R12 Below ground drainage systems

2 EXISTING DRAINS• Setting out: Before starting work, check levels and positions of

existing drains, inspection chambers and manholes againstdrawings. Report discrepancies.

14A PIPES, BENDS AND JUNCTIONS New underground pipe fromnew downpipe to existing stormwater connection

• Manufacturer: Hepworth.- Web: www.hepworth.co.uk.- Email: [email protected] Product reference: PlastiDrain

• Size: 82 mm.

19 EXCAVATING PIPE TRENCHES• Trench from bottom up to 300 mm above crown of pipe: With

vertical sides.- Width: As small as practicable but not less than external

diameter of pipe plus 300 mm.• Type of subsoil: Where the type of subsoil at the level of the crown

of the pipe differs from that stated for the type of pipeline, givenotice.

• Timing: Excavate to formation immediately before laying beds or pipes.

• Mud, rock projections, boulders and hard spots: Remove. Replacewith bedding material, well consolidated.

• Local soft spots: Harden by tamping in bedding material.

21 BEDDING AND JOINTING

• Laying pipes: To true line and regular gradient on even bed for fulllength of barrel with sockets (if any) facing up the gradient.

• Jointing: Lubricate. Leave gaps at ends of spigots to allow for movement.

23 CLASS D NATURAL BED• Trench bottom: Hand trim to accurate levels, levelling up any

overdig with compacted spoil.• Pipes: Cut holes for couplings/ sockets and lay pipes resting

uniformly on their barrels, adjusting to line and gradient. Do notuse hard packings under pipes.

• Backfilling: After initial testing, backfill to 150 mm above crown of pipe with a protective cushion of selected fill, free from vegetablematter, rubbish and frozen soil and material retained on a 40 mmsieve. Thoroughly hand compact in 100 mm layers.


£P

39 CLASS Z CONCRETE SURROUND• Concrete blinding: 25 mm thick, over full width of trench.• Temporary pipe support: Folding wedges of compressible board,

pipe inverts 100 mm (minimum) above blinding.• Vertical construction joints: At face of flexible pipe joints using 18

mm thick compressible board precut to profile of pipe. Fill gapsbetween spigot and socket with resilient material to prevent entryof concrete.

• Concrete surround: After testing, place and compact concrete for full width of trench to encase pipe to 150 mm above crown.

41 TRENCHES LESS THAN 1 M FROM FOUNDATIONS

• Class Z concrete surround: Provide in locations where bottom of trench is lower than bottom of foundation.- Top of concrete: Higher than bottom of foundation.

58 INSTALLATION OF FITTINGS

• Appearance: Square with and tightly jointed to adjacentconstruction as appropriate.

• Bedding and surround of fittings, traps, etc: Concrete, 150 mmthick.

• Permissible deviation in level of gullies: +0 to -10mm.

84 TESTING AND INSPECTION GENERALLY• Obstructions and debris: Remove. Check that the installation is

clear before testing.

91 BACKFILLING TO PIPELINES GENERALLY

• Backfill from top of surround or protective cushion: Materialexcavated from trench, compacted in 300 mm layers. Do not useheavy compactors before there is 600 mm of material over pipes.

94 BACKFILLING UNDER ROADS AND PAVINGS• Backfill from top of specified surround or protective cushion up to

formation level: Well graded gravel or hardcore passing a 75 mmsieve, well compacted in 150 mm layers.

97 CLEANING• General: Flush out the whole installation and remove silt and

debris immediately before handing over.


£P

Z

Building fabric reference specification

Z10

Purpose made joinery

Z10 Purpose made joinery

10 FABRICATION• Standard: To BS 1186-2.• Sections: Accurate in profile and length, and free from twist and

bowing. Formed out of solid unless shown otherwise.- Machined surfaces: Smooth and free from tearing, wooliness,

chip bruising and other machining defects.• Joints: Tight and close fitting.

• Assembled components: Rigid. Free from distortion.

• Screws: Provide pilot holes. Heads of countersunk screws sunk atleast 2 mm below surfaces visible in completed work.

• Adhesives: Compatible with wood preservatives applied and enduses of timber.

20 CROSS SECTION DIMENSIONS OF TIMBER

• General: Dimensions on drawings are finished sizes.

• Maximum permitted deviations from finished sizes:- Softwood sections: To BS EN 1313-1.- Hardwood sections: To BS EN 1313-2.

30 PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD• Cutting and machining: Completed as far as possible before

treatment.• Extensively processed timber: Retreat timber sawn lengthways,

thicknessed, planed, ploughed, etc.• Surfaces exposed by minor cutting and/ or drilling: Treat as

recommended by main treatment solution manufacturer.

40 MOISTURE CONTENT

• Wood and wood based products: Maintained within rangespecified for the component during manufacture and storage.

50 FINISHING• Surfaces: Smooth, even and suitable to receive finishes.

- Arrises: Eased unless shown otherwise on drawings.• End grain in external components: Sealed with primer or sealer as

section M60 and allowed to dry before assembly.


£P

Z12

Preservative/ fire retardant treatment

Z12 Preservative/ fire retardant treatment

10 TREATMENT APPLICATION• Timing: After cutting and machining timber, and before assembling

components.• Processor: Licensed by manufacturer of specified treatment

solution.• Certification: For each batch of timber provide a certificate of

assurance that treatment has been carried out as specified.

20 COMMODITY SPECIFICATIONS

• Standard: Current edition of the Wood Protection Association(WPA) publication 'Industrial wood preservation specification andpractice'.

25 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT SOLUTION STRENGTHS/TREATMENT CYCLES

• General: Select to achieve specified service life and to suittreatability of specified wood species.

40 ORGANIC SOLVENT PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT

• Solution:- Manufacturer: contractors choice.

Product reference: contractors choice.- Application: Double vacuum + low pressure impregnation, or

immersion.

• Moisture content of wood:- At time of treatment: As specified for the timber/ component at

time of fixing.- After treatment: Timber to be surface dry before use.

70 MAKING GOOD TO PROTECTION TREATMENT ON-SITE• Fire retardant/ preservative solution: Compatible with off-site

treatment.• Application: In accordance with preservative manufacturer's

recommendations.


£P

Z20

Fixings and adhesives

Z20 Fixings and adhesives

10 FIXINGS AND FASTENERS GENERALLY• Integrity of supported components: Select types, sizes, quantities

and spacings of fixings, fasteners and packings to retain supportedcomponents without distortion or loss of support.

• Components, substrates, fixings and fasteners of dissimilar metals:Isolate with washers or sleeves to avoid bimetallic corrosion.

• General usage: To recommendations of fastener manufacturersand/ or manufacturers of components, products or materials fixedand fixed to.

• Fixings: To be in straight lines, at regular centres.

25 FASTENER DURABILITY

• Materials: To have:- Bimetallic corrosion resistance appropriate to items being fixed.- Atmospheric corrosion resistance appropriate to fixing location.

• Appearance: Submit samples on request.

30 FIXINGS THROUGH FINISHES• Penetration of fasteners and plugs into substrate: To achieve a

secure fixing.

35 PACKINGS

• Materials: Noncompressible, corrosion proof.

• Area of packings: Sufficient to transfer loads.

40 CRAMP FIXINGS

• Fasteners: Fix cramps to frames with screws of same material ascramps.

• Fixings in masonry work: Fully bed in mortar.

55 PLUGGED COUNTERSUNK SCREW FIXING• Finished level of countersunk screw heads: Minimum 6 mm below

timber surface.• Plugs: Glue in to full depth of hole.• Finished level of plugs: Projecting above surface.

60 APPLYING ADHESIVES

• Surfaces: Clean. Regularity and texture to suit bonding and gapfilling characteristics of adhesive.

• Support and clamping during setting: Provide as necessary. Do notmark surfaces of or distort components being fixed.

• Finished adhesive joints: Fully bonded. Free of surplus adhesive.


£P

Z21

Mortars

Z21 Mortars

10 MORTAR MIXES• Specification: Proportions and additional requirements for mortar

materials are specified elsewhere.

20 SAND FOR SITE MADE CEMENT GAUGED MASONRYMORTARS

• Standard: To BS EN 13139.

• Grading: 0/2 (FP or MP).- Fines content where the proportion of sand is specified as a

range (e.g. 1:1: 5-6):Lower proportion of sand: Use category 3 fines.Higher proportion of sand: Use category 2 fines.

• Sand for facework mortar: Maintain consistent colour and texture.Obtain from one source.

25 SAND FOR LIME:SAND MASONRY MORTARS• Type: Sharp, well graded.

- Quality, sampling and testing: To BS EN 13139.- Grading/ Source: As specified elsewhere.

30 READY-MIXED LIME:SAND FOR CEMENT GAUGED MASONRYMORTARS

• Standard: To BS EN 998-2.

• Lime: Nonhydraulic to BS EN 459-1.- Type: CL 90S.

• Pigments for coloured mortars: To BS EN 12878.

40 CEMENTS FOR MORTARS• Cement: To BS EN 197-1 and CE marked.

- Types: Portland cement, CEM I.Portland limestone cement, CEM ll/A-LL.

Portland slag cement, CEM II/B-S.Portland fly ash cement, CEM II/B-V.

- Strength class: 32.5, 42.5 or 52.5.• White cement: To BS EN 197-1 and CE marked.

- Type: Portland cement, CEM I.- Strength class: 52.5.

• Sulfate resisting Portland cement:- Types: To BS 4027 and kitemarked.

To BS EN 197-1 flay ash cement, CEM ll/B-V andCE marked.

- Strength class: 32.5, 42.5 or 52.5.• Masonry cement: To BS EN 413-1 and CE marked.

- Class: MC 12.5.


£P

50 ADMIXTURES FOR SITE MADE MORTARS• Air entraining (plasticizing) admixtures: To BS EN 934-3 and

compatible with other mortar constituents.• Other admixtures: Submit proposals.• Prohibited admixtures: Calcium chloride, ethylene glycol and any

admixture containing calcium chloride.

60 MAKING MORTARS GENERALLY• Batching: By volume. Use clean and accurate gauge boxes or

buckets.

• Mix proportions: Based on dry sand. Allow for bulking of dampsand.

• Mixing: Mix materials thoroughly to uniform consistency, free fromlumps.- Mortars containing air entraining admixtures: Mix mechanically.

Do not overmix.

• Contamination: Prevent intermixing with other materials.


£P

Z22

Sealants

Z22 Sealants

EXECUTION

61 SUITABILITY OF JOINTS• Presealing checks:

- Joint dimensions: Within limits specified for the sealant.- Substrate quality: Surfaces regular, undamaged and stable.

• Joints not fit to receive sealant: Submit proposals for rectification..

62 PREPARING JOINTS

• Surfaces to which sealant must adhere:- Remove temporary coatings, tapes, loosely adhering material,

dust, oil, grease, surface water and contaminants that may affectbond.

- Clean using materials and methods recommended by sealantmanufacturer.

• Vulnerable surfaces adjacent to joints: Mask to prevent staining or smearing with primer or sealant.

• Backing strip and/ or bond breaker installation: Insert into joint tocorrect depth, without stretching or twisting, leaving no gaps.

• Protection: Keep joints clean and protect from damage untilsealant is applied.

63 APPLYING SEALANTS• Substrate: Dry (unless recommended otherwise) and unaffected

by frost, ice or snow.• Environmental conditions: Do not dry or raise temperature of joints

by heating.

• Sealant application: Fill joints completely and neatly, ensuring firmadhesion to substrates.

• Sealant profiles:- Butt and lap joints: Slightly concave.- Fillet joints: Flat or slightly convex.

• Protection: Protect finished joints from contamination or damageuntil sealant has cured.


£P


SECTION 3.0: SCHEDULE OF WORKS

Ingleton Wood LLP - Schedule of WorksColchester MIND

Project 42353 New Wellbeing Centre - Mersea Road, Schedule of Works

Drawing No: As issue sheetCompiled by: KCDate: 18th December 2013Job No: 42353

Total Building sq./m is 315

Contractor shall read this document inconjunction with following appended documentation:NBS Materials and Workmanship SpecificationFinishes ScheduleSanitaryware ScheduleACD Drainage Survey ReportIronmongery Schedule

3.00 Description Quantity Rate Cost

3.01 Read in conjunction with Preliminaries Section of Specification. Note also Provisional Sum allowance in Section A54 of Preliminaries. All costs to be carried forward to Tender summary page.

3.02 Generally

3.02.01 The contractor is to price this schedule in accordance with information contained in the preliminaries, material and workmanship and drawing register.

3.02.02 The works comprise of the internal alteration and refurbishment to the existing doctors surgery into wellbeing centre building and include replacement of sanitaryware, ceiling works and floor coverings, M&E, wall coverings, doors, decorations and drainage.

3.02.03 The contractor should note that the client may omit items of work from the tender depending on budget constraints.

3.03 Demolitions and strip-out

3.03.01 Contractor to carry out and provide evidence of full Refurbishment and Demolition Asbestos survey prior to works commencing. Contractor to provide information to CA prior to works commencing

3.03.02 The contractor is to isolate all services supplies as detailed within the Mechanical and Electrical sections of this specification and as required prior to commencement of works.

3.03.03 Demolition works as per individual sections within the schedule of works noted below and as noted on drawing 200.

SUB TOTAL

Colchester MIND 1 of 27


3.00 Description Quantity Rate CostGround Floor (total floor sq./m 196)

3.04 New Entrance Foyer

3.04.01 Carefully remove and demolish existing timber and glazed porch to slab level, dispose all material off site

3.04.02 Contractor to allow for uplifting existing quarry tile flooring and breaking out existing porch solid floor slab. Remove all waste from site.

3.04.03Carefully remove and demolish small low level nib brick wall down to foundations, contractor to break out foundations, dispose all material off site. Make good brickwork to main building.

3.04.04 Contractor to excavate to level of 1500mm deep x 450mm wide for foundations and 500mmm deep for new floor construction. Dispose of materials off site

3.04.05 Make good all disturbed surfaces exposed by strip out and demolition.

3.04.06 New foundations to conform with following details; 450mm wide x 1500mm deep C35 concrete depth to be approved by building control and to match existing foundation depths. Any divergence is to be confirmed with the CA.

3.04.07 New slab to be constructed; 40mm Ardex A38 screed on 100mm Celotex insulation with 25mm upturned to perimeter on 1200 gauge DPM on 150mm thick RC concrete, with 25mm C15 concrete binding, on compacted type 1. RC slab to have A251 mesh to top of slab with 25mm cover. Tie to existing slab, drill 300mm long dowel bars into existing slab at 600mm centres. RC slab is to bear onto existing footings by minimum 300mm. As shown on section drawing 300

3.04.08 Ensure Sika Sikabond Sikaflex AT Connection Sealant Grey 600cc, at joint to existing and new flooring. beneath sealant allow for 12mm APS rubber expansion joint filler, to full depth of new slab, to full length of extension.

3.04.09 New external wall to be constructed from 100mm Dense concrete Block, with 100mm Rockwool full fill insulation with 100mm aerated concrete blocks, with gypsum skim plaster finish 13mm thick. Allow tying new brickwork walls into existing using Catnic Stronghold/solo wall starter kits, installed strictly in accordance with manufacturers details. Walls to have Hemex stainless steel wall ties every 450 x 900mm, with 100mm wide single ply DPC with minimum 300mm laps. As per section drawing 300. Form door opening for new sliding door system, blockwork return to cavity.

SUB TOTAL



3.00 Description Quantity Rate Cost3.04.10 External blockwork face to be rendered with StoRend Flex Cote,

prepare sub-base with Polymer-modified levelling coatStoLevell Cote, StoArmat Classic with Sto-Glass Fibre Mesh, finish with StoSilco, colour to be confirmed. Stop beads and drip edge details as per Sto recommended details.

3.04.11 To external wall (to be internal after new lobby formation) one coat of British Gypsum Bonding Coat plaster with two coats of Multi-finish.

3.04.12 Supply and fit automated aluminium sliding door system from Comar, Aluminium 7 sliding doors, to entrance and inner lobby, with glazing infill panels. Framing to be RAL 7042 (dark grey), or similar approved. Following from Dorma ES 200; Slimline Contur 100mm operator height, 5 function program for Automatic, Partial Open, Exit Only, Permanent, Open, Night/Bank operation, Electromechnical locking option for integrated concealed locking solutions. Glazing to be 6:18:6mm laminated insulated units with fenestration, to comply with current Building Regulations, fenestration to be Colchester MIND company logo. Final design to be agreed.

3.04.13 Supply and install new stainless steel framing system for heavy duty matwell, mat to include for company logo (design to be agreed). As per finishes schedule.

3.04.14 Supply and fit new softwood skirtings, bullnosed, 19x100mm, knotted, primed and finished with 2 undercoats and 1 finishing coat. Dulux as per finishes schedule.

3.04.15All walls to receive 1 mist coat of Dulux white trade paint, 2 coats of Dulux diamond matt, as per finishes schedule and NBS M60

3.04.16Roof to be constructed from C24 220x75mm Joists set at 400mm centres, joists to be set on stainless steel hangers bedded into new and existing walls, with noggins at 1200mm centres, with 3 layers bitumen felt on 18mm WBP plywood deck, with 135mm thick Thermaroof TR27 insulation, tilting fillets to ensure 2-5 degree fall, felt to have minimum 50mm overlap to fascias, lapped into existing brickwork and new blockwork, as per Bauder specification and section drawing 300.

3.04.17 Roof to have bitumen edge detail as per Bauder Specification. Bitumen felt roofing to be lapped over flashing detail, lead flashing as per Bauder specification.

3.04.18 Supply and fit powder coated aluminium capping detail, minimum 25mm drip edge to parapet. Securely fixed back through 18mm ply sheathing. Capping from Alumasc, finished in RAL 7042 (dark grey)

SUB TOTAL



3.00 Description Quantity Rate Cost3.04.19 Supply and fit Eurocell Profiles Ltd, uPVC half-round gutter to

existing fascia, linked into new roof construction with uPVC hopper head and down pipe. Connected into new universal drain adapter, Polypipe UG493, with new 100mm diameter underground uPVC pipework, connected into existing underground stormwater system. As per specification R10.

3.04.20 New ceiling to be finished in Dulux Vinyl silk as finishes schedule

3.04.21 Supply and fit new carpet, as per detailed finishes schedule.

3.04.22 Supply and fit externally mounted letter box, galvanised steel to BS EN 10142 / 10143, polyester powder coated, finished black. Fitted with disc tumbler lock. A4 size from The Safety Letter Box Company ref; COM 1 (389)

3.05 Waiting Area

3.05.01 Where existing carpet has been removed clean and prepare surface to receive new surface finish.

3.05.02 To areas of removed existing redundant trunking, electrical equipment etc. Make good to walls and ceilings with skim plaster, finished in Dulux as finishes schedule.

3.05.03 Carefully remove and demolish to floor slab existing toilet walls. Remove existing vinyl floor and sanitary ware, dispose of all material off site

3.05.04 Demolish glazing pane and frame to reception area, dispose off site, create stud walling to reception area, where original glazed pane. Wall to be painted Dulux Diamond Matt. Timber works to match existing. Refer to drawing 200 and 201

3.05.05Demolish stud wall to reception area to create new glazed pane with frame, Glazing to be 8mm clear toughened single unit. New framing to match existing. Refer to drawing 200 and 201

3.05.06 Supply and fit new carpet throughout, Forbo create space 3 (as per finishes schedule)

Accessible WC3.05.07 Construct new stud walling for DDA compliant toilet facility,

75x50mm softwood studs at 400mm centres, with noggins at 900mm vertical centres, full fill Rockwool flexi insulation, with 12.5mm moisture resistant plasterboard on 12mm WBP plywood internally, with 12.5mm plasterboard externally. Both faces to be finished in Gypsum multi-finish plaster. Paint finish as per finishes schedule

3.05.08 Supply and fit new slip resistant flooring to DDA toilet, Forbo surestep, with upturned skirtings, with black plastic coved formers

SUB TOTAL



3.00 Description Quantity Rate Cost3.05.09 Supply and fit new Doc M pack sanitary ware from Armitage

Shanks, as per sanitary finishes schedule. Allow for reconfiguration of hot and cold water services, refer to mechanical specifications.

3.05.10 Create 50x50mm softwood frame boxing to new 110mm diameter soil pipe for new Accessible toilet. Boxing finished in 12mm plywood, screwed at 300mm centres finished with gypsum multi-finish skim plaster. Paint finish as per wall finish detailed in finishes schedule

3.05.11Allow builders work in connection with; Installation of emergency pullcord with manual reset switch and panic light above door externally. System is to be wired to main reception desk with sounder. All in accordance with building regulations Part M and as detailed within Mechanical and Electrical specifications

3.05.12 White tile splashback to behind wash handbasin, H&R Johnsons, Prismatics, 200 x 100mm, as finishes schedule (price option 2)

3.05.13 Supply and fit new FD30 American white oak door to DDA toilet facility, with; 11524 thumb turn lock, 11260/21 lever handle, both sides, 11596 kick plates, both sides, 11603 floor mounted doorstop, with 11632 sign fitted to door, 3x 20319/B hinges, with 40101 door closer, 30103 latch, all to be finished in stainless steel (as per P21 Type 1 door and door schedule). Door Linings - width of wall x 32mm, Architraves - 44 x 18mm, pencil round, Stops - 44 x 18mm, All finished in painted softwood

3.05.14 Paint finish to all walls and ceiling, as per finishes schedule

3.05.15 Create 75x50mm softwood stud wall, studs at 400mm centres, with 900mm horizontal noggins, full filled with Rockwool flexi insulation, finished with 2x12.5mm plasterboard to both sides, plaster skim coat finish. Finished with 1 mist coat and 2 finish coats Dulux. Additional insulation packing required to perimeter of stud walling to ensure suitable sound proofing. Minimum 15mm thickness when compacted. All to new counselling rooms.

3.05.16 Supply and fit new softwood bullnosed skirting 19 x 100mm, softwood to be knot treated, finished in 2 primer coats, with 1 Dulux gloss finish. As finishes schedule.

3.05.18 Supply and fit 2no. FD30 American white oak doors, following per door; 11260/21 lever handles to both sides, 11596 kick plates to both sides, 10204 thumb turn lock, 11603 door stop, 11640 fire door logo, 3x 20319/B hinges, with 40101 door closer, 30103 latch, all to be finished in stainless steel (as per P21 Type 2 door and door schedule). Door Linings - width of wall x 32mm, Architraves - 44 x 18mm, pencil round, Stops - 44 x 18mm, All finished in painted softwood.

SUB TOTAL



3.00 Description Quantity Rate Cost3.05.19

Where all existing softwood is to remain this to be rubbed down to provide key, finished with new Dulux paint as finishes schedule

3.05.20 Ensure all exposed pipeworks are boxed-in, boxings to be 50x50mm softwood battens, with 12mm MDF boards, screw fixed at 600mm centres, pelleted, with Dulux paint finish as finishes schedule.

3.05.20 Contractor is to provide single skim plaster finish to ceilings in; waiting area, DDA toilet and 2no counselling rooms. To be finished in Dulux white. As finishes schedule

3.05.21 Where new key pad entry system, to corridor door, all wiring to be chased into existing walls, no exposed wiring, contractor to ensure existing walls are made good.

3.05.22 New FD30 door to corridor, finished in American white oak, with 11260/21 lever handles to both sides, 11596 kick plates to both sides, electronic key strike 70217, 11603 door stop, 11640 fire door logo, 3x 20319/B hinges, with 40101 door closer, 30103 latch, all to be finished in stainless steel (as per P21 Type 3 door and door schedule)

3.05.23 Contractor to allow for any additional items referenced within the finishes schedule; pinboards etc.

3.06 Counselling Room 1

3.06.01 Supply and fit softwood bullnosed skirtings 19 x 100mm, including softwood door frame. Knot, primed, finished with 2 coats primer 1 coat Dulux white, as finishes schedule.

3.06.02 Supply and fit new carpet, as per finishes schedule

3.06.03 Paint finish to walls and ceiling as per finishes schedule


3.06.05 Supply and fit additional plasterboard to ceiling, secured with galvanised screws, finished with one coat plaster, finished in Dulux white. As finishes schedule

3.06.06 Remove existing window and dispose off site

3.06.07Form new external wall, as indicated on drawing 201, ensure external bricks match existing, cavity is full filled with Rockwool flexi insulation internal leaf is aerated blockwork, with skim plaster finish, Dulux paint finished, as finishes schedule.

SUB TOTAL



3.00 Description Quantity Rate Cost3.06.08 Supply and fit to new cavity wall Catnic cavity closers.

3.06.09 Supply and fit new uPVC windows, RAL 7042 (dark grey) to exterior, interior to be white as specification section L10

3.06.10 Supply and fit new softwood rounded window board, knot treated, 2 coats primer, 1 coat gloss finish.



3.07.01 Supply and fit softwood bullnosed skirtings 19 x 100mm, including softwood door frame. Knots primed, finished with 2 coats primer 1 coat Dulux white. As finishes schedule.




3.07.05 Supply and fit additional plasterboard to ceiling, secured with galvanised screws, finished with one coat plaster, finished in Dulux white

3.07.06 Supply and fit new uPVC windows, RAL 7042 (dark grey) to exterior, interior to be white as specification section L10

3.07.07 Supply and fit new softwood rounded window board, knot treated, 2 coats primer, 1 coat gloss finish.

3.07.08 Finishes schedule items; pinboards etc.

3.08 Reception


3.08.02 Make good to areas of removed existing redundant trunking, electrical equipment etc. Finish with skim plaster, decorations as finishes schedule.

3.08.03 Carefully demolish wall as indicated on drawing 200 to finish floor level. Dispose material off site. Make good to walls with skim plaster finish.

3.08.04 Supply and lay new carpet, as per finishes schedule

SUB TOTAL



3.00 Description Quantity Rate Cost3.08.05 To existing softwood skirtings and frames, rubdown prime and

finish with 1 coat Dulux gloss

3.08.06 Skim plaster finish to existing ceiling, finish with Dulux as finishes schedule

3.08.07 Walls to be finished in Dulux Diamond, as finishes schedule

3.08.08 Supply and fit new white PVC dado trunking for services, walls to have trunking as per floor plan drawing indicating desk spaces. Drawing 201. Trunking to be above bench height in accordance with Part M compliance

3.08.09 Supply and fit American white oak benching, as per floor plan indicating desk spacing, with suitable stainless steel support legs, fixed to floor, benching to have mitred jointing. For desk positioning see Drawing 201.


3.08.11 Supply and fit FD30 American white oak door; 11260/21 lever handles to both sides, 11596 kick plates to both sides, 11603 door stop, 11640 fire door logo, 3x 20319/B hinges, with 40101 door closer, 30103 latch, all to be finished in stainless steel. (as per P21 Type 4 door and door schedule)


3.09 HR/Payroll



3.09.03 Make good to areas of removed existing ceiling mounted light fittings.


3.09.05 To existing softwood skirtings and frames, rubdown prime and finish with 1 coat Dulux gloss

3.09.06 Walls to be finished in Dulux Diamond, as per finishes schedule

SUB TOTAL



3.00 Description Quantity Rate Cost3.09.07 Supply and fit new white PVC dado trunking for services, walls to

have trunking as per floor plan drawing indicating desk spaces. Drawing 201. Trunking to be above bench height in accordance with Part M compliance

3.09.08 Supply and fit American white oak benching, as per floor plan indicating desk spacing, with suitable stainless steel support legs, fixed to floor, mitred jointing. For desk positioning see Drawing 201.


3.09.10 Supply and fit FD30 American white oak door; 11260/21 lever handles to both sides, 11596 kick plates to both sides, 11603 door stop, 11640 fire door logo, 3x 20319/B hinges, with 40101 door closer, 30103 latch, with mechanical combination lock all to be finished in stainless steel. (as per P21 Type 5 door and door schedule)


3.10 Staff WC

3.10.01 Where existing vinyl has been removed clean and prepare surface to receive new surface finish.


3.10.03 Remove existing pan and dispose off site, retain hand basin and provide deep clean, remove taps and dispose off site.

3.10.04 Make good to exposed area to removed pullcord at ceiling.

3.10.05 Supply and lay new slip resistant flooring with black coved formers from Forbo surestep, as per finishes schedule.

3.10.06 Supply and install new sanitaryware and new taps to wash handbasin, as per schedule. Allow for adjustments to pipework as per mechanical specifications

3.10.07 Existing walls and ceiling to be painted in Dulux, as per finishes schedule.

SUB TOTAL



3.00 Description Quantity Rate Cost3.10.08 Supply and fit new FD30 American white oak door with; 11524

thumb turn lock, 11260/21 lever handle, both sides, 11596 kick plates, both sides, 11603 floor mounted doorstop, with 11633 sign fitted to door, 3x 20319/B hinges, with 40101 door closer, 30103 latch, all to be finished in stainless steel. (as per P21 Type 1 door and door schedule)

3.11 Staircase and Corridors





3.11.05 To existing softwood skirtings and frames, rubdown prime and finish with 1 coat Dulux gloss


3.11.07 Supply and fit new staircase nosings, Gradus XT aluminium, GRXT81 as per finishes schedule.

3.11.08 Staircase window to landing to be obscured with frost effect manifestation / film.

3.11.09 Existing handrail to be rubbed down to provide key for new Crown Quick Drying Varnish, 2 coats.



3.12 Cleaners Cupboard

3.12.01Walls to be finished in Dulux Diamond, as per finishes schedule

3.12.02 Existing skirtings and door frames to be painted, as per finishes schedule

SUB TOTAL



3.00 Description Quantity Rate Cost3.12.03 Carefully strip and remove all existing fixtures and fittings, make

good to walls where fittings have been removed, dispose of all material off site.

3.12.04 Supply and fit new Belfast cleaners sink, with stainless steel taps.

3.12.05 Supply and fit new 32mm uPVC drainage pipe, Hepworth, connected into unisex wash handbasin pipework. Penetrate wall to provide connection, make good to wall.

3.13 Kitchenette

3.13.01 Remove door and frame to the adjoining consulting room, dispose off site. Make good to walls where frames removed with skim plaster.

3.13.02 To removed door opening create 100mm stud wall, studs set at 400mm centres with full fill Rockwool flexi insulation, 2x 12.5mm plasterboard to both faces, fixed with galvanised screws finished with skim plaster, 2 mist coats of Dulux and 1 finish coat, as finishes schedule.

3.13.03 Carefully strip and remove all existing fixtures and fittings, make good to walls where fittings have been removed, dispose of all material off site.

3.13.04 Remove existing skirting and dispose off site. Make good to holes and chases on walls. Clean and prepare floor, in preparation of new finishes.


3.13.06 Paint to walls and ceiling as per finishes schedule.

3.13.07 Supply and lay new vinyl flooring, Forbo surestep, with coved upstands, allow for black PVC coved formers. As finishes schedule

3.13.08 Supply and install new kitchen units, basic Howden's range, oak effect finish to doors, with Stainless steel single bowl sink and drainer. Oak effect 32mm thick work surface. With no.1 wall mounted cabinet. As noted in the finishes schedule

3.13.09 Supply and fit Stainless steel sink with drainer, stainless steel mixer tap as per sanitary schedule


SUB TOTAL



3.00 Description Quantity Rate Cost3.13.11 Ensure all exposed pipeworks are boxed-in, boxings to be

50x50mm softwood battens, with 12mm MDF boards, screw fixed at 600mm centres, pelleted, with Dulux paint finish as finishes schedule.

3.13.12 Supply and fit new FD30 American white oak door with; 11260/21 lever handle, both sides, 11596 kick plates, both sides, 11603 floor mounted doorstop, with 11640 sign fitted to door, 3x 20319/B hinges, with 40101 door closer, 30103 latch, all to be finished in stainless steel. (as per P21 Type 4 door and door schedule)

3.13.13 White tile splashback to two walls, H&R Johnsons, Prismatics, 200 x 100mm, to underside of wall cupboards (price option 2)





3.14.04 Create 75X50mm softwood stud wall, studs at 400mm centres, with 900mm horizontal noggins, full filled with Rockwool flexi insulation, finished with 2x12.5mm plasterboard to both sides, skim coat finish. Finished with 1 mist coat and 2 finish coats Dulux. Additional insulation packing required to perimeter of stud walling to ensure suitable sound proofing. minimum 15mm thickness when compacted.

3.14.05 Supply and fit softwood bullnosed skirtings 19 x 100mm. Knot primed, finished with 2 coats primer 1 coat Dulux gloss white.



3.14.08 Rubdown all existing softwood skirtings and frames, prime, paint 1 coat, as per schedule.


3.14.10 Supply and fit additional plasterboard to ceiling, secured with galvanised screws, finished with one coat plaster, paint finish as per finishes schedule

SUB TOTAL



3.00 Description Quantity Rate Cost3.14.11 Contractor to allow for any additional items referenced within the

finishes schedule; pinboards etc.

3.14.12 Supply and fit FD30 American white oak doors, following per door; 11260/21 lever handles to both sides, 11596 kick plates to both sides, 10204 thumb turn lock, 11603 door stop, 11640 fire door logo, 3x 20319/B hinges, with 40101 door closer, 30103 latch, all to be finished in stainless steel. (as per P21 Type 2 door and door schedule)

3.15 Family Meeting Room/Family Area



3.15.03 Carefully strip and remove all existing fixtures and fittings, make good to walls where fittings have been removed including sink unit. Where sink drainage pipe penetrated wall, make good with brick and block infill, skim plaster internally.

3.15.04 Carefully remove existing window and window board, dispose material off site. Make good to wall reveal with skim plaster, finished as finishes schedule.

3.15.05 Carefully remove and demolish section of wall adjacent to window, to FFL, minimum 900mm wide, remove all material off site. Make good to walls with skim plaster, paint finish as finishes schedule.


3.15.07 To existing softwood skirtings and frames, rubdown prime and finish with 1 coat paint as finishes schedule


3.15.09 Supply and lay new vinyl flooring to activity area, from Forbo, see finishes schedule. Laid flush to existing skirting, sealed with general white mastic sealant.

3.15.10 Supply and fit new white PVC window and door, door to have suitable levered latch double locking mechanism, with euro profile cylinder lock, internal shoot bolts top and bottom, half glazed, stippolyte glazing, with stainless steel low profile door threshold. Windows to be top hung uPVC units with espagnolette window handle, all finished in stainless steel. As per specification sections L10 and L20

3.15.11 Supply and fit new softwood bull nosed window board, knot treated and primed, 1 coat Dulux gloss, as per finishes schedule

SUB TOTAL



3.00 Description Quantity Rate Cost3.15.12 Ensure all exposed pipeworks are boxed-in, boxings to be

50x50mm softwood battens, with 12mm MDF boards, screw fixed at 600mm centres, pelleted, with Dulux paint finish as finishes schedule.

3.15.13 Supply and install new kitchen units, basic Howden's range, oak effect finish to doors, with Stainless steel single bowl sink and drainer. Oak effect 32mm thick work surface. As noted in the finishes schedule


3.15.15 Supply and fit new ceiling track folding partition, SM Folding Walls from Becker, stacked to both walls, finish to be confirmed. Total width of unit to be 3180mm x 2340mm (contractor to determine exact site dimensions)

3.15.16 Take down section of wall adjacent to door, suitable for DDA compliance door opening. Dispose material off site. Make good remaining wall with plasterboard and skim plaster finish.

3.15.17 Supply and fit DDA compliant FD30 American white oak door, with following; 11260/21 lever handles to both sides, 11596 kick plates to both sides, 10204 thumb turn lock, 11603 door stop, 11640 fire door logo, 3x 20319/B hinges, with 40101 door closer, 30103 latch, all to be finished in stainless steel. (as per P21 Type 4 door and door schedule)


3.16 Managers Office



3.16.03 Carefully strip and remove all existing fixtures and fittings, make good to walls where fittings have been removed including sink unit. Make good to wall where pipework penetrates wall. Brick and block infill with plaster finish internally.

3.16.04 Carefully remove existing window and window board, dispose material off site. Make good to wall reveal with skim plaster, finished as finishes schedule.


3.16.06 To existing softwood skirtings and frames, rubdown prime and finish with 1 coat Dulux gloss, as per finishes schedule

SUB TOTAL



3.00 Description Quantity Rate Cost3.16.07

Walls to be finished in Dulux Diamond, as per finishes schedule

3.16.08 Supply and fit new white PVC window and door, door to have suitable levered latch double locking mechanism, with euro profile cylinder lock, internal shoot bolts top and bottom, half glazed, stippolyte glazing, with stainless steel low profile door threshold. Windows to be top hung uPVC units with espagnolette window handle, all finished in stainless steel. As per specification section L10 and L20

3.16.09 Supply and fit new softwood bull nose window board, knot treated and primed with 2 undercoats, 1 finishing coat in Dulux gloss, as finishes schedule


3.16.11 Supply and fit FD30 American white oak doors, following per door; 11260/21 lever handles to both sides, 11596 kick plates to both sides, 11603 door stop, 11640 fire door logo, 3x 20319/B hinges, with 40101 door closer, 30103 latch, all to be finished in stainless steel. (as per P21 Type 4 door and door schedule)


3.17 Meeting Room



3.17.03 Where removed electrical and mechanical items, clean and fill holes/chases in walls and dispose material off site

3.17.04 Carefully strip and remove all existing fixtures and fittings, make good to walls where fittings have been removed including sink unit. Make good where pipework penetrates wall. Brick and block infill with skim plaster internally.

3.17.05 Carefully remove existing window, door and window board, dispose material off site. Make good to wall reveal with skim plaster, finished as finishes schedule.


3.17.07 To existing softwood skirtings and frames, rubdown prime and finish with 1 coat Dulux gloss, as per finishes schedule

SUB TOTAL



3.00 Description Quantity Rate Cost3.17.08 Walls to be finished in Dulux Diamond, as per finishes schedule

3.17.09 Supply and fit new white PVC window and door, door to have suitable levered latch double locking mechanism, with euro profile cylinder lock, internal shoot bolts top and bottom, half glazed, stippolyte glazing, with stainless steel low profile door threshold. Windows to be top hung uPVC units with espagnolette window handle, all finished in stainless steel. As per specification section L10 and L20

3.17.10 Supply and fit new softwood bull nose window board, knot treated and primed with 2 undercoats, 1 finish coat Dulux gloss, as finishes schedule




First Floor (total floor sq./m 119)

3.18 Hall / Corridor




3.18.04 Carefully remove existing corridor cupboard door and softwood frame, as shown on drawing 200. Dispose material off site, make good to wall where door removed with skim plaster finish.


3.18.06 To existing softwood skirtings and frames, throughout corridor, rubdown prime and finish with 1 coat Dulux gloss, as per finishes schedule.

3.18.07 Walls to be finished in Dulux Diamond, as per finishes scheduleSUB TOTAL



3.00 Description Quantity Rate Cost3.18.08 Supply and fit new staircase nosing, Gradus XT

aluminium,GRXT81 as per finishes schedule. To floor junction alteration.

3.18.09 Supply and fit new 100mm stud wall to cupboard door opening with studs at 400mm centres with full fill Rockwool flexi insulation, 12,5mm plasterboard to both faces, skim plaster finish. With new bull nosed softwood 19 x 100mm skirting. Walls finished in Dulux diamond mattand skirting finished in gloss, as per finishes schedule.



3.19 Large Office




3.19.04 Carefully remove and demolish small timber partition wall back to original solid wall construction, as shown on drawing 200. make good to affected area with skim plaster finish. Paint finish as per finishes schedule.


3.19.06 Supply and fit new staircase nosing, Gradus XT aluminium, GRXT81 as per finishes schedule. To floor junction alteration.

3.19.07 Contractor is to rubdown, prime and finish all existing softwood skirtings and frames, finish as per finishes schedule.


3.19.09 Supply and fit new white PVC dado trunking for services, walls to have trunking as per floor plan drawing indicating desk spaces. Drawing 201. Trunking to be above bench height in accordance with Part M compliance

SUB TOTAL



3.00 Description Quantity Rate Cost3.19.10 Supply and fit American white oak benching, as per floor plan

indicating desk spacing, with suitable stainless steel support legs, fixed to floor, mitred jointing. For desk positioning see Drawing 201.


3.19.12 Make good to new ventilation supply grill and equipment as per mechanical specification.



3.20 Small Office

3.20.01 Carefully remove and demolish walls shown on drawing 200. to finish floor level, including all redundant doors and frames, dispose all material off site. Make good to walls affected by works, skim plaster finish, painted as per finishes schedule

3.20.02 Carefully remove and demolish wall from CEO office and small office down to finish floor level, dispose all material off site as drawing 200. Make good to walls affected by works, skim plaster finish, painted as per finishes schedule.





3.20.07 Contractor to rubdown and prime existing softwood skirtings and frames, finish with 1 coat Dulux gloss, as per finishes schedule

3.20.08 Supply and fit new softwood bull nose 19 x 100mm skirtings and frames, knot and prime with 2 undercoats, finished with 1 coat Dulux gloss as per finishes schedule.

SUB TOTAL



3.00 Description Quantity Rate Cost3.20.09 Walls to be finished in Dulux Diamond, as per finishes schedule

3.20.10 Supply and fit new white PVC dado trunking for services, walls to have trunking as per floor plan drawing indicating desk spaces. Drawing 201, trunking to be above bench height in accordance with Part M compliance

3.20.11 Supply and fit American white oak benching, as per floor plan indicating desk spacing, with suitable stainless steel support legs, fixed to floor, mitred jointing. Drawing 201


3.20.13 Supply and fit 2no. FD30 American white oak doors, following per door; 11260/21 lever handles to both sides, 11596 kick plates to both sides, 11603 door stop, 11640 fire door logo, 3x 20319/B hinges, with 40101 door closer, 30103 latch, all to be finished in stainless steel. (as per P21 Type 4 door and door schedule)

3.20.14 Door to CEO office to have mechanical combination lock, 70103 (as per P21 Type 5 door and door schedule)


3.21 CEO Office





3.21.05 Carefully strip and remove all existing fixtures and fittings, make good to walls where fittings have been removed including sink unit. Make good to walls where penetrated by drainage pipework.



SUB TOTAL






3.21.10 Supply and fit FD30 American white oak door; 11260/21 lever handles to both sides, 11596 kick plates to both sides, 11603 door stop, 11640 fire door logo, 3x 20319/B hinges, with 40101 door closer, 30103 latch, with mechanical combination lock, 70103 all to be finished in stainless steel. (as per P21 Type 5 door and door schedule)


3.22 Fundraising Office





3.22.05 Carefully strip and remove all existing fixtures and fittings, make good to walls where fittings have been removed including sink unit. Make good walls where penetrated by drainage pipework.



3.22.08 Contractor to form new opening from fundraising office to cupboard, create opening for double door set, supply and fit softwood door Linings - width of wall x 32mm, Architraves - 44 x 18mm, pencil round, Stops - 44 x 18mm, All finished in painted softwood knot treated and primed with 2 undercoats and 1 finish coat Dulux gloss finish. As per finishes schedule.

3.22.09 Contractor to supply and fit new MDF Dulux matt white painted shelving units to newly formed cupboard, set on adjustable stainless steel brackets and hangars. Brackets to be screw fixed to walls with galvanised screws

SUB TOTAL






3.22.12 Supply and fit FD30 American white oak door; 11260/21 lever handles to both sides, 11596 kick plates to both sides, 11603 door stop, 11640 fire door logo, 3x 20319/B hinges, with 40101 door closer, mechanical combination lock, 70103, 30103 latch, all to be finished in stainless steel. (as per P21 Type 5 door and door schedule)

3.22.13 Supply and fit American white oak pair doors; 11260/21 lever handles to both sides, 11596 kick plates to both sides, 11603 door stop, 3x 20319/B hinges, 2no. Straight shoot 50101/2 to slave door, main leaf to have europrofile lock 32010, concealed fix escutcheons 12872, all to be finished in stainless steel. (as per P21 Type 6 door and door schedule)


3.23 Server Room







3.23.07 Supply and fit FD30 American white oak door; 11260/21 lever handles to both sides, 11596 kick plates to both sides, 11603 door stop, 11640 fire door logo, 3x 20319/B hinges, with 40101 door closer, mechanical combination lock, 70103, 30103 latch, all to be finished in stainless steel. (as per P21 Type 5 door and door schedule)

SUB TOTAL



3.00 Description Quantity Rate Cost3.23.08 Make good to new ventilation grill, as per mechanical

specification.

3.24 Staff Area

3.24.01 To new boiler create 75mm stud wall, studs set at 400mm centres with full fill Rockwool flexi insulation, 12.5mm plasterboard to both faces, fixed with galvanised screws finished with skim plaster, 2 mist coats of Dulux and 1 finish coat, as finishes schedule.

3.24.02 Supply and fit American white oak door to boiler cupboard; 11260/21 lever handle, 11603 door stop, 11640 fire door logo, 2x 20319/B hinges, 30103 latch, all to be finished in stainless steel. (as per P21 Type 7 door and door schedule)


3.24.04 Remove existing skirting and dispose off site. Make good to walls, clean and prepare floor, in preparation of new finishes

3.24.05 Remove existing ceiling mounted light fittings, dispose off site. Where ceilings damaged from removal make good.

3.24.06 Paint to walls and ceiling as per finishes schedule.

3.24.07 Supply and lay new vinyl flooring, Forbo surestep, with coved upstands, allow for black PVC coved formers.

3.24.08 Supply and install new kitchen units, basic Howden's range, oak effect finish to doors, with Stainless steel single bowl sink and drainer. Oak effect 32mm thick work surface. With no.1 wall mounted cabinet. As noted in the finishes schedule




3.24.12 Supply and fit new FD30 American white oak door with; 11260/21 lever handle, both sides, 11596 kick plates, both sides, 11603 floor mounted doorstop, with 11640 sign fitted to door, 3x 20319/B hinges, with 40101 door closer, 30103 latch, all to be finished in stainless steel. (as per P21 Type 4 door and door schedule)

SUB TOTAL



3.00 Description Quantity Rate Cost3.24.13 White tile splashback to two walls, H&R Johnsons, Prismatics,

200 x 100mm, to underside of wall cupboards (price option 2)

3.24.14 Supply and fit melamine black finished worktop with stainless steel support legs fixed to floor for bar style worktop as shown on drawing 201, legs at maximum 1200mm centres. Stainless steel angle brackets screw fixed to wall and bench, at every 600mm centres.

3.25 Male WC




3.25.04 Make good to exposed area from removed pull chord at ceiling

3.25.05 Make good to the wall surrounding new extract unit.


3.25.07 Supply and install new sanitary ware as per schedule. Allow for adjustments to pipeworks as per mechanical specifications


3.25.09 Supply and fit new FD30 American white oak door with; 11524 thumb turn lock, 11260/21 lever handle, both sides, 11596 kick plates, both sides, 11603 floor mounted doorstop, with 11633 sign fitted to door, 3x 20319/B hinges, with 40101 door closer, 30103 latch, all to be finished in stainless steel. (as per P21 Type 1 door and door schedule)

3.25.10 White tile splashback to wash handbasin, H&R Johnsons, Prismatics, 200 x 100mm (price option 2)



SUB TOTAL



3.00 Description Quantity Rate Cost3.26 Female WC




3.26.04 Make good to exposed area from removed pull chord at ceiling

3.26.05 Make good to wall surrounding the new extract unit.


3.26.07 Supply and install new sanitary ware as per schedule. Allow for adjustments to pipeworks as per mechanical specifications


3.26.09 Supply and fit new FD30 American white oak door with; 11524 thumb turn lock, 11260/21 lever handle, both sides, 11596 kick plates, both sides, 11603 floor mounted doorstop, with 11633 sign fitted to door, 3x 20319/B hinges, with 40101 door closer, 30103 latch, all to be finished in stainless steel. (as per P21 Type 1 door and door schedule)

3.26.10 White tile splashback to wash handbasin, H&R Johnsons, Prismatics, 200 x 100mm (price option 2)



3.26.13 Supply and fit new FD30 American white oak door to cupboard with; 11260/21 lever handle, both sides, 11596 kick plates, both sides, 11603 floor mounted doorstop, with 11640 sign fitted to door, 3x 20319/B hinges, with 40101 door closer, mechanical combination lock, 70103 all to be finished in stainless steel. (as per P21 Type 5 door and door schedule)

SUB TOTAL



3.00 Description Quantity Rate Cost3.27 External Works

3.27.01 Carefully remove all front and side elevation windows and dispose off site, remove internal window boards and dispose. As shown on drawing 200.

3.27.02 Demolish / grub up, concrete paving to front and remove spoil from site, prepare base for new slabs as drawing 200.

3.27.03 Supply and fit new uPVC windows, similar to RAL 7042 (dark grey) externally and white internally, windows to be casement with espagnolette locking handles, windows are to have 100mm restrictors, trickle ventilators to head. As per specification section L10 and drawing 201

3.27.04 Supply and lay new Marshall Saxon paving, buff, to new path and entrance foyer, bedded on 100mm compacted type 1, 50mm compacted sharp sand, butt joint finished.

3.27.05 All remaining windows, to sides and indicated on drawing 200, are to be redecorated externally and internally, windows are to be eased and adjusted where required. As specification section M60

3.27.06 Supply and fit sign board, to be 800mm x 1800mm, as shown on drawing 202, powder coated aluminium for the backboard, full colour printed graphics, from Signace Ltd or similar

3.27.07 All existing gutters, down pipes and gullies are to be cleared and free flowing. All existing gullies are to be removed and new stainless steel gullies from Hepworth are to be installed.

3.27.08 External fascias and soffits to be rubbed down, flake free, decorated as per specification M60

3.27.09 Supply and fit new external uPVC door to staff main entrance, with lever handle, electronic strike, latch lock and three point secure reveal bolts. New external keypad entry system to staff entrance door. As per specification section L20.

3.27.09 Supply and fit to external front elevation at first floor level. Walls to be overclad with HardieLinea cladding ColourPlus, finished in Khaki Brown JH20-30. Vertical installation, set on 25 x 38mm softwood treated battens, with stainless steel ventilation profile starter kit from JamesHardie

3.27.10 External brickwork face, as drawing 202, to be rendered with StoRend Flex Cote, prepare sub-base with Polymer-modified levelling coat StoLevell Cote, StoArmat Classic with Sto-Glass Fibre Mesh, finish with StoSilco, colour to be confirmed

SUB TOTAL



3.00 Description Quantity Rate Cost3.28 Other Works

3.28.01 When Removing external copper gas pipe, ensure mains gas has been turned off prior to works commencing, dispose off site

3.28.02 Carry out repointing works to full length of existing low level brick wall, including for any brick repairs to capping detail.

3.28.03 To new copper external gas pipe, paint finish Hammerite black as NBS section M60. Secure pipe to external wall with copper clips, screw fixed to wall with copper screws.

3.28.04 Contractor is to prune back all overgrown shrubs and trees from neighbours back to the fence line, dispose material off site.

3.28.05 Provide suitable thermoplastic car parking white lining to front and rear car parking areas, with yellow lining to for DDA parking facility as per drawing 102.

3.28.06 Car park, access road and front entrance to have all weeds removed, treat with weed killer and seal joints with hot applied bitumen to joints

3.28.07 Contractor to allow for 50m2 of localised repair works to car parking area. Breakout existing surface and binder courses, relay new binder and surface courses and seal joints with hot bitumen to joints.

3.28.08 Front garden area to have shrubs and tree pruned back, tree minimum of 1m of existing canopy to be taken back. Materials dispose off site.

3.28.09 Provide comprehensive works for underground drainage repairs, as per ACD drainage survey.

3.28.10 Remove and dispose of timber shed, concrete base and steps. Make good and lay new turf.

3.28.11 Existing external concrete ramp to proposed Managers office to be removed, surrounding area made good with tarmac patch repair, hot applied bitumen to joints.

3.28.12 New concrete ramp to be constructed to proposed Activity area at new external door. Concrete to be lean mix 1:3 graded at 1:12 minimum.

3.28.13 Contractor is to allow for all BWIC with services as detailed within the M&E specification sections.

3.28.14 Contractor is to ensure that all new mechanical and electrical works are boxed-in. Boxings to be 50x50mm softwood battens, with 12mm MDF boards, screw fixed at 600mm centres, pelleted, with Dulux paint finish as finishes schedule.

SUB TOTAL



3.00 Description Quantity Rate Cost

Combined sub-totals

On Completion

On completion contractor to allow for cleaning down all work areas and for leaving all surfaces in a clean and tidy condition.

Full test certificates and O&M manuals to be provided.

Sub total

Carried to Form of Tender

Contractor is not to price for the following items, these will be client direct, contractor is to price for cleaning down areas and making good where areas damaged.

Removal of all existing carpeted and vinyl areas.Removal of all existing fixtures and fittings not relating to M&ERemoval of all existing window blinds



SECTION 4.0:

MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SCHEDULE OF WORK

Internal and External - Alterations and Refurbishment

Colchester Mind – TENDER

Job No: 42353 Date: December 2013

Page 1 of 29

BUILDING ENGINEERING SERVICES PROJECT SPECIFICATION

FOR COLCHESTER MIND

WELLNESS CENTRE REFURBISHMENT

This document has been prepared for the titled project or named part thereof and should not be relied upon or used for any other project without an independent check being carried out as to its suitability and prior written authority of Ingleton Wood being obtained. Ingleton Wood accepts no responsibility or liability for the consequence of this document being used for a purpose other than the purposes for which it was commissioned. Any person using or relying on the document for such other purpose agrees, and will by such use or reliance be taken to confirm his agreement to indemnify Ingleton Wood for all loss or damage resulting there from. Ingleton Wood accepts no responsibility or liability for this document to any party other than the person by whom it was commissioned.

CHECKING AND REVISION

Revision Description Originator Checked Approved Date

T0 Tender (Mech) CB TS/JS 05/12/13




Page 2 of 29

CONTENTS

MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL SERVICES

4.1 MECHANICAL STANDARD OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

4.2 MECHANICAL PARTICULAR WORKS

4.3 ELECTRICAL STANDARD OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

4.4 ELECTRICAL PARTICULAR WORKS

APPENDICES

APPENDIX A ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS SCHEDULE APPENDIX B DISTRIBUTION BOARD SCHEDULE APPENDIX C MECHANICAL SCHEDULE OF DAYWORKS and TENDER SUMMARY APPENDIX D ELECTRICAL SCHEDULE OF DAYWORKS and TENDER SUMMARY




Page 3 of 29

SECTION 4.1

MECHANICAL SERVICES

STANDARDS OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP




Page 4 of 29

SECTION 4.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS

STANDARD OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

Contents

4.1.01 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................. 5

4.1.02 MATERIALS (GENERALLY) ............................................................................ 5

4.1.03 PIPEWORK (GENERAL) ................................................................................. 6

4.1.04 SLEEVES AND FLOOR PLATES .................................................................... 6

4.1.05 RELEVANT CODES OF PRACTICE AND CLASS OF TUBING ...................... 6

4.1.06 PIPEWORK ERECTION AND JOINTING ......................................................... 7

4.1.07 MAINS WATER CONNECTION ....................................................................... 9

4.1.08 ANCHORS AND SUPPORTS .......................................................................... 9

4.1.09 VALVES AND STOPCOCKS ........................................................................... 12

4.1.10 DRAINCOCKS ................................................................................................. 13

4.1.11 AIR COCKS ..................................................................................................... 13

4.1.12 PIPELINE IDENTIFICATION ............................................................................ 13

4.1.13 VALVE LABELS .............................................................................................. 13

4.1.14 WELDING ......................................................................................................... 14

4.1.15 FIRE HYDRANTS ............................................................................................. 15

4.1.16 THERMAL INSULATION ................................................................................. 16

4.1.17 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ................................................................... 22

4.1.18 STERILIZATION OF WATER SYSTEMS ......................................................... 24

4.1.19 BURIED PIPEWORK........................................................................................ 26

4.1.20 INFORMATION AND ‘AS INSTALLED’ DRAWINGS....................................... 29




Page 5 of 29

£ p

To collection:


SECTION 4.1 - MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

4.1.01 INTRODUCTION

This section of the Specification covers the standards of materials

and workmanship which are to apply to all mechanical projects of

the Authority. It is intended to cover the whole range of

mechanical work although some projects may not contain all of

the work covered in this section.

4.1.02 MATERIALS (GENERALLY)

The Contractor shall include for the supply, delivery, installation,

commissioning and testing of all materials, etc., necessary to

complete the works, as specified and scheduled, notwithstanding

that such materials may or may not be specified in detail.

Where relevant, materials shall comply with the Specification of

the British Standards Institution.

Materials shall be as specified unless the phrase 'or equal'

appears, when the Contractor may substitute an item or

equivalent price, quality workmanship and appearance. Before

installation, samples of such items shall be submitted to the

Contract Administrator for approval. Rejection of any samples

submitted shall not reduce the Contractor's responsibility to

complete the works (using approved materials) within the contract

period.

The Contract Administrator shall also have the right to call for

samples of specified materials.

When ordering materials, the Contractor shall state the description

as specified as well as the manufacturer and catalogue number.

The specified description may have certain differences from the

standard catalogued item.

When obtaining quotations for the preparation of the tender, the

Tenderer shall, where applicable, state full description and

quantities in his enquiry any details and /or quantities the

manufacturer may have obtained previously from the Contract

Administrator or from any other source may be superseded.




Page 6 of 29

£ p

To collection:

4.1.03 PIPEWORK (GENERAL)

The Contractor shall supply, deliver and erect all interconnecting

pipework complete with all brackets, fittings, unions, valves etc.

necessary for the operation of the plant as shown on the

drawings.

The pipework and fittings shall conform to the current British

Standards and where applicable installed to the relevant Code of

Practice.

All pipework runs shall be properly spaced from each other and

walls, floors and ceilings.

The arrangement and sizes of the pipework shall be generally as

portrayed on the tender drawings.

4.1.04 SLEEVES AND FLOOR PLATES

Where pipes pass through walls, floors, partitions or ceilings, the

Contractor shall supply and hand to the Main Contractor sleeve

pipes of suitable size and materials for building in. After

installation of the pipework the Contractor shall caulk the sleeve

with glass fibre rope. Each sleeve shall project 7 mm beyond the

finished surface. Any pipe passing through a waterproofed

retaining wall or slab shall pass through a sealed puddle flange.

Polished floor plates shall be fitted to all pipework in the occupied

areas where the service enters a wall, floor or item of fitted

furniture.

4.1.05 RELEVANT CODES OF PRACTICE AND CLASS OF TUBING

The Contractor shall refer to the specific service clauses of this

Specification to establish which materials are to be used for the

pipework installation.

a) Black mild steel pipework shall comply with BS 1387 Heavy

Quality. Screwed and flanged fittings shall be manufactured

in accordance with BS 143.

b) Galvanised mild steel pipework shall comply with BS 1387

Heavy Quality. Screwed and flanged fittings shall be

manufactured in accordance with BS 143.




Page 7 of 29

£ p

To collection:

c) Stainless steel pipework shall comply with BS 4127. Fittings

shall be capillary pattern to BS 864.

d) Light gauge copper tube shall be manufactured to the

requirements of BS 1872, Part 1, Table X, by Yorkshire

Imperial Metals Limited.

e) Light gauge thin wall copper tube shall be manufactured to

the requirements of BS 2871, Part 1, Table Z, by Yorkshire

Imperial Metals Limited.

f) Polythene tube shall comply with BS 3284, Class G, for sizes

up to and including 25 mm and Class C for 32 mm and

above. All fittings shall be compression pattern to BS 864.

Pipework shall also be installed to the following Codes of

Practice:

a) Domestic Water Services :

British Standard Codes of Practice CP310 and CP 99

b) All cold water service installation shall comply with the latest

edition of water supply bylaws approval.

c) Gas Services:

British Standard Codes of Practice, CP 331 and the current

Gas Regulations.

Gas safety regulations (Installation and use) April 1990.

Installer must be Corgi registered.

4.1.06 PIPEWORK ERECTION AND JOINTING

Protection against electrolytic action occurring with dissimilar

metals on existing systems to be upgraded, care shall be taken by

the introduction of Dezinctification couplings where there is the

potential for this to occur due to the introduction within the

installed system of items of plant such as copper lined cylinders

for DHWS.

Bends on black mild steel and copper pipework shall be formed on

pipe lengths by machine bending when this is the accepted

practice. The internal radius of the bend shall not be less than two

pipes diameters.




Page 8 of 29

£ p

To collection:

Galvanised pipework, light gauge thin wall copper tube to Table Z

and stainless steel tube shall not be bent with a bending machine.

Fittings shall be used throughout the installation in these

instances.

Only in exceptional cases will the use of elbows be permitted and

only with the written approval of the Contract Administrator.

Alterations to the cross sectional area of the pipe or rippling of the

throat of a bend will make such a bend unacceptable for

installation.

All galvanised mild steel pipework shall be projected against

damage and corrosion prior to and during installation.

All horizontal services shall be laid to a slight fall also that the

system is self-draining to all low points, drain cocks and drain

plugs.

Where screwed joints are used, bushings or long screw

connections and backnuts will not be accepted.

The amount of flux and paste used in jointing shall be kept to a

minimum and all excess shall be removed.

Care shall be taken to ensure fittings are not excessively marked.

If in the opinion of the Contract Administrator any fittings or pipe

length is unacceptably marked, the Contractor shall replace the

condemned section with new material.

This section will be installed to the Contract Administrator's

satisfaction.

Piping when cut shall be carefully reamered out to restore the

bore and the Contractor shall allow for disconnecting and refixing

any joint the Contract Administrator may select to demonstrate

that the bore has been restored.

During the progress of the works, pipe ends shall be capped or

plugged; wood shavings or paper are not acceptable for this

purpose. Before any part of the Installation is commissioned, the

pipework shall be cleaned of any accumulated dirt and debris by

washing or blowing through the pipework at least twice. The

Contractor shall allow for dismantling the pipework at the bottom

of each riser to ensure that all debris is removed from the system.




Page 9 of 29

£ p

To collection:

All screwed joints shall be clean threaded and pulled up tightly.

No caulking shall be permitted.

Vertical lines shall be dropped plumb; all multiple lines shall be

parallel and must be spaced to permit coverings as specified

under the insulation clause of this Specification.

All black pipework and all welded joints shall be painted two coats

of red oxide after tests have been completed.

All flanged copper joints shall be made with corrugated full faced

rings.

All gas service pipework laid beneath the ground floor slab shall

have welded joints and where passing through foundations a mild

steel sleeve shall be provided. The pipes shall be laid in a fine fill

or sand to ensure that no load is applied to the pipe from the

structure.

4.1.07 MAINS WATER CONNECTION

Connection to the statutory supplies shall only be made by the

Contractor with the consent and approval of the Local Water

Authority.

4.1.08 ANCHORS AND SUPPORTS

The Contractor shall supply and erect all anchors and brackets

necessary to support and control the movement of the pipes.

Where there are more than two pipes installed next to each other,

the Contractor shall supply and install galvanised mild steel

channel or angle support. Pipework may be either supported by

the steel or hung from it using 'U' bolts or single ring clips.

Where services are grouped together and are supported from a

common channel, the spacing shall be as for the smallest

diameter service pipe.

Detailed drawings of the pipework supports shall be approved by

the Contract Administrator prior to fabrication.

For exposed services up to 50 mm bore, the following type of

brackets shall be used:




Page 10 of 29

£ p

To collection:

Black pipework: Black Japanned school board clips of

the screw on or build in pattern.

Galvanised pipework: Polished cast gunmetal school board

screw clips, build in or screw on pattern.

Copper pipework: Polished cast gunmetal school board

clips, build in or screw on pattern.

Stainless steel: Gunmetal or brass school board clips,

build in or screw on pattern.

All black mild steel pipework in floor ducts, chases, ceiling voids

and service shafts shall be welded. Flanged or screwed

connections shall be made at valves, items or plant and elsewhere

as specified.

For steel pipework, all pipe fittings 50 mm diameter, and below

where exposed may be screwed pattern to BS 143.

All steel pipework 65 mm and above, shall be flanged to Table D,

except for connections to items of plant where flanges to Table E

shall be used.

All copper and stainless steel pipework up to and including 25 mm

bore shall be assembled with capillary fittings. Fittings shall

comply with BS 864.

Copper and stainless steel pipework 37 mm bore and above shall

be assembled by capillary or approved compression fittings.

Stainless steel fittings shall be manufactured from non-

dezinctifiable alloys. All copper pipework 76 mm bore and above

shall be flanged, faced and drilled up BS 10, Table D.

Polythene pipework shall be assembled with compression fittings,

strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

For all piped services, union or flanged connections shall be

provided at adequate intervals to facilitate disconnection for

maintenance purposes.

All service connections to fixed points shall be made with an

approved union connector.




Page 11 of 29

£ p

To collection:

The Contractor shall provide between all galvanised and copper

pipework, connectors that will minimise electrolytic reaction

between the materials.

Hot pressed or duplex brass fittings will not be permitted.

Polythene tube shall not be laid less than 350 mm from any gas

main in the ground.

All water mains pipework which passes beneath the building

structure shall do so in a suitable sized conduit and shall be

installed in polythene tube and compression fittings.

Unless detailed otherwise on the drawings, all external services

pipework shall be run at a minimum of 1m below ground level.

SPACING OF SUPPORTS

TABLE OF MAXIMUM SPACINGS FOR PIPEWORK SUPPORTS

Nominal

Pipe Size

mm

Horizontal Spacing - Metres Vertical Spacings - Metres

Steel

or Iron

Pipes

PVC or

ABS

Pipes

Copper or

Stainless

Steel Pipes

Steel or

Iron Pipes

PVC or

ABS

Pipes

Copper or

Stainless

Steel

Pipes

15 1.8 0.8 1.2 2.4 1.2 1.8

20 2.4 0.8 1.2 3.0 1.2 1.8

25 2.4 0.9 1.5 3.0 1.3 2.4

32 2.4 1.0 1.8 3.0 1.5 3.0

40 2.4 1.1 1.8 3.7 1.6 3.0

50 2.4 1.8 3.7 3.0

65 3.0 2.4 4.6 3.7

80 3.0 2.4 4.6 3.7

100 3.0 2.4 4.6 3.7

125 3.7 3.0 5.5 3.7

150 4.5 3.7 5.5 3.7

200 6.0 - 8.5 -

250 6.5 - 9.0 -

300 7.0 - 10.0 -




Page 12 of 29

£ p

To collection:

4.1.09 VALVES AND STOPCOCKS

The Contractor shall install valves and stopcocks in the positions

indicated on the drawings, on the flow and return connections to

each branch circuit, at each item of apparatus and to each group

of sanitary fittings.

In addition to the isolating valves, regulating valves shall be

provided on the return connection of each branch circuit.

All valves up to and including 50 mm shall be screwed to BSPY,

valves 65 mm and above shall be flanged to BS 10, Table D.

All valves shall be of the non-rising stem pattern.

Ball valves to the water storage tanks shall be of the equilibrium

pattern complete with silencing tube. Ball valves shall be stamped

in accordance with the Local Authority requirements.

Gunmetal stopcocks to BS 1010 shall be used on all open circuit

system for pipe sizes up to and including 50 mm bore.

Pipework 65 mm bore and above shall be fitted with gunmetal

gate valves having flanged ends, faced and drilled in accordance

with BS 10, Table E.

All stopcocks installed in exposed positions shall be of the easy

clean pattern.

All brass work on cold water mains to be of the standard required

by the Water Board and be manufactured from non-dezinctifiable

alloys.

All gas cocks shall be lump head pattern in accordance with Local

Authority requirements and shall be complete with loose lever

handle or key.

All valves shall be manufactured by Hattersley Ormskirk Limited or

other equal and approved type or as detailed in the Specification.

Stopcock shall be manufactured by Frank Love or other equal and

approved type or as detailed in the Specification.




Page 13 of 29

£ p

To collection:

4.1.10 DRAINCOCKS

Local Authority approved pattern draincocks with loose lever

handle and loose unions for hose connections shall be supplied

and installed at all low points of the system and adjacent to valves

isolating sub-circuits, in order to permit the drainage of the whole

of part of the installation.

All draincocks shall comply with BS 2879, Type A.

4.1.11 AIR COCKS

Air cocks shall be installed at all high points of the installation to

facilitate complete venting of the pipework system. Loose keys

shall be provided with air cocks.

4.1.12 PIPELINE IDENTIFICATION

Pipeline identification banding shall be used to identify all

pipelines (insulated and un-insulated), concealed in ducts, voids

and spaces above false ceilings. It shall be of a self-adhesive

cellulose tape laminate with a layer of transparent ethyle cellulose

tape.

The contents of the pipeline shall be readily identified by an

adhesive band of the appropriate ground colour detailed in BS

1710 with an explanatory text approved by the Contract

Administrator, printed upon it in a contrasting colour detailing the

contents of the pipe.

All colour bands shall be 300 mm wide and spaced at approximate

centres. Where pipes are installed in under-floor ducts, colour

bands etc. shall only be provided where access covers occur.

4.1.13 VALVE LABELS

The Contractor shall supply and install labels for all boiler room

valves and each circuit control valve.

The labels shall be ivorine or similar with stamped or engraved

lettering and shall be not smaller than 75 mm x 50 mm and not

less the 2 mm thick.




Page 14 of 29

£ p

To collection:

4.1.14 WELDING

All welding is to be carried out in accordance with

recommendations contained in 'Recommended Practice' for Oxy-

Acetylene Welds in Mild Steel Pipelines for Pressures up to 250

psi and/or Temperatures up to 425 degrees Fahrenheit

(hereinafter referred to as the 'Recommended Practice') published

by the Association of Heating Ventilating and Domestic

Engineering Employers, Millbank House, 2 Great Portland Street,

London SW1.

All sif-bronze welding in copper pipelines shall be carried out in

accordance with BSI Standards. Only welding rods of 'Silfos' or

'Silbraloy' shall be used.

For all purposes of this Contract, the Contract Administrator will be

regarded as a 'Competent Authority' under Clause 219 of

Competent Authority as may be approved in writing by the Client.

The Contractor shall allow in his tender prices for the cutting out of

six welds at positions chosen by the Contract Administrator for his

inspection.

Should any of the welds prove to be defective, the Contractor will

be required to cut out and renew a portion or all of the completed

welds as directed by and to the satisfaction of the Contract

Administrator.

Only welders holding the Certificate of Competency issued by the

National Joint Industrial Council of this Organisation shall be

permitted to perform any welding on site. The names of such

welders shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator before

any welding is executed on site and the appropriate certificates

must be submitted for the approval of the Contract Administrator

at the same time. Their certificate will be returned after

inspection.

Each welder having completed a weld shall stamp the number of

his Certificate of Competency on the pipe adjacent to the weld.

Any welding which is found to have been performed by a welder

whose name has not been previously approved, shall be removed

and the pipeline re-welded by an approved welder at the expense

of the Contractor.




Page 15 of 29

£ p

To collection:

4.1.15 FIRE HYDRANTS

Hydrants shall be mounted onto duct foot hydrant bends the base

of which shall be cast into the hydrant pit after test. 80mm x 80mm

hydrant bends may be used when coupling to an 80mm main, but

100mm x 80mm hydrant bends shall be provided in all other

cases.

The level of all hydrants shall be arranged so that the top of the

stem adaptor shall be not less than 50mm below finished ground

level and not more than 200mm. Any adjustment of level to meet

this requirement shall be made by the introduction of a double

flanged make up piece between the hydrant bend and the base of

the hydrant proper.

Sluice Valve & Hydrant Surface Boxes

The setting in position and supervision of the installation of the

requisite sluice valve surface boxes and hydrant surface boxes for

all external valves and hydrants shall be carried out in accordance

with Contract Procedures.

Sluice valve and hydrant boxes shall, without exception, be of

extra heavy quality “Class A Road Quality” designed to withstand

a safe central point load of 5,000kg.

Leading dimensions of surface boxes shall be approximately as

follows:-

Hydrant Boxes Sluice Valve Boxes

Type Rectangular Circular

Cover Type Chained Captive Hinged Captive

Clear Opening 275mm x 125mm 100mm

Bottom Flange Overall 525mm x 375mm 250mm

Minimum Depth 150mm 25mm

Fire hydrants surface boxes shall have covers with FH cast in

letters.

Sluice valve surface boxes shall have covers with W cast in

letters.

Sluice valve covers shall be orientated in such a manner that a

person reading the letter “W” shall be facing in the direction of flow

of the water in the main beneath.




Page 16 of 29

£ p

To collection:

The construction of hydrant pits and sluice valve pits will be by

independent contract but the Engineering Services Contractor

shall set out positions, and supply typical details incorporating

leading dimensions of all such pits, and supervise the setting of

the surface boxes.

Hydrant Markers & Hydrant Plates & Sluice Valve Markers

Each fire hydrant and each sluice valve shall be provided with an

approved indicator post, with BS 3251 Cast Alloy “Hydrant” or

“Water” plate with “main diameter” and “location” numerals fitted.

The location of all hydrant and sluice valve markers shall be in

accordance with the Contract Procedures.

4.1.16 THERMAL INSULATION

a) Boiler House and Plant Room

All plant distribution headers and pipework. Calorifiers,

cylinders, valves, fittings and flue piping.

b) Heating

All mains and distribution pipework in boiler house and plant

chambers, in all trenches and ducts, basements and garages,

in all vertical shafts, false ceilings, tank rooms and in all

positions where not forming useful heating surface. The

Mechanical Contractor shall also insulate the full run of all cold

feeds and open vents and expansion tanks.

c) Hot Water Services Installation

All mains and circulating pipework in boiler house, plant

chambers, trenches and ducts, basements and garages, in all

roof spaces, false ceilings, the run of all cold feeds and open

vents.

d) Cold and Drinking Water Services

All mains and distribution pipework in tank rooms, vertical

shafts, false ceilings, in all trenches, ducts in plant chambers,

boiler house, external or roof distribution mains, all storage

tanks and headers and the full run of all vents.




Page 17 of 29

£ p

To collection:

In Boiler Houses and Plant Rooms

The insulation shall be pre-formed rigid sections or slabs,

protected and finished by fabricated polished hammered

aluminium casings.

The pre-formed rigid insulation outside surface shall be smooth,

unbroken, uniform and fir. Outer coverings shall not come into

contact with pipework and attachments.

Fabricated aluminium casings shall be not less than the following:

(Ref: CO2 Thermal Insulation)

1.2 mm thick on vessels, flue piping and ducting, 0.9 mm if needed.

0.7 mm thick on pipework of 150 mm diameter over the insulation.

Heat bridges between the hot surfaces and the casings will not be

allowed.

The casings and insulation shall be detachable at valves, flanges

and other bolted or union connections.

Self-setting cement finishes shall be painted with two coats of

good quality heat resistant paint by the Contractor.

Calorifiers in Boiler Houses and Plant Rooms

The insulation shall be pre-formed rigid sections or slabs

protected by wire mesh reinforcement protected and finished by

fabricated polished hammered aluminium casings.

The minimum thickness shall be 75 mm.

Particular care shall be taken with finish of the insulation at pipe

connection joints etc. to ensure ready disconnection or

replacement of instruments etc.

Domestic Hot Water Cylinders

Where domestic hot water cylinders are used these shall be

insulated with an approved domestic pattern jacket type insulation

with a minimum thickness of 75 mm.

The jacket shall be securely fixed to the cylinder with non-ferrous

bands leaving no surface of the cylinder exposed.




Page 18 of 29

£ p

To collection:

Buried Pipework

Buried heating mains shall be insulated as specified elsewhere in

accordance with specialist suppliers' and installers' instructions.

Other buried services shall be insulated with special applications

as elsewhere specified in these documents.

Concealed Heating and HWS Pipes in Buildings

The insulation shall be rigid glass fibre or mineral wood pre-

formed sections of thickness as elsewhere specified.

The sections shall be enclosed in rot-proof canvas having an

overlap of 25 mm, which shall be securely pasted and the

insulation shall be secured with metal bands at 300 mm centres.

Visible Heating, HWS and CW Pipework in Buildings

The insulation shall be rigid glass fibre or mineral wood pre-

formed sections of thickness as elsewhere specified.

The sections shall be enclosed in rot-proof canvas having an

overlap of 25 mm, which shall be securely pasted and the

insulation shall be secured with metal bands at 300 mm centres.

The whole shall be finished with white or light grey self colour

rolled rigid PVC 0.020" thick with inherent coil characteristics.

Longitudinal seams secured with nylon rivets and PVC bands to

cover joints between sections. (Isogenopac finish).

Heating, HWS and CW Pipes Exposed to Weather

The insulation shall be rigid glass fibre or mineral wool pre-formed

sections securely fixed, enclosed in rot-proof canvas having an

overlap of 25 mm.

The outer coverings shall be weatherproof and applied to all the

pipework and the finish shall be one of the following:

1) Waterproof vapour permeable plastic coatings, brush or spray

applied, and reinforced with canvas or glass fibre cloth.

2) Roofing felt, sealed with adhesive with overlaps of at least 30

mm, wrapped with galvanised wire netting 25 mm x 1 mm

thick.




Page 19 of 29

£ p

To collection:

The whole to be painted by the Contractor with two coats of

black bitumastic paint.

3) External grade rigid plastic of 0.35 mm thickness minimum

lapped and sealed by solvent welds or adhesive.

4) Bitumen impregnated fabric sealed by the application of heat

or cold welding.

The Contractor shall state at the time of tendering which of the

above methods is included in the Tender.

This clause relates to pipework exposed in open areas or in ducts

external to buildings.

Pipework Supports within Insulation

The insulation and outer coverings shall be continuous at

pipework supports and shall not be punctured by the supports.

The insulation material at the supports shall be of sufficient

density to take the loads transmitted to the supports.

The loading bearing insulation shall be extended on each side of

the support.

Entries to Buildings

At entries to buildings, the weatherproofed insulation shall extend

not less than 100 mm beyond the inner face of the wall and shall

be sealed to the entire satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.

Flanges, Expansion Joints and Anchor Points

The thermal insulation shall be carefully finished at these

components to ensure that the insulation is sealed against the

ingress of water.

Valves and Fittings

1) General

All valves, tees, bends and fittings are to be insulated to the

same standard as the pipework to which they are connected.




Page 20 of 29

£ p

To collection:

2) Heating Valves and Flanges in Plant Room

Valves and flanges shall be fitted with removable aluminium

boxes, lined with insulation, complete with quick release

fasteners and vapour sealing.

Cold Water Tanks

Cold water storage tanks and feed and expansion tanks shall be

insulated with 25 mm thick polystyrene slabs securely fixed and

super coated with 'cold set' 7 mm minimum armouring compound,

towelled smooth and finished two coats of good quality paint.

Testing

Before the application of thermal insulation to a section of the

installation, the section shall be tested, cleaned etc. as elsewhere

specified.

Physical Characteristics of Insulating Materials

Insulation shall be in accordance with the following British

Standards with regard to scope, definitions, physical

characteristics, method of application and tests for fitness.

i) BS 1304 Ready-to-Fit Thermal Insulation Materials

ii) BS 1334 Pre-formed Thermal Insulation Materials

iii) BS 1588 Thermal Insulating Materials (Temperature range 93-

232 degrees Centigrade).

Where an alternative type of insulation is proposed in accordance

with the General Conditions, apart from satisfying the

requirements of the BS regarding thermal conductivity, thickness

etc. the Contractor shall also equate the mechanical properties of

the proposed insulation. All polystyrene is to be of the self fire

extinguishing type.

To ensure that the correct thickness has been applied, the

Contractor shall, if required by the Contract Administrator, cut one

of the sections from the finished covering, without charge.

If any defects are revealed, the Contractor shall at his own

expense, remove the whole of the covering and provide and fix

new insulation, to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.




Page 21 of 29

£ p

To collection:

Particular attention shall be given to the finished appearance of all

thermal insulation, which must present a neat symmetrical

appearance, running true in line with pipe layouts.

Any rough irregular or badly finished surfaces shall be stripped

down and re-lagged to the satisfaction of the Contract

Administrator.

Thickness of Insulations

Insulation shall be applied to thickness as follows:-

Cold Water Mains etc.

15-40 mm NB 25 mm thick (minimum)

Over 40 mm NB 30 mm thick (minimum)

Hot Water and LPHW Heating etc.

15 - 25 mm NB 32 mm thick

25 - 80 mm NB 44 mm thick

The above thickness are based on insulation having a declared

thermal conductivity of 0.029 - 0.043 watts per metre/degree C.

Painting and Identification

The Contractor shall provide colour identification to the pipework

to the requirements of BS 1710 or alternative code as may be

later agreed.

All thermal insulated surfaces where exposed shall be painted and

if not detailed elsewhere, shall be one coat heat resisting primer

and two coats approved colour heat resisting best quality high

gloss paint.

The heat resisting paint shall be suitable for use at the particular

surface temperature of the insulation and the final coat being also

the identification colour.

On all pipework protected from weather or painted with bituminous

paint, the identification shall be by the use of aluminium metal

bands and fixed at 3.6 m centres.




Page 22 of 29

£ p

To collection:

Absorbent materials shall be given a preliminary priming coat.

Where thermal insulation is to be painted to conform to internal

decorations, aluminium bands shall be used for identification

purposes.

The Contractor shall allow in his Tender for all bare metal surfaces

in boiler room and plant rooms to be given two good coats black

paint, moisture resistant.

4.1.17 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

The Contractor shall allow for the following testing and

commissioning procedures in addition to any further proving tests

required by the Contract Administrator.

The Contractor shall ensure that the systems have been

thoroughly flushed out to remove any debris before informing the

Contract Administrator that the site or any particular sections of

the work are ready for testing.

Test Procedures

a) On completion of each phase of each heating and hot and

cold water supply installation, the entire system shall be

flushed out with cold water and then subjected to a hydraulic

test of 2 time the working pressure, or 3.0 bar whichever is the

greater, for a period of not less than 20 minutes. All welds

shall be hammer tested and remain firm. A normal working

test shall then be carried out with the plant operating at its

design working pressure and/or temperatures. During this test

all necessary adjustments and regulation of valves shall be

effected.

b) Where possible the system pressure tests shall be carried out

before the application of thermal insulation, but where this

would prejudice the completion of the installation, the sections

concerned shall be individually tested before the application of

the insulation. The Contractor will in any case be required to

carry out a complete test of the installation in the presence of

the Contract Administrator to ascertain that the whole of the

installation is in working order.




Page 23 of 29

£ p

To collection:

c) Any defects of workmanship, materials, performance,

maladjustments or other irregularities which become apparent

during the tests shall be rectified by the Contractor and the

tests repeated at the Contractor's expense to the satisfaction

of the Contract Administrator.

d) The fact that any particular portion of the work had been

tested and passed will not relieve the Contractor of his

obligation to hand over the whole of the installation in perfect

condition.

e) Equipment specified to comply with BS shall be subject to

such tests at works as are provided for in the BS.

f) The system generally shall be regulated in accordance with

the Institute of Heating and Ventilating Engineer's circulation

tests procedures. Details of design temperatures at the

various points of the system will subsequently be given to the

Contractor and the circulation test procedures shall then be

adopted for regulations.

g) Installations or section thereof which will be embodied in the

structure or concealed in permanently sealed ducts, trenches

etc. shall in addition to the above specified tests, be

individually tested as they are laid and before being embodied

or concealed.

h) The Contractor shall supply all labour, apparatus and

instruments necessary for the prescribed tests. The accuracy

of the Contractor's instruments shall be demonstrated if

required.

i) The Contract Administrator or his representative shall be

permitted to witness such inspections and tests for which the

Contractor shall given seven days notice to the Contract

Administrator.

j) The Contractor shall make provision for air release when filling

up for hydraulic tests.

k) Triplicate copies of test certificates covering all work tests and

tests carried out on completed installation are to be forward to

the Contract Administrator.




Page 24 of 29

£ p

To collection:

Draw Off Tests

Hot water systems and cold water down service system shall be

subject to flow tests at all draw off points with 25% of the fittings

operating at one time.

Soil, Water and Vent Pipes Tests

All soils, wastes and vent pipes shall be subject to an air test of 50

mm wg maintained for 15 minutes in the presence of the Contract

Administrator, Public Health Inspector or Building Inspector.

Commissioning

The Contractor shall allow for each installation to be fully

commissioned by competent specialist engineers familiar with the

adjustment and settings of all plant and equipment.

The installation shall not be certified as complete until the results

of the commissioning have been recorded in an approved manner

by the Contractor and presented to the Contract Administrator.

The Contract Administrator may carry out random or complete

check of all data provided and the Contractor shall allow for such

attendance as may be necessary in this event.

Testing of Electrical Equipment and Wiring

For each item of electrical equipment provided by him, the

Contractor shall supply a test certificate. The certificate shall

guarantee that the electrical installation or electrical equipment

has been fabricated, inspected and satisfactorily tested in

accordance with the current edition of the IEE Regulations for the

Electrical Equipment of Buildings and the appropriate British

Standard(s).

4.1.18 STERILIZATION OF WATER SYSTEMS

All the water storage and distribution systems with the exception

of the LPHW heating and the primary heating circuit shall be

sterilised after testing in the following manner.

Before sterilisation all pipework and storage cisterns should be

flushed out to remove dirty water, debris etc.




Page 25 of 29

£ p

To collection:

The main storage cisterns should be filled with water and sufficient

chemicals should be used to give the water a dose of 50

milligrams of chlorine per litre of water. If proprietary brands of

chemicals are used the proportion should be as instructed by the

suppliers.

When the cisterns are full the valve in the mains supply

(communication) pipes should be closed. Taps in each building

should be opened, working progressively away from the storage

cistern or cisterns serving the building until chlorinated water (as

detected by litmus paper test) is delivered to each tap, which

should then be closed.

The storage cisterns should then be topped with water by opening

the valve in the mains supply pipe. Further chlorinating reagent

should be added in the recommended proportions while the

cisterns are filling.

The storage cisterns and pipes should then remain charged for a

period of not less than 3 hours, after which a test should be made

for residual chlorine. If none is found the sterilisation will have to

be carried out again. Finally, the cisterns and pipework should be

thoroughly flushed out before any water is used for domestic

purpose.

Cases have arisen where sterilisation has been completed but

commissioning of the system has not immediately followed and

subsequent contamination has developed. Services which have

been filled with chlorinated water should remain in a charged state

until final commissioning can be carried out, when a chlorine test

should be made. If no residual chlorine is apparent then the

process of sterilisation should be repeated. If delay is domestic

use, the sterilisation should be deferred until just prior to the

system being put into service.

On completion and before handover, samples from the furthest

draw off point are to be taken from the down water service and the

domestic hot water service.

Tests and results shall be recorded for handover to client.

Drawings shall be provided to indicate the sections of pipework

and system that have been chlorinated and tested.




Page 26 of 29

£ p

To collection:

4.1.19 BURIED PIPEWORK

Shall be in accordance with IGE/UP/2 (Section 8 in particular).

Buried pipework shall be in the following materials as specified in

Part 3.

BURIED PIPEWORK – STEEL TUBE

Pipe Material (15-

50mm)

Black heavy weight tube to BS 1387 – double

wrapped with self-adhesive plastic tape or

petroleum impregnated woven cloth type.

Wrapping shall only take place after testing has

been successfully carried out.

Pipe Material (over

150mm)

Black tube to BS 3601 – double wrapped with

self-adhesive plastic tape or petroleum

impregnated woven cloth type. Wrapping shall

only take place after testing has been

successfully carried out.

Screwed Fittings Black MI to BS 43 (15-50mm only).

Welded Fittings Black to BS 1965: Part 1 and BS 10, 4504 and

1560.

Screwed Jointing 15-50mm – PTFE thread sealant tape to BS

6974 and BS 5292/BS 6956.

Over 50mm – PTFE tape as above when

Manufacturer has declared he can meet IGE

test requirements.

(PTFE tape shall be wound on a pool marked

with the statement “Satisfies IGE/UP/2” and with

the wrapping technique and size of pipe on

which it is known to be suitable.)

Welding 2 bolt split band clip.

Pipework shall be painted before wrapping.

BURIED PIPEWORK - COPPER

Pipe Material (15-

28mm)

Light gauge copper tube to BS 2871: Part 1:

Table Y, annealed condition and supplied in

coils, and factory sheathed in yellow ochre

polyethylene coating.




Page 27 of 29

£ p

To collection:

BURIED PIPEWORK - COPPER

(Use strictly limited to an “all copper” gas

installation.)

Fittings Copper alloy or gunmetal integral solder ring

capillary fittings to BS 864: Part 2 or end feed

fittings to BS 864: Part 2. An adhesive polythene

or PVC waterproof tape shall be applied to the

fitting and for a distance of 225mm either side of

the fitting to maintain the protective coating of

the tube – after satisfactory pressure testing has

been carried out.

On Site Bending Bending of tube to a radius of not less than that

of the coil may be undertaken without using

equipment incorporating formers and guides.

Jointing To be carried out strictly in accordance with

Manufacturer’s instructions of the fitting and

jointing material, and comply with the following:-

Capillary solder ring and end feed fittings shall

be used in conjunction with Fry’s Powerflow or

Laco Regular Flux together with lead free

solder.

Fittings having threads screwed to BS 21 to be

made using PTFE thread sealant tape to BS

6974 and BS 5292/BS 6956 wound on a spool

marked with the statement “satisfies IGE/UP/2”.

BURIED PIPEWORK – POLYETHYLENE (MDPE)

Pipe Material Polythethylene pipe – yellow – to IGE

specification to BS 7281.

Fittings Compression couplings complying with British

Gas specification BGS/PS/PL3 or BS 5114.

Electrofusion fittings meeting requirements of

BG specification solvent welding shall not be

used.

Welding Butt fusion jointing employing machine complete

with clamps and hydraulic activation unit.

Jointing To be carried out strictly in accordance with

Manufacturer’s instructions of the fitting and

welding process.




Page 28 of 29

£ p

To collection:

PE pipework shall not be used within buildings.

Corrosion Protection of Buried Pipes

Pipework which is otherwise liable to corrode shall be protected

appropriately.

Tapes of the self-adhesive plastic or petroleum impregnated

woven cloth types are considered suitable for wrapping pipes.

Where a tape wrapping is employed, a minimum overlap of 50%

shall be provided.

Note:

Appropriate methods include the application of self-adhesive

plastic tapes, petroleum impregnated woven cloth tapes etc. The

latter may need to be over wrapped with a waterproof covering of

PVC tape.

Where steel pipework is laid in corrosive soils, the excavation

shall be backfilled around the pipework with a passive material,

e.g. Dry washed sand or crushed limestone. In addition, such

pipework shall be protected by tape wrapping of loose

polyethylene sleeving.

For steel pipework, it is advisable to consider the use of cathodic

protection, information being provided in BS 7361: Part 1.

The gas transportation company shall be consulted before

cathodic protection is applied.

PE pipework shall not be laid in chemically corrosive soil, such as

those containing tars, oils, plating, dry cleaning fluids, etc, nor

should it be exposed to temperature extremes encountered, for

example, near a steam main.




Page 29 of 29

£ p

To collection:

4.1.20 INFORMATION AND ‘AS INSTALLED’ DRAWINGS

1. Upon completion of the project the Mechanical Contractor

shall supply an Operation and Maintenance Manual and "As

Installed" drawings of the project.

2. A draft of the documents shall be handed over by the

Contractor six weeks before practical completion and two

copies of the final documents shall be handed over two weeks

before practical completion, along with 1 additional copy on

CD.

3. The Manual shall include Health and Safety Information,

Adequate instructions for operating and maintaining the

system, copies of all relevant test and inspection certificates,

and copies of manufacturers’ literature.

4. As installed drawings shall be in the form of CD compatible

with AutoCAD 2000 or later, accompanied by one paper print

per drawing. The contractor may be required to supply

additional drawings as requested by the Contract

Administrator. These drawings are over and above drawings

supplied as part of O&M manuals.




Page 1 of 33

SECTION 4.2

MECHANICAL SERVICES

PARTICULAR WORKS




Page 2 of 33

Contents

4.2.1 PRELIMINARIES........................................................................................ 4 4.2.1.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................ 4 4.2.1.2 THE ENGINEERING WORKS .................................................................... 4 4.2.1.3 EXTENT OF WORK ................................................................................... 5 4.2.1.4 REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS .......................................................... 5 4.2.1.5 DESIGN CRITERIA .................................................................................... 6 4.2.1.6 SITE VISIT.................................................................................................. 7 4.2.1.7 METHOD OF SUPPORT ............................................................................ 7 4.2.1.8 APPROXIMATE POSITIONS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS ............................ 8 4.2.1.9 PLANNED MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS ............................................... 8 4.2.1.10 REDUNDANT SERVICES .......................................................................... 8 4.2.1.11 INSPECTION AND TESTING ..................................................................... 8 4.2.1.12 COMPLIANCE WITH C.D.M. REGULATIONS ........................................... 9 4.2.2 DESCRIPTION OF SERVICES .................................................................. 9 4.2.2.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 9 4.2.2.2 System Interfaces ..................................................................................... 10 4.2.2.3 Services Evaluation Works ...................................................................... 11 4.2.2.4 Enabling Works ........................................................................................ 11 4.2.3 COMFORT COOLING ................................................................................ 11 4.2.3.1 Split System Comfort Cooling ................................................................. 12 4.2.3.2 Installation Requirements ........................................................................ 13 4.2.3.3 Condensate Removal ............................................................................... 13 4.2.3.4 Commissioning, Testing and Setting to Work ........................................ 13 4.2.4 DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER SERVICES .................................... 14 4.2.4.1 Pipework and Fittings............................................................................... 14 4.2.4.2 Domestic Hot Water Calorifier ................................................................. 15 4.2.4.3 DHWS Secondary Circulation Pump ....................................................... 16 4.2.4.4 Thermostatic Mixing Valves ..................................................................... 16 4.2.4.5 Cleaning and Flushing ............................................................................. 16 4.2.4.6 Test and Commission .............................................................................. 17 4.2.4.7 Water Regulations .................................................................................... 17 4.2.5 VENTILATION ............................................................................................ 17 4.2.5.1 Extract Fans .............................................................................................. 18 4.2.5.8 Ductwork ................................................................................................... 19 4.2.5.9 Ductwork Cleaning and Cleaning Access Panels .................................. 20 4.2.5.10 Supply and Extract Grilles ....................................................................... 21 4.2.5.11 Ductwork Fire Dampers ............................................................................ 21 4.2.5.12 Transfer Grilles ......................................................................................... 21 4.2.5.13 Roof Terminals ......................................................................................... 22 4.2.6 LTHW HEATING ........................................................................................ 22 4.2.6.1 Pipework and Fittings............................................................................... 22 4.2.6.2 LTHW Boilers ............................................................................................ 23 4.2.6.3 Heat Emitters ............................................................................................ 23 4.2.6.4 Electric Heaters ........................................................................................ 24 4.2.6.5 LPHW Water Treatment ............................................................................ 24 4.2.6.6 Commissioning ......................................................................................... 25 4.2.7 CONTROLS AND POWER ........................................................................ 25 4.2.8 NATURAL GAS SERVICES ....................................................................... 27




Page 3 of 33

4.2.8.1 Pipework and Fittings............................................................................... 28 4.2.8.2 Testing and Commissioning .................................................................... 29 4.2.10 BUILDERS WORK ..................................................................................... 30 4.2.11 ELECTRICAL SERVICES ASSOCIATED WITH MECHANICAL PLANT .. 30 4.2.11.1 General ...................................................................................................... 30 4.2.11.2 Standards .................................................................................................. 31 4.2.12 INSPECTION AND TESTING ..................................................................... 31 4.2.13 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ........................................ 32 4.2.14 SCHEDULE OF RATES ............................................................................. 33 4.2.15 CONTINGENCIES ...................................................................................... 33




Page 4 of 33

£ p

To collection:

4.2.1 PRELIMINARIES 4.2.1.1 INTRODUCTION

This particular specification gives, when read with the appropriate

drawings and contract documents, details of the mechanical

services to be provided in full by the mechanical contractor.

The existing mechanical services shall be removed as indicated

on the strip out drawings. New plant and equipment shall be

installed as shown on the drawings and described within this

specification.

The contractor shall observe equipment lead in times when

preparing his tender, and if successful, order equipment to suit the

construction programme.

The contractor shall note that the existing building may contain

asbestos, and shall review the asbestos register prior to works.

The contractor shall note that floor to ceiling heights may be

significant, consequentially all necessary equipment for safe

working shall be included for.

Any builders work holes will need to be communicated with the

structural engineer and contract administrator.

4.2.1.2 THE ENGINEERING WORKS

The mechanical and electrical services works shall include but not

limited to the supply, delivery, installation, testing and

commissioning of all materials, equipment and labour necessary

to provide a complete installation. The mechanical services

installations shall include, but not be limited to, the following new

complete systems:-

a) Isolating, stripping out of existing services to suit

refurbishment

b) Multi-split space conditioning systems, plus pipework and

ancillaries etc.

c) Local extract systems, plus ductwork

d) New domestic hot water heater ancillaries

e) Domestic water pipework and fittings

f) Pipework thermal insulation

g) Commissioning of all mechanical services




Page 5 of 33

£ p

To collection:

4.2.1.3 EXTENT OF WORK

The Contractor shall include for the supply of all goods, materials

and labour to form a complete, working and tested installation.

The Contractor is required to bring to the notice of the Contract

Administrator, before submitting his tender, any errors or

omissions which he may find in this specification and/or the tender

drawings which would materially affect his capacity to comply with

that section of works. No claims will be entertained for any errors

or omissions not so notified.

Each system supplied as part of this contract, shall be complete

and left in full operation condition and are deemed to be in a

satisfactory condition by the Contract Administrator.

4.2.1.4 REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS

All materials and work carried out will be in accordance with the

standards specified and will conform to:

1) BS 7671: 2008(2011) Requirements for Electrical

Installations – IEE Wiring Regulations 17th Edition

(hereinafter referred to as the IEE Regulations) including any

amendments, as and when issued.

2) Building Regulations.

3) Electricity Safety, Quality and Continuity Regulations 2002.

4) Factories Act including Electricity (Factories Act) Special

Regulations, 1961.

5) Requirements of the Health and Safety Executive under the

Health and Safety at Work Act.

6) Requirements of the Regional Electricity Company.

7) Relevant British Standard Specification and/or Codes of

Practice for materials and equipment and method of

installation.

8) Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers Codes

and Technical Memoranda.




Page 6 of 33

£ p

To collection:

9) The Electricity at Work Regulations, 1989.

10) The Control of Pollution Act.

11) COSHH (Control of Substances Hazardous to Health)

Regulations.

12) Requirements of the Local Authorities.

13) The Water Supply (Water Fittings) Regulations 1999

14) BS6700 Design, installation, testing and maintenance of

services supplying water for domestic use within buildings

and their curtilages: specification

15) HSE Approved Code of Practice document ”Legionnaires

Disease – The control of Legionella bacteria in water

systems (L8)”

The Contractor shall ensure that he is familiar with the

requirements of the documents and that the tender price shall

include for the necessary works to comply.

This specification shall be read in conjunction with the following

documents issued for tender purposes:

Building, Mechanical and Electrical Drawings:

It is essential that tenderers view the contract documents,

drawings, standard specification in order to understand the

complexity of the building and the implications of installing

services within the structure.

4.2.1.5 DESIGN CRITERIA

The following design criteria are applicable:

Winter External temperature: minus 4°C dry bulb, saturated

Summer External condition: 28°C dry bulb

Heating and Cooling:

Direct expansion R410A refrigerant.

LPHW Heating:

80°C / 70°C Flow & Return




Page 7 of 33

£ p

To collection:

Domestic Water:

DHWS flow temperature: Not less than 60°C

DHWS return temperature: Not less than 55°C

Cold water service storage/distribution temperature: not more than

20°C

For Patient accessible areas and all basins:

Maximum permissible domestic hot water delivery temperature:

41°C (applies to all wash hand basins)

Where uncontrolled hot water is provided e.g. tea point sinks, the

contractor shall install “Caution Very Hot Water” warning signs.

4.2.1.6 SITE VISIT

The Contractor shall visit site, by prior arrangement with the

Contract Administrator to familiarise himself with the nature of the

site and the potential difficulties of site access for deliveries.

Subject to the written approval of the Contract Administrator, the

Contractor may employ alternative equipment provided that the

quality and performance of the alternative is in no way inferior to

that named in the specification or on the drawings. The tender,

however must be based on the specified equipment.

A supplementary list may be returned with the tender detailing

alternatives and any price adjustment that are applicable.

The Contractor shall submit a list of proposed manufacturers or

equipment to the Contract Administrator for his approval before

purchasing or installing the same.

4.2.1.7 METHOD OF SUPPORT

The Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Contract

Administrator for all proposed methods of supporting pipes, ducts

and items of mechanical plant and equipment from the structure.

Where it is proposed to manufacture purpose-made supports, the

Contractor shall submit a "working drawing" to the Contract

Administrator, for his written approval, before purchase or

manufacture of any of the components concerned.




Page 8 of 33

£ p

To collection:

The Contractor should note that unless specifically stated

otherwise, there will be no drilling of steelwork permitted.

4.2.1.8 APPROXIMATE POSITIONS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS

The positions shown on the drawings of all mechanical & electrical

items forming part of the installation are approximate for tender

purposes only.

The final positions of all items of equipment, including the routing

of pipe, duct and cable systems shall be agreed on site with the

Contract Administrator and detailed on the Contractor's working

drawing before any work is carried out. The contractor shall

produce his own working drawings and submit to the engineer for

approval prior to commencing work or ordering materials or plant.

4.2.1.9 PLANNED MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS

The Contractor shall provide a complete schedule of planned

maintenance documents for all mechanical items of equipment

and systems.

Planned maintenance sheets shall be completed for the particular

installation, and its component parts, and includes commissioning

performance details and measurements.

Specimens of maintenance and operating documents in draft form

shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator for his approval

before the production of the printed copy.

4.2.1.10 REDUNDANT SERVICES

Any services that becomes redundant as parts of the works are to

be removed from site and disposed of, as far as practical.

4.2.1.11 INSPECTION AND TESTING

The contractor shall test the mechanical installation formed as a

consequence of these works in full accordance with the

requirements of this specification. Test certificates as required

shall be submitted and included in the manuals. In addition a full

programme of independent inspection of tests of the installation




Page 9 of 33

£ p

To collection:

will be carried out for which the mechanical & electrical services

contractors shall provide attendance.

4.2.1.12 COMPLIANCE WITH C.D.M. REGULATIONS

The Contractor shall allow all necessary compliance with the

regulations that will involve submitting the following information.

1) Provide information for the health and safety plan about

risks to health and safety arising from their work and the

steps they will take to control and manage the risks.

2) Manage their work so that they comply with the rules of the

health and safety plan.

3) Provide information for the health and safety file, and about

injuries, dangerous occurrences and ill health.

4) Provide information for their employees.

The Contractor shall submit confirmation of the above when

submitting their tender.

4.2.2 DESCRIPTION OF SERVICES

4.2.2.1 Introduction

This Mechanical Services specification and associated design

drawings describe the installations for the contract refurbishment

works for the proposed mechanical services installations.

This section gives an introduction and overview of the services

works required for the mechanical services. Specific requirements

are detailed in the following sections.

The mechanical services installation shall include but not be

limited to the following elements of work:

Stripping out of existing services

Develop the design for the works indicated on the drawings

and described in this specification

Production of working drawings for approval

Install new variable refrigerant flow direct expansion systems

into the classrooms and offices.




Page 10 of 33

£ p

To collection:

Service & renew the existing domestic water services plant,

pipework and system components as shown on the drawings.

Install new domestic water services pipework and outlets as

shown on the drawings

Service & renew the existing LTHW Boiler plant, pipework and

system components as shown on the drawings

Install new LTHW heating services pipework and heat emitters

as shown on the drawings

Install new supply and extract ventilation system, including

new ductwork and grilles, duct cleaning access panels,

thermal insulation

Install ductwork fire and smoke dampers

Works to existing natural gas system

Install all electrical services associated with the mechanical

installation including power supplies, power and control field

wiring.

Install new pipework and ductwork thermal insulation and

labelling. All pipework and ductwork installed externally to be

fully weatherproofed.

Provide all necessary scaffolding and lifting equipment to allow

safe ductwork, pipework, thermal insulation and plant

installations

Builders work in connection with services

Make good any new holes and provide all builders work

necessary for the new mechanical services installations

Fire stopping to suit mechanical services installations

Provide O& M manuals and record drawings

Commissioning, testing and setting to work

Client demonstration of mechanical systems, including BMS

Attendance for witnessing of mechanical installations

The drawings indicate the design intent and have been co-

ordinated as far as possible with the record information available

and non-intrusive surveys. The contractor shall produce his own

working drawings prior to commencing works. The contractor shall

be deemed to have included for all items required to make

complete and operational systems whether those items are

specifically mentioned within this tender document and drawings

or not.

4.2.2.2 System Interfaces

The Mechanical Services Contractor shall include all necessary

interfaces with other works contractors to enable complete and




Page 11 of 33

£ p

To collection:

fully operational systems in accordance with the requirements of

this and associated specifications.

This shall include, but not be limited to the following items:

Power supply requirements for all mechanical plant including

final locations of spurs, isolators, etc. shall be provided to the

electrical contractor.

Builder’s work in connection with the mechanical services

installation shall be provided and agreed with the main

contractor.

Fire alarm and detection system interlocks with the

existing/new building systems.

Control and Monitoring of all plant and equipment

4.2.2.3 Services Evaluation Works

The Mechanical Services Contractor shall allow two days to

complete any existing services testing required. The mechanical

contractor shall ensure that the connection to the existing services

has been allowed for to complete the works described.


Gas availability and Water pressure

Asbestos surveys to work areas (note that these extend well

beyond main building works areas)

4.2.2.4 Enabling Works

The Mechanical Services Contractor shall include all necessary

enabling or temporary services works to enable complete and fully

operational systems in accordance with the requirements of this

and associated specifications.


Alterations to site gas systems

Alterations to site water systems

Alterations to site heating systems

4.2.3 COMFORT COOLING

This section deals with the comfort cooling plant and equipment to be provided by the installer as part of the mechanical services.




Page 12 of 33

£ p

To collection:

All builders work in connection with the cooling plant installation are to

be provided, including builders work holes through roofs, walls, floors,

ceilings, fixings brackets and supports, making good, etc.

The contractor shall include for all crainage, lifting equipment to

transport the new equipment into the final installation positions.

All works to comfort cooling/refrigeration systems shall be

carried out by qualified personnel in accordance with current F-

Gas Regulations. Release of refrigerants to atmosphere is

strictly prohibited.

4.2.3.1 Split System Comfort Cooling

The contractor shall supply and install individual split coil heating

and cooling systems, as manufactured by Mitsubishi. The

equipment shall be as tabled below.

Individual Split Coil Heat Pumps

Ref. Location Type Req’d

Cooling

(kW)

Req’d

Heating

(kW)

Model Accessories

AC1 Building

Exterior Outdoor Unit 6.678 4.215

MXZ-

4D83VA

Wall mounting

brackets

AC2 Building

Exterior Outdoor Unit 4.070 N/A

MXZ-

2D53VA

Wall mounting

brackets

FC1 Ground Floor

Reception

Wall Mounted

Unit 3.818 1.560

PKFY-

P40VHM-E

Hard Wired

Wall Mounted

Controller

FC2 First Floor

Office Wall Mounted

Unit 2.860 2.655

PKFY-

P32VHM-E

Hard Wired

Wall Mounted

Controller

FC3 First Floor

Server Room

Wall Mounted

Unit 4.070 N/A

PKFY-

P40VHM-E

Hard Wired

Wall Mounted

Controller

All Hard wired controlers shall be located close to the room’s light

switch panel. Height and positioning to be DDA compliant.

Each split system shall be installed with all necessary pipework.

Pipework shall be thermally insulated and installed on a cable

tray. Each indoor unit shall be supplied and installed complete

with a PAR-31MAA-J hard wired controller, and extension cables

as necessary. Each controller shall be wall mounted adjacent to

the main entry door to the room, final position to be agreed with

the Architect.




Page 13 of 33

£ p

To collection:

4.2.3.2 Installation Requirements

All necessary brackets and fixings shall be provided by the

contractor to suit installation of indoor and outdoor units, pipework

etc. External units shall be installed upon anti-vibration mountings.

All necessary pipework shall be supplied and installed, including

pipe/refnet joints. Pipework shall be thermally insulated and neatly

installed on a cable tray.

Pipework insulation shall be closed cell foamed nitrile rubber, with

minimum Class O fire performance and Class 1 against spread of

flame, self extinguishing. Insulation shall also include vapour

barrier and antimicrobial protection. Insulation shall be ODP Zero

and GWP Zero rated

The installation shall include for each system condensate

pipework to drain (to include condensate pumps), plus

interconnecting pipework, insulation, wiring, wall mounted

controllers, and builders work in connection. Do not exceed

manufacturer’s maximum pipe lengths.

The mechanical contractor shall undertake all associated

electrical installations, including power wiring from the isolators, to

the outdoor unit, all power and control wiring between the indoor

and outdoor units, all wiring between local power supply to indoor

units, plus local control wiring.

Provide refrigerant leak detection and alarm to rooms as required

by BS EN 378.

4.2.3.3 Condensate Removal

The contractor shall provide condensate drainage for all indoor fan

coil units to foul drain. Condensate pumps shall be supplied and

installed where necessary.

External unit condensates shall be terminated to avoid slip / trip or

freezing hazards.

4.2.3.4 Commissioning, Testing and Setting to Work

The comfort cooling installations shall be tested, commissioned

and set to work.




Page 14 of 33

£ p

To collection:

Refrigeration systems shall be pressure tested, the air shall then

be vacuumed out prior to charging with refrigerant, all in

accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. All tools,

equipment, refrigerant, oils etc required shall be provided by the

installer.

All refrigerant volumes shall be recorded and noted within the

O&M Manuals.

4.2.4 DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER SERVICES

The Contractor shall alter the existing domestic hot and cold water

services to enable connection to new pipework for hot and cold

water services, as shown on the drawings, all in accordance with

Water Supply Fittings Regulations 1999. The contractor shall

provide thorough flushing, cleaning, sterilisation and laboratory

sampling will be required to the entire system.

4.2.4.1 Pipework and Fittings

All hot and cold water services shall be installed in Table X copper

pipework as shown on the drawings. Full bore ball type valves

with operating handles shall be provided at each main branch and

as shown on the drawings for isolation. Drain cocks shall be fitted

at all low points, capillary pipe fittings shall be jointed in lead free

solder and the installation shall comply with BS6700.

All valves, service valves etc shall be full bore. All valves and

fittings shall be full bore, with internal bore diameter of not less

than the line size, and not less than 10mm for any fitting.

Full bore ball type lever operated isolation valves shall be

provided as shown on the drawings for isolation, to all main

branches (i.e. all pipework branching off risers, plus main

distribution branches, as shown on the drawings).

Full bore screw driver or Allen key type operated service valves

shall be fitted to all final connections to sanitary ware and

appliances.

All pipework shall be insulated and vapour sealed as required by

the standard specification where run in service ducts and voids, as

well as within plantrooms. All support brackets and steelwork shall

be included. All pipework shall be fitted with pipework identification

as BS1710.




Page 15 of 33

£ p

To collection:

All domestic hot water services pipework and fittings shall be

boxed in and insulated. Access panels are to be provided to all

valves.

No hot water services pipework (i.e. pipework upstream/hot water

generator side of thermostatic mixing valve) shall be left exposed.

The maximum permissible hot surface temperatures listed in the

design criteria shall be maintained.

Under no circumstances may flexible pipe connectors or flexible

tap connectors be used, these are strictly prohibited. All

connections to sanitary ware and outlets shall be installed in rigid

plain copper tube.

Double regulating valves shall be fitted to all domestic hot water

services secondary circulation pipework to allow system balancing

and commissioning.

Provide all necessary builders work holes through floors, walls,

partitions etc for new pipework installations.

All pipework passing through the structure shall be sleeved with

pipework of the next size up (e.g. 22mm sleeve for 15mm

pipework) to allow expansion and contraction of pipework, and

sealed with flexible intumescent mastic. Services crossing through

floor levels and crossing fire compartments shall be fire stopped.

Pipework shall be installed to accommodate thermal expansion

and contraction. Riser pipework shall include anchors and

supports.

4.2.4.2 Domestic Hot Water Calorifier

The contractor shall supply, install and commission a new Heatrae

Sadia 120i Megalife HE indirect domestic hot water cylinder into

the existing first floor plant cupboard area as shown.

The cylinder shall be connected to the hot water system in

accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications and

requirements.




Page 16 of 33

£ p

To collection:

4.2.4.3 DHWS Secondary Circulation Pump

The contractor shall install a circulation pump to the DHWS return

pipework located within the basement for circulation temperature

regulation. The pump shall be a Grundfos UPS 15-50N 130

stainless steel secondary circulation pump, suitable for use on

potable domestic hot water systems. A single phase power supply

shall be provided for the circulation pump.

The pump installation shall be complete with isolation valves to

allow pump replacement.

4.2.4.4 Thermostatic Mixing Valves

The contractor shall supply and install thermostatic mixing valves,

to TMV 3 specification as manufactured by Horne Engineering to

each wash hand basin and sink outlets, and as shown on the

drawings.

TMV’s shall be installed with isolating valves, strainers, non-return

valves, wall brackets, cover plates and shall be accessible for

maintenance. Maximum permissible hot water delivery

temperature 41°C. All thermostatic mixing valves, strainers, non

return valves and isolation valves shall be accessible for

inspection, maintenance and replacement.

All thermostatic mixing valves shall be suitable for use on high and

low pressure domestic water services systems.

Where taps include integral thermostatic mixing valves, an

additional mixing valve shall not be installed on the supply to the

outlet.

4.2.4.5 Cleaning and Flushing

The Contractor shall include for a thorough cleaning, flushing,

sterilising and testing the new hot and cold domestic water

systems installations in their entirety in accordance with BS 6700

and leave in working order, free from any solder or other debris.

Submit samples for laboratory testing for water quality and micro

biological activity. Repeat the cleaning, flushing and sterilising

until microbiological activity levels are acceptable, as dictated by

laboratory’s standard valves, and in accordance with HSE

Approved Code of Practice Document L8.




Page 17 of 33

£ p

To collection:

4.2.4.6 Test and Commission

Test all the mechanical works in accordance with all current

Regulations, manufacturer’s recommendations and provide test

results. This shall include pressure test of all pipework, and

rectification where necessary.

4.2.4.7 Water Regulations

All mechanical works shall be installed in accordance with all

current Water Supply (Water Fittings) Regulations 1999.

The mechanical contractor shall notify the water supply

company/undertaker responsible for Water Regulations, and

submit to the water supply company full plans and information

prior to commencing work on site.

The mechanical contractor shall invite the water supply company

to inspect the installation works in advance of practical

completion, and rectify any identified Water Regulations

contraventions in a prompt manner. The contractor shall notify the

supply company when rectifications have been made, and invite

the water supply company to site for further inspections.

Any dishwashers, laundry equipment or external hose outlets shall

be provided with Water Regulations Fluid Category 5 backflow

protection, which shall be integral to the appliances.

Sluices/slop hopper sinks etc shall be provided with a type AA air

gap WRAS approved cistern to protect against Fluid Category 5

backflow and or backsiphonage.

4.2.5 VENTILATION

This section deals with the ventilation, plant and associated services to be provided by the installer as part of the mechanical services. All builders work in connection with the ventilation plant installation are to be provided, including builders work holes through roofs, walls, floors, ceilings, fixings brackets and supports, making good, etc. The contractor shall include for all crainage, lifting equipment to transport the new plant into the final installation positions. The contractor shall also provide all scaffolding, lifting equipment and safety equipment to ensure safe installation of the ductwork at roof level and at high level within ceiling voids etc.




Page 18 of 33

£ p

To collection:

The roof and ground levels vary considerably, the contractor shall visit site to appreciate installation requirements and access difficulties to this area.

4.2.5.1 Extract Fans

The Contractor shall supply and install new extract fans as shown in the

table below:

EF Ref Duty

(L/s)

Manufacturer Model Type Controls

EF1 20 Vent Axia Eclipse

Wall

Mounted PIR, Humidistat


Wall


EF3 100 Vent Axia ACM150

Duct



Wall


All fans are to be wall mounted unless noted otherwise. All ventilation fans,

internal grilles etc are to be finished in white. External louvre colours are to

suit Architect’s requirements. Wall extension liner kits to be provided to suit

thicker walls (in excess of 315mm) where necessary.

The contractor is to supply and install automatic electronic fan controls, to

provide the control functions as scheduled within the above table.

Sensors and controllers shall be suitable for use with Vent Axia fans and

shall be as follows:

PIR controllers are to be Vent Axia Visionex Ref 459623A

Humidistat controllers are to be Vent Axia Ecotronic Ref 563532A

The Visionex PIR controller includes integral overrun timer. The humidistat

is to be connected into the PIR Controller.

All fans are to operate as extract only, with speed set to suit the required

extract duty scheduled in the table. Humidistats are to be set at maximum

70% relative humidity.

All interconnecting wiring and the installation of the controls are to be

carried out by the electrical contractor.

The mechanical contractor is to free issue the controls to the electrical

contractor.




Page 19 of 33

£ p

To collection:

The Contractor is to allow for the ducting of extract out through the wall

and supply and install a suitable anti back draft shutter to the outside

face. These are to be weatherproof and prevent the ingress of the

elements, birds and insects.

4.2.5.8 Ductwork

The new supply and extract ventilation system shall comply with

HVCA DW144 “Specification for Sheet Metal Ductwork”. The supply

and extract ductwork shall be in accordance with CEN Class A Low

Pressure Ductwork. The installation shall also be in accordance with

HTM 03-01.

Ductwork shall be constructed from hot-dipped zinc coated galvanised

steel to BS.EN10142:1991, Grade DX51D+Z, type Z275. Minimum

sheet thickness shall be in accordance with DW144 Table 2.

The use of bolt through ductwork supports shall not be permitted, as

noted in HTM 03-01.

Flexible ductwork is permitted only for final grille connections, and

flexible ducts must not exceed one meter in length. Flexible ductwork

must meet the fire precautions of BS 8313, and shall not pass through

any fire compartment, sub-compartment or barrier.

All ducts passing through fire compartment walls, floors and

enclosures, cavity barriers and sub-compartment walls or enclosures

etc shall be fire stopped.

Volume Control Dampers (VCD) shall be of the opposed blade type.

VCD’s shall be located at each main duct branch, as shown on the

drawings and as necessary to satisfactorily balance and commission

the ventilation systems.

The contractor shall provide test points within ductwork at all branches

plus on the main duct run to/from the fan. Test points shall be fitted

with caps, and test point locations shall be shown on the record

drawings and commissioning data.

As stipulated in DW144, provided that the construction and

workmanship standards are followed, there will be no requirement for

ductwork leakage testing for Low Pressure Class A systems.

The contractor shall provide duct cleaning access panels upstream of

each obstruction (e.g. damper, balancing device, air turns, turning




Page 20 of 33

£ p

To collection:

vanes), and at 10 metre intervals. See the additional duct cleaning

requirements in the following section.

Thermal insulation shall be provided to all supply and extract

ductwork, in accordance with BS5422:2009. Ductwork insulation

thickness shall be in accordance with BS5422:2009 Table 12 for

control of condensation, Table 13 and 14 for control of heat loss and

gain. Heat loss from warm ducts shall not exceed 16.34W/m2 and

heat gain to cooled air ducts shall not exceed 6.45W/m2. All supply

ductwork shall be vapour sealed.

Ductwork insulation of 57mm thickness, with a thermal conductivity of

0.04W/m.K and low emissivity (0.05) shall be provided to all supply

ductwork, complete with vapour seal.

Ductwork insulation of 33mm thickness, with a thermal conductivity of

0.04W/m.K and low emissivity (0.05) shall be provided to all extract

ductwork.

Thermal insulation of ductwork includes ductwork within ceiling voids,

risers, plantrooms, external ductwork etc, and applies to all supply

and extract ductwork. External ductwork insulation shall be fully

weatherproofed and protected against rainwater.

All supply and extract ductwork shall be fitted with labels, colour

coded in accordance with BS4800.

The ductwork contractor shall provide a full air balance,

commissioning and testing of the entire supply and extract systems.

The commissioning information and certification included in the O&M

manuals.

4.2.5.9 Ductwork Cleaning and Cleaning Access Panels

The contractor shall supply and install duct access panels for the

purpose of duct cleaning. The provision of ductwork cleaning

access and system cleaning shall be to Level 1 as detailed in

HVCA TR/19 “Internal Cleanliness of Ventilation Systems” and

HVCA DW144.

Duct access panels shall be installed to suit HVCA TR/19 Table

2. This includes, but is not limited to cleaning access panels to

one or both sides of turning vanes, at each change of direction,

control dampers, fire dampers, heating/cooling coils, attenuators,

not more than 10metre intervals etc.




Page 21 of 33

£ p

To collection:

All supply and extract ductwork distribution, including fittings,

grilles, diffusers etc shall be given an internal clean prior to

practical completion/hand over.

4.2.5.10 Supply and Extract Grilles

The contractor is to supply and install all extract grilles where

shown on the drawings and as detailed in the mechanical

schedules. The grilles shall be provided by Waterloo as

scheduled, or equal and approved.

Ref

Location Type Volume

(l/s)

Manufacturer Model

EG1 GF Kitchenette Extract 30 Waterloo Air VB125

EG2 FF Male WC Extract 20 Waterloo Air VB125 EG3 FF Female WC Extract 20 Waterloo Air VB125

Extract grilles are to be disc type extract grilles as supplied by

Waterloo, or equal and approved

The contractor shall include for all builders’ work, fixings, etc to

form a working installation. All grilles are to be finished in white.

4.2.5.11 Ductwork Fire Dampers

The new supply and extract ductwork systems shall be fitted with

fire dampers to all penetrations through fire sub-compartments.

Fire dampers shall be of the multi-blade thermal link type, and

close off the duct at temperatures of 72°C +4°C. Fire dampers

shall be as supplied by Actionair or equal and approved.

Each fire damper shall be installed in accordance with HVCA

DW/TM3 and each fire damper shall be complete with a duct

access panel for inspection, testing and resetting of the links and

dampers.

4.2.5.12 Transfer Grilles

The contractor is to supply and install 400x300mm door transfer grilles to

rooms shown on the mechanical services drawings. The grilles are to be

1 hour fire rated, complete with intumescent core, and the grilles are to

be finished in silver.




Page 22 of 33

£ p

To collection:

The transfer grilles are to be type SG-BV60 complete with BV60

intumescent core, as supplied by Brooke Air Ltd, or equal and

approved

4.2.5.13 Roof Terminals

The contractor shall install Vent Axia 150 Dia Roof Termination

Set onto the roof in the location shown to terminate the ducted

outlet. Vent Axia Ref: WB160.

The Roof Termination sets shall be installed in accordance with

the manufacturer’s requirements.

4.2.6 LTHW HEATING


All heating services pipework shall be installed as per the existing

installation. Drain cocks shall be fitted at all low points, with

screwed fittings or welded as appropriate. The installation shall

comply with BS6700.

All pipework shall be insulated and vapour sealed where run in

service ducts and voids. All support brackets and steelwork shall

be included. Automatic air valves shall be fitted at all high points.

Isolation valves shall be installed to main branches and as shown

on the drawings to allow local isolation. Double regulating valves

shall be fitted to return pipework branches as necessary to permit

system balancing, commissioning and flow proving.

Pipework shall be installed to accommodate thermal expansion

and contraction, using offsets/dog legs or proprietary pipework

expansion systems. Riser pipework shall include anchors and

supports.

Pipework located on the roof shall be supported using a

proprietary roof support system, of the type that shall not

penetrate or cause damage to the roof membrane. All necessary

associated metalwork shall be installed.




Page 23 of 33

£ p

To collection:

4.2.6.2 LTHW Boilers

The contractor shall employ a specialist to service and carry out

any repairs required to the existing condensing gas fired boiler

located within the first floor kitchen, the existing boiler is a Valliant

EcoTech Plus 483.

The boiler shall be serviced and commissioned in accordance with

BS6644:2005.

4.2.6.3 Heat Emitters

The contractor shall supply and install Low Surface Temperature

radiators as detailed within the table below:

Ref Location Heat Output

(W) Manufacturer Model

Overall

Height

(mm)

Overall

Length

(mm)

Type

GF01 Waiting Room 691 Stelrad Elite 450 900 K1

GF02 Waiting Room 691 Stelrad Elite 450 900 K1

GF03 Counselling Room 691 Stelrad Elite 450 900 K1


GF05 Accessible WC 522 Stelrad LST Standard 500 760 K2

GF06 HR & Payroll 1268 Stelrad Elite 450 900 K2


GF08 Kitchenette 461 Stelrad Elite 450 600 K1

GF09 Ground Floor WC 307 Stelrad Elite 450 400 K1

GF10 Meeting Room 1973 Stelrad Elite 450 1400 K1

GF11 Managers Office 1973 Stelrad Elite 450 1400 K1

GF12 Activity Area 986 Stelrad Elite 450 700 K2

GF13 Family Meeting

Room 986 Stelrad Elite 450 700 K2

GF14 GF Corridor 614 Stelrad Elite 450 800 K1



GF17 Reception 1012 Stelrad Elite 300 1000 K2

GF18 Reception 1012 Stelrad Elite 300 1000 K2

FF01 Office 1 1012 Stelrad Elite 300 1000 K2




FF05 CEO’s Office 1268 Stelrad Elite 450 900 K2

FF06 Fundraising Office 1409 Stelrad Elite 450 1000 K2

FF07 Staff Area 1127 Stelrad Elite 450 800 K2

FF08 Female WC 564 Stelrad Elite 450 400 K2

FF09 Male WC 307 Stelrad Elite 450 400 K1

FF10 FF Corridor 461 Stelrad Elite 450 600 K1

FF11 FF Corridor 461 Stelrad Elite 450 600 K1

The above radiators have been selected on a mean water to air

temperature difference of 50°C.

The contractor shall site measure and check for sufficient space

for radiators, pipework and valves prior to ordering radiators.




Page 24 of 33

£ p

To collection:

All new radiators are to be fitted with Thermostatic Radiator

Valves (TRVs) and Lockshield Valves (LSVs). Radiators shall be

resiliently mounted on suitable brackets.

All new heating pipework within ducts and voids are to be

insulated as per standard specification. All heating pipework shall

be fully boxed in and insulated, to include pipe drops and

pipework at low level. No pipework shall be left exposed in any

patient or infirm person accessible area or room.

LST – low surface temperature radiator, Stelrad LST Standard.

4.2.6.4 Electric Heaters

The contractor shall supply and install 1Nr Dimplex AC Overdoor

Electric Heater to the locations shown on the associated drawings.

The Heater shall be as supplied by Dimplex, model number

AC3RN, with a nominal heat output of 1.5kW complete with

remote control. Supplied with all required mains borne control

accessories, wall mounting kit to be installed as per the

manufacturer’s instructions.

All interconnecting wiring and the installation of the controls are to

be carried out by the mechanical contractor.

4.2.6.5 LPHW Water Treatment

The Contractor shall supply all plant and equipment for flushing,

purging and cleaning of the new heating circuits (new radiator VT

heating circuit, new DHWS primary circuit and new CT AHU

circuit).

After initial flushing, the L.P.H.W heating system shall be flushed

with a pre commissioning cleanser. After pre-commissioning

cleaning, the system shall be dosed with inhibitor. The dosing

system shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations.

The chemical cleaning and water treatment/inhibitor is to be

supplied and installed by Altek Chemical Engineering Co. Ltd,

Industrial Estate, Cuckoo Hill, Suffolk, CO8 5JH.

The Contractor shall submit proposals for approval before

commencing flushing, cleaning and dosing.




Page 25 of 33

£ p

To collection:

As part of the new installation, the Contractor shall provide a

permanent heating system dosing and sampling point within the

plantroom.

A label shall be fitted to the control panel to indicate the inhibitor

type, dose, installer/supplier and date.

4.2.6.6 Commissioning

The boiler plant (i.e. boilers, circulation pumps, domestic hot water

calorifiers) shall be fully commissioned, to include flow

measurement, balancing and proving, and ensure that systems

are left in a safe, operational, fully automatically controlled

condition, to meet the design criteria within this specification.

4.2.7 CONTROLS AND POWER

This section details the requirements for the building Mechanical

Control Panel (MCP). The design of control installations will be a

contractor design portion, to meet the operational and

performance requirements of this specification, and will include

automatic controls, as well as power installations to serve

mechanical plant items.

Proposed New Controls

The contractor is to provide a new, fully automatic control system

installation for the new and retained mechanical services plant

and ancillary components installations. This shall provide full

power, controls for all mechanical services plant and ancillaries.

The control requirements for the new mechanical plant and

ancillaries serving the building shall be as follows:

Time clock enable for plant/systems on/off control

(independent of other systems)

Hot water heater control

Emergency knock off buttons – 1nr (adjacent to boiler)

Fire alarm interface – the AC units and local extract fans

shall automatically shut down under activation of the fire

alarm.

Setting up, commissioning and setting to work the systems

Status and fault monitoring




Page 26 of 33

£ p

To collection:

Notes: All set points, time clocks etc shall be adjustable

The controls subcontractor shall supply ALL field control

components and equipment, including actuators, sensors, cabling,

switches etc to provide a full working system. All controls and

power equipment shall be fully labelled with engraved plastic

labels.

The control section of the BMS outstation panel fascia shall

contain the following indicator lamps:

Control panel live

Control circuit healthy

DHWS calorifier – run/fault

The controls section of the MCP shall contain all necessary

controllers, relays, in/out devices, network cards, internal wiring

etc to form a fully working and functional automatic controls

system.

The controls installation shall include all field power and control

wiring, sensors, actuators etc to form a fully working functional

automatic controls system. Any claims for power or control wiring,

or components not being provided as part of this contract shall be

excluded.

The controls contractor shall provide site attendance for and

undertake a full Client/user demonstration of controls.

Controls Description of Operations

Heating/Cooling

The Mitsibushi multi split system shall be controlled via the PAR-

31MAA-J hard wired controllers, local to the internal units.

Domestic Hot Water

The new hot water heater shall be provided with integral control,

to maintain stored water at the set point.

Toilet Extract Ventilation

The local toilet extract fans shall be controlled via the integral

controls to run in trickle mode in normal operation. The boost

operation shall be occupancy controlled, triggered by activation of

local PIR sensors.




Page 27 of 33

£ p

To collection:

The fans shall have run on timers set to maintain sufficient airflow

and reduce cycling.

Kitchen Ventilation

The small local kitchen fan shall be controlled via the integral

controls to run in trickle mode in normal operation. The boost

operation shall be occupancy controlled, triggered by activation of

local PIR sensors.

The fans shall have run on timers set to maintain sufficient airflow

and reduce cycling.

4.2.8 NATURAL GAS SERVICES

The contractor shall isolate, purge and replace the existing

external gas service pipework to serve the existing boiler as

shown on the mechanical drawings.

The contractor is to fully investigate the gas service to the existing

boiler prior to its removal. The gas service is to be removed from

the boiler and stripped back to the meter.

The gas pipework installation shall be pressure tested, and air

shall be purged out of the system, prior to commissioning the gas

supply.

Any works to gas systems are to be carried out by Gas Safe

registered engineers.

The Mechanical Contractor is to provide his own working drawings

which are to be submitted for approval to the Supervising

Engineer before works commence.

Regulations and Standards

All natural gas installations must conform to the requirements of

the following statutory instruments:

The Gas Safety Regulations.

The Gas Safety (installation and Use) Regulations.

The installation shall also conform to any appropriate

recommendations and requirements of Transco and Gas Safe and

Building Regulations, reference part L2B, schedule 2A.




Page 28 of 33

£ p

To collection:

British Standard Specification and Codes of Practice and Transco

Standards and Codes are detailed under the relevant clauses.

All gas services are to be purged and tested to IGE/UP/1 and

installed to IGE/UP/2.

If the Contractor has reason to think the installation contravenes

the Regulations, he must inform the Engineer before commencing

or continuing the work.


Pipework and fittings

Pipework up to size 25mm shall be installed in accordance with

the requirements of British Standard CP331: Part 3:- Low

Pressure Installation Pipes.

32mm Pipework and above shall be installed in accordance with

the requirements of Transco Publication 1M/16 – Guidance notes

on the installation of gas pipework, boosters and compressors in

customers’ premises.

Pipework materials and pipework fittings shall be as follows:-

Internal pipework

Joints shall be unions or flanges at no more than 13 metre centres

and at plant and equipment.

Pipe work 15mm to 150mm nominal bore shall be heavyweight

black mild steel tube to BS. 1387 with butt welded fittings to BS.

1965.

Pipework 175mm nominal bore and above shall be seamless

carbon steel to B5.3601 with butt welded fittings to BS.1965.

Isolation valves

Isolation valves or cocks shall be provided on the inlet connection

to every gas appliance.

Manual valves and cocks shall be in accordance with the

recommendations and requirements of Transco Publication 1M/15

– Manual Valves A Guide to Selection for Industrial and

Commercial Gas Installations.




Page 29 of 33

£ p

To collection:

Valves and cocks shall be as follows:-

Up to size 20mm nominal bore shall be the plug cock type to BS,

1552: 1982.

Size 25mm nominal bore and over shall be type 200M Newman

Milliken plug valve. The valve shall be complete with standard

wrench and spare sealing cartridge.

The Contractor can put forward alternative types and

manufactures of valves or cocks provided they comply with Gas

Publication 1M/15 – Manual Valves A Guide to Selection for

Industrial and Commercial Gas Installations. He must receive

written permission from the Engineer before ordering or using

alternative types or manufacturer.

All gas pipework to be finished in yellow with sufficient labelling.

4.2.8.2 Testing and Commissioning

Soundness Testing

Pipework in industrial and commercial premises shall be tested in

accordance with the recommendations in the Transco Publication

1M/5 – Soundness Testing Procedures for Industrial and

Commercial Gas Installations. The procedures apply to

installations. The procedures apply to installations designed to

operate at pressures up to 5 bar. For higher pressures reference

should be made to Transco. Before testing the pipework the

Contractor shall ensure that the following items have been

checked:-

All necessary cross bonding has been carried out by the

Contractor.

All pipe ends are spaded, plugged or capped. Sensitive

equipment must be protected from over pressure prior to the test.

All necessary purge and test points are provided.

All pipework shall be clear of debris and clean internally prior to

testing and purging.

Prior to a test taking place, a general inspection of the work to be

tested shall be made by the Contractor and the Engineer or his

Representative.




Page 30 of 33

£ p

To collection:

The Contractor shall supply all testing apparatus and instruments.

Calibration certificates shall be provided.

4.2.10 BUILDERS WORK

The Contractor shall identify and allow for all builder’s work in

conjunction with the mechanical and electrical services

installations.

These shall include but not be limited to:

Forming and weatherproofing new holes through roofs to

suit new ductwork and other services installations

Forming holes in walls, floors, partitions etc to suit new

ductwork, pipework, grilles, dampers, louvres and other

services installations

Trench work and backfilling, making good (pipework

routes)

To include associated electrical works

Access to roof plant for maintenance

Asbestos removals

4.2.11 ELECTRICAL SERVICES ASSOCIATED WITH MECHANICAL PLANT

4.2.11.1 General

The mechanical contractor shall employ an electrical subcontractor

(referred to as ‘electrician’), to carry out electrical and control works

associated with the mechanical works. This includes, but is not limited

to the following:

a. New power supplies, power and control wiring etc to all

mechanical plant

b. Testing and commissioning

c. Providing O&M Manual documentation, certification, panel

drawings and wiring diagrams

The mechanical contractor shall provide all necessary electrical power

installations associated with the mechanical plant and ancillaries to

form a safe and fully working installation.

The mechanical contractor’s electrician shall install all power cables,

conduits, cable trays, switchgear, isolators, supports and clips etc. to




Page 31 of 33

£ p

To collection:

provide a complete and safe installation to all items of plant and

equipment. It will be the responsibility of the mechanical contractor’s

electrician to make all final connections from isolators to items of

equipment and to supply and install all control wiring.

The route of all cables shall be neat and unobtrusive and, where

possible, concealed. They shall be located and agreed with the

Contract Administrator and Engineer before installation. No surface

installation shall take place without prior agreement from the Contract

Administrator and Engineer.

All earth bonding shall be carried out by the electrician. All control and

power cabling run within service ducts or voids shall be identified

every 3 metres.

The mechanical contractor shall confirm panel/equipment/plant loads

to his electrical subcontractor and the electrical contractor at the

earliest possible opportunity so that cable sizing to the panels may be

checked and confirmed.

4.2.11.2 Standards

The electrical installation shall fully comply with the current edition

of the 'Regulations for Electrical Installations' BS 7671 2008

(2011) issued by the Institution of Electrical Engineers.

This is deemed to be the 17th Edition published in 2008 but

including all subsequent amendments and good current

engineering practice.

The Contractor shall also comply with the standards detailed in

the Electrical Specification Standard available from the Project

Manager.

4.2.12 INSPECTION AND TESTING

The Contractor shall test the electrical installation formed as a

consequence of these works in full accordance with the

requirements of the Standard Specification, Regulations and

British Standards.

Due notice shall be given to the Engineer of the Section of works

to be tested and the date/time of such tests.




Page 32 of 33

£ p

To collection:

Provide site attendance, tools, equipment and test equipment for

commissioning and to witness the mechanical services

installations.

The contractor shall provide a Services Commissioning Manager

role, to programme and coordinate installation, testing,

commissioning, and witnessing of the mechanical services

installations.

4.2.13 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

The contractor shall allow for the production of Operating and

Maintenance manuals to cover the works highlighted within this

specification.

The contractor shall provide operation and maintenance

information and “as installed” drawings a minimum of two weeks

before practical completion.

2 hard copies of O&M information shall be provided, plus one

electronic copy on disc.

The O&M Manuals shall include, but not limited to the following:

Health and Safety recommendations

Description of installation

Manufacturer’s information

Operation instructions

Fault finding procedures

Emergency Procedures

Maintenance recommendations

“As installed” drawings

Test certificates

The contractor shall allow carry out Client/user demonstrations of

all mechanical services plant and controls, to include all specialist

sub-contractors (e.g. BMS) prior to hand over.

The mechanical contractor shall also produce a Building Log

Book for the new installation, to follow the CIBSE TM31

recommended format.




Page 33 of 33

£ p

To collection:

4.2.14 SCHEDULE OF RATES

Although not required to be submitted with the tender, the

contractor will be required at the time of appointment to produce a

detailed and comprehensive schedule of rate for all section of the

works.

This schedule shall detail all quantities of all components installed

in the works, with individual monetary rates extended and totalled

to match the tender sums for each sections of the works.

The schedule shall be in a form and detail acceptable to the

Contract Administrator. The contractor’s tender build up sheet

may be acceptable for this purpose.

The schedule is to be used solely for the valuation of variations

ordered under the relevant clauses of the conditions of contract by

the Contract Administrator.

4.2.15 CONTINGENCIES

The mechanical contractor shall include the provisional sum of

10% (ten percent) of his tender, for contingencies to be expended,

or deleted, as directed by the Contract Administrator.


Page 1 of 16

BUILDING ENGINEERING SERVICES PROJECT SPECIFICATION

FOR COLCHESTER MIND

WELLNESS CENTRE REFURBISHMENT

This document has been prepared for the titled project or named part thereof and should not be relied upon or used for any other project without an independent check being carried out as to its suitability and prior written authority of Ingleton Wood being obtained. Ingleton Wood accepts no responsibility or liability for the consequence of this document being used for a purpose other than the purposes for which it was commissioned. Any person using or relying on the document for such other purpose agrees, and will by such use or reliance be taken to confirm his agreement to indemnify Ingleton Wood for all loss or damage resulting there from. Ingleton Wood accepts no responsibility or liability for this document to any party other than the person by whom it was commissioned.

CHECKING AND REVISION

Revision Description Originator Checked Approved Date

T0 Tender (Elec) CB WH 10/12/13


Page 2 of 16

SECTION 4.3

ELECTRICAL SERVICES



Page 3 of 16

C O N T E N T S Section 3.3 Electrical Services Materials and workmanship Electrical Installation 3.3.1 General Requirements

3.3.2 LSF Insulated and sheathed cables

3.3.3 LSF Insulated cables in Heavy Gauge Conduit and Metal Trunking

3.3.4 Mineral Insulated Copper Sheathed Cables and Soft Skin Fire Rated Cables.

3.3.5 LSF Insulated Steel Wire Armoured cables

3.3.6 Installation of cables in Trenches and Ducts

3.3.7 Cable Tray Installations

3.3.8 LV Switchboard and Distribution Boards

3.3.9 Lighting Installation

3.3.10 Power Installation

3.3.11 Earthing Arrangements and Protective Conductors

3.3.12 Inspection and Testing

3.3.13 Information and ‘As Installed’ Drawings


Page 4 of 16

£ p

To collection:

3.3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Scope 1. This specification covers the standards required for the supply and

installation including testing and commissioning to new, modified or additional electrical installations. This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with the section detailing particular requirements for the project, the remainder of the specification, and associated drawings.

2. Where doubt or obscurity exists with regard to the meaning of the

drawings or specification, then the tenderer shall submit the relevant details in writing to the Contract Administrator for clarification 4 days prior to the tender return date.

3. Any misunderstanding arising during the progress of the work in

respect to the meaning or interpretation of any part of the specification will be resolved by the Contract Administrator whose decision will be final and binding.

4. If any discrepancies occur between the number of points shown

on the drawing and those indicated within the specification then it shall be deemed that the greater number of points will have been included for.

5. The Electrical Services Installer is to include for and comply with

all Contract Preliminaries insofar as they are applicable to the Electrical Services installation works.

Those tendering for the Electrical Services installation works are to obtain all information and details of the Contract Preliminaries from the Contractor issuing the invitation to price the works.

.2 Definitions 1. The definitions given in BS 7671:2008 17th Edition of the IEE

Wiring Regulations referred to hereafter as the IEE Regulations shall apply throughout the installation.

.3 Standards 1. All work and materials shall comply with all relevant legislation,

British and European Union Standards, the latest edition of the IEE Wiring Regulations, Codes of Practice and accepted good trade practice.

.4 Particular Manufacturers 1. Where particular manufacturers have been specified for certain

materials and equipment deviation from these suppliers will only be permitted with the prior permission of the Contract Administrator.


Page 5 of 16

£ p

To collection:

The Contractor shall note that ‘equal and approved’ will not be accepted NOR is it to be assumed to apply UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED IN THIS PROJECT SPECIFICATION OR AN OFFICIAL INSTRUCTION HAS BEEN ISSUED.

The contractor shall ensure that orders are placed to allow sufficient time for delivery and subsequent installation in accordance with the main contract programme. It is therefore incumbent on the contractor to confirm delivery times of all specified items for example plant; equipment; fittings; accessories, so that orders are placed in good time in meeting the programme.

NB. Claims arising through lack of knowledge of the specification, General Specification and Project Specification will not be considered.

.5 Position of Equipment 1. The positions of all points and equipment shown on the

accompanying plans shall be assumed correct for the purposes of tendering, but it is the Electrical Services Installer’s responsibility to check the positions with the detailed drawings that will be available on the site.

The Electrical Services Installer is to work in close co-operation with all other trades on site especially when setting out the works and marking out the positions of points. The Electrical Services Installer is to liaise with the Main Contractor in relation to fixed furniture, fittings, ceiling and wall finishes which may affect the position of points and the Mechanical Services Installer in relation to radiators, heater units, pipe runs, ductwork and the like which may affect the position of points. The Electrical Services Installer shall accurately set out his works and take all necessary site dimensions and he shall keep them correct in every particular according to the drawings, Project and General and Specifications. He/she shall not proceed with the execution of the works as set out until such setting out has been indicated on their working drawings and approved by the Architect/Engineer or their appointed representative. Any work that has to be altered as a result of these instructions not being adhered to will not be admitted as a variation to the Contract. Any variation of position under 2 meters, or height, shall be allowed without extra cost to the Employer, unless such alterations are made after conduits, cables, etc. are fixed.


Page 6 of 16

£ p

To collection:

Where accessories are together they shall be fixed vertically in line, or horizontally in line, to the approval of the Engineer. In all instances where services and other Sub-Contractors works run in conjunction and/or parallel with each other, the setting out of the all of the services is to be approved by the Architect/Engineer before work is commenced on that portion of the installation.

.6 Labels 1. All switchgear and distribution positions shall be clearly and

permanently labelled. 2. Typed circuit schedules in clear plastic envelopes shall be

included inside distribution boards and main switchgear panels upon completion of the project.

3. All multi-phase boards and switches are to be complete with

"DANGER 400 VOLTS" red self-adhesive labels. .7 Labour 1. The Contractor shall ensure that at all times, the number of

apprentices does not exceed the number of qualified electricians. The foreman or approved electrician on smaller projects shall not be changed without prior consent of the Contract Administrator during the contract.

.8 Specification & Drawings 1. The specifications and drawings shall NOT be varied UNLESS

WRITTEN CONFIRMATION THROUGH AN OFFICIAL INSTRUCTION IS ISSUED.

Contractors who carry out work that is not in full compliance with the Project Documentation including the Mechanical & Electrical Specification and Drawings and has been undertaken without an official written instruction shall be required to rectify the situation to ensure full compliance at their own expense. In addition no extension to the Contract Programme will be granted for rectification works falling under this heading.

.9 Visiting the Site 1. Tenderers wishing to visit the site to familiarise themselves with

the local conditions shall make prior arrangements to do so with the Company from whom the enquiry was received.

Claims arising during the project from lack of knowledge during the tender stage will not be entertained.


Page 7 of 16

£ p

To collection:

3.3.2 LSF INSULATED AND SHEATHED CABLES .1 All cables shall be manufactured to the requirements of BS C630

and BS 7211. .2 Where wiring is installed within plaster walls, plastic or galvanised

metal capping shall be installed. All cables within ceiling voids and roof spaces shall be run parallel with or at right angles to noggins provided by the Electrical Contractor. Where wiring is installed in intermediate floors, thread through holes not exceeding 25mm diameter drilled at half joist depth. Cables shall not be installed within plastered walls unless accessory positions fall directly above or below the cable run, permission to do otherwise must be obtained from the Contract Administrator.

.3 Clipping of cables shall be carried out in accordance with table 4a

of the IEE on site guide. Cables shall not be run loose laid on ceiling grids.

3.3.3 LSF INSULATED CABLES IN CONDUIT AND METAL

TRUNKING .1 Cables

1. Cables shall be single core, stranded LSF contained within heavy

gauge black enamelled steel conduits, unless otherwise stated elsewhere in the specification.

2. They shall be installed to the conduit or trunking so as not to

exceed the requirements of the IEE Regulations. 3. All line cables shall be brown, neutrals blue. Green/Yellow circuit

protective conductors shall be drawn in throughout the installation. .2 Conduits and Fittings

1. Conduit and fittings shall be steel galvanised or black enamel or

PVC as specified. Sizes of conduits less than 20mm will not be permitted.

2. Adequate provision shall be made for drawing in and inspection. 3. All conduits must run vertically or horizontally; diagonal runs will

not be permitted on walls. 4. All conduit and conduit fittings used in kitchens, sculleries, toilets,

laundries, boiler houses, fuel stores, externally and other specified damp and corrosive situations shall be galvanised.


Page 8 of 16

£ p

To collection:

5. Where it is required to run conduit in wall cavities, floor ducts, etc., only galvanised conduit shall be used. Permission must first be obtained from the Contract Administrator before these runs are installed.

6. All "U" shaped conduit runs shall be provided with a drain outlet

for condensation. This shall consist of a "solid tee", the bottom outlet being fitted with a brass stopping plug having a 3mm diameter drain hole.

7. Standard circular conduit boxes shall be provided and fixed at all

junctions and the necessary angles and bends of conduit. 8. Where specified final connections to machines and other items of

apparatus shall be with flexible conduit. The flexible conduit shall consist of a single layer of leaded steel, sheathed with PVC Kopex Ref. Ls/1/PVC. The flexible conduit shall terminate in couplings Ref. C/12 with threaded internal sleeve ref. CS/PVC.

9. A separate copper earth-continuity conductor complying with IEE

Regulations must be included within the conduit. On no account must a screw securing box lids be used for earthing purposes.

.3 Trunking

1. Cable trunking and connectors shall be of steel or PVC as

specified. All accessories shall be in accordance with the manufacturers list. Only if unavoidable will fabricated trunking and fittings be accepted. Where special fittings or sections of trunking are fabricated they shall be to the same standard as the manufacturer's equipment.

2. Individual pieces of trunking shall be independently supported.

Fixings shall be at maximum 1800mm spacing. 3. Trunking systems erected outside a building shall be

weatherproof. 4. Cable support shall be provided at intervals of 900mm in vertical

runs to support cables. Where a fire barrier is required between floors and "cable support" shall be provided at floor levels and fibreglass packed between the insulated pins.

5. Where extra low voltage circuits are contained in the same

trunking as low voltage circuits, all cables shall be rated for the higher voltage.

6. The trunking shall be adequately bonded throughout its entire

length.


Page 9 of 16

£ p

To collection:

.4 Lighting Points 1. Standard circular boxes or equivalent "loop-in" boxes shall be

provided and securely fixed for all lighting points. Where boxes are above a suspended ceiling a suitable lighting plug and socket shall be provided to allow a flexible connection to be made from the light.

3.3.4 MICC AND SOFT SKIN FIRE RESISTANT CABLES

.1 MINERAL INSULATED COPPER SHEATHED CABLES WITH

COPPER CONDUCTORS

.1.1 Cables

1. All cables shall be 600V grade cables to BS 6207 having an

overall serving of LSF. 2. Terminations shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations. 3. Saddles and clips shall be LSF covered to match the cable

sheath. "One hole" fixing "P" clips shall be used for single runs. On multi-runs use heavy gauge two hole fixing saddles. Fixing screws shall be round head brass screws.

4. Where cables pass through walls and floors or may be subject to

damage or abuse (i.e. where cables rise from the ground they shall be protected up to a height of 1350mm by heavy gauge galvanised steel conduit.

.2 SOFTSKIN FIRE RESISTANT CABLES

.2.1 Cable

The cable shall be manufactured to BS 6387 and BS 7629. The conductors shall be 19/0.15mm plain soft copper with silicone rubber insulation type E12 to BS7655.

The outer sheath shall be Zero Halogen Low Smoke (OHLS) compound and coloured red.


Page 10 of 16

£ p

To collection:

.2.2 Installation

Installation shall generally be as specified in 4.1 above for MICC cables.

.2.3 Termination

The Nylon OHLS Gland shall be used for normal applications. The A2 brass gland must be used for Zone 1 and Zone 2 applications. Preparation for the termination must be carried out as detailed by Delta Crompton Cables Ltd.

3.3.5 XLPE INSULATED STEEL WIRE ARMOURED AND LSF

SHEATHED CABLES

.1 Cables

1. The cables shall be of 600/1000 Volt grade in accordance with BS 6724.

.2 Installation

1. The ends of the cables shall terminate in compression type glands

comprising cone grip armour clamps. 2. Protection from mechanical damage shall be provided to a height

of 1500mm above floor levels. 3. Cleating of cables shall be in accordance with table 4A in the IEE

on site guide. 4. Where jointing of a cable is required by the Contract

Administrator, these shall be made using standard underground junction boxes purpose made for armoured cables and filled on completion of the joint using cold pour sealing compound. Conductors shall be jointed using soldered joints using a resin flux. Joints shall be wrapped with LSF tape to afford insulation equal to that of the original.

3.3.6 INSTALLATION OF CABLES IN TRENCHES AND DUCTS

.1 Cables in Trenches

1. Necessary builders work shall be carried out by the Electrical

Contractor, except in the case of a Sub-Contractor, when the Main Contractor will carry out the excavation and reinstatement. This work should include provision of sifted soil or sand, backfilling of trenches and the construction of any duct and the provision and fixing of circular cable ducts.


Page 11 of 16

£ p

To collection:

2. Cables and ducts shall be a minimum 600mm below surface level. 3. Prior to laying cables, the bottom of the trench shall be evenly

graded, cleared of loose stones, and covered with a 75mm layer of finely sifted soil or sand. A further 75mm of similar material shall be provided over the cable after installation.

4. Where armoured cables are installed, provide continuous plastic

marking tape at 300mm above the cable indelibly marked "DANGER ELECTRIC CABLES". Install cable covers directly over the cable.

5. Backfilling of trenches using excavated soil should be rammed

down at not more than 150mm intervals. .2 Cable Ducting

1. Where cables pass through the foundations of buildings or under

paved roadways, they shall be drawn into 100mm minimum diameter pipes either: (a) Earthenware; (b) Ceramic (glazed internally); (c) Other approved.

2. Trenches for ducts shall be scooped out at all points where the

socket rests, so the body of the duct lies upon solid ground. 3. Duct entries to buildings shall be sealed with a suitable expanding

foam manufactured for the purpose. 3.3.7 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION

.1 Cable Trays

1. Tray installed shall comply with the requirements of BS 1449: Part

B by BICC or similar approved. The tray should be supported on suitable brackets such as the BICC Leprack range.

2. The tray should be capable of carrying cables in single layer

formation and with spacing as dictated in the IEE Regulations. There shall be a maximum deflection of 12mm at any point over any 250mm span.

3. Only factory formed horizontal bends will be accepted,

manufactured to the same dimensions as the tray. Cut edges shall be free of burrs.

4. Cables shall be fixed to the tray using cable cleats for larger

cables or nylon cable ties for smaller cables. If cables pass through the tray, the hole shall be suitably grometted.


Page 12 of 16

£ p

To collection:

3.3.8 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARD AND DISTRIBUTION

BOARDS .1 Switchboards

1. Switchboards shall be manufactured to the requirements of BS

5486: Part 7. 2. In general, the panel should be manufactured from sheet, suitably

rust proofed and stove enamelled or equal finish to an approved colour.

3. All units shall be complete with the appropriately rated Moulded

Case Circuit Breakers. .2 Distribution Boards

1. Distribution boards shall generally be MCB boards complete with

miniature circuit breakers unless otherwise specified. 2. All distribution boards supplied shall be complete with MCBs,

blank plates, covers and Double or Triple pole isolators as applicable. Upon completion of the project, include to supply and install typed circuit schedules in clear plastic envelopes and fixed within the lid of the board.

3. For each circuit, include on the schedule the designation of the

circuit, the final circuit type and the maximum length of run as given on the schedules.

4. Wiring to MCB boards, neutral bars and earth bar shall be

arranged so that all the connections are in the correct sequence. 5. Each neutral conductor shall have numbered sleeves to

correspond to the correct sequence on the bar. .3 Cleaning

1. On completion of the installation it is the responsibility of the

Contractor to clean all switchgear both internally and externally. Ingress of dust to distribution boards, switch fuses and cubicle panel must be vacuumed out.

2. Any damage to the cases of switchgear will be required to be

touched up or re-sprayed in entirety and at the discretion of the Contract Administrator.


Page 13 of 16

£ p

To collection:

3.3.9 LIGHTING INSTALLATION

.1 Final Circuits

1. Final circuit wiring shall be carried out using cables not less than

1.5mm2

net CSA. In general, wiring for lighting circuits shall be carried out on the "loop in" principle.

2. Generally a standard circular conduit box shall be installed to each

position, unless otherwise specified. 3. Where luminaires are to be installed flush in suspended ceiling,

final connections shall be made using white round 3-C 0.5mm2

HOFR (Heat Resistant Flex) cable from a ‘Klik’ or similar approved plug in ceiling rose mounted on the ceiling box behind the suspended ceiling.

4. Refer to particular works section for description of works and

connections. .2 Luminaires

1. All luminaires specified shall be complete with lamps specified.

These may be as an alternative to those supplied with the luminaire.

2. Final connections to luminaires shall be carried out using flexible

cables of equal CSA to the final circuit conductor. Hard wiring shall not be terminated directly into the luminaire.

3. Where final connections pass the choke or control gear of the

luminaire include heat resistant silicon sheathing. 4. Earth conductors shall be installed using Green/Yellow cable of

1.5mm2

net CSA. 5. On PVC insulated and sheathed installations, include

Green/Yellow sheath to all CPCs at switch, distribution and luminaire positions. Include Brown sheath to switch lives at switch and ceiling rose positions. PVC tape will not be accepted.

6. Switches shall be from the MK or Crabtree range unless otherwise

specified. 3.3.10 POWER INSTALLATION

.1 Accessories

1. In general, wiring accessories shall generally be as manufactured

by the following companies:-


Page 14 of 16

£ p

To collection:

(a) Crabtree Electrical Industries Ltd Lincoln Warnes, Walsall, SW1

2DN (b) M K Electric Ltd Shankberry Road, Edmonton, London N9 0PB .2 13A Switched Socket Outlets and Fixed Equipment

1. 13A Switched Socket Outlets shall generally be installed on Ring

Circuits using the cable types detailed. Spurs off ring circuits will only be permitted in special circumstances.

2. Radial circuits for items of fixed equipment shall be carried out using flexible connections as specified.

3.3.11 EARTHING ARRANGEMENTS AND PROTECTIVE

CONDUCTORS .1 General

1. In general, all earthing arrangements shall be in accordance with

the IEE Regulations.

.2 Switchgear Earthing

1. The Main Switchboard shall be provided with an earthing terminal

to consist of a copper or brass bar, fixed adjacent to the incoming cable. The earth bar should be situated in its own enclosure within the Switchgear Panel.

.3 Earthing Electrodes

1. Earth rods shall comprise 15mm diameter, 1.2m long sections

with internal screw and socket connections. Each rod shall be complete with hardened steel tips for driving.

2. Inter-connections between rods shall be carried out using purpose

made clamps below ground level and enclosed in pre-formed concrete inspection pits with removable covers.

3. The earth conductor between the Main Earth Terminal and

Electrode shall be PVC insulated cables to provide disconnecting links to allow the facility of testing.

4. Interconnections between electrodes shall be carried out using flat

copper strips to be 25mm ×5mm bare, laid at 800mm below the surface.

5. Joints shall be tinned prior to any connection, and, in the case of

tape, install 2 rivets/joints, and sweat upon completion.


Page 15 of 16

£ p

To collection:

3.3.12 INSPECTION AND TESTING

.1 General

1. The whole of the installation shall be inspected and tested in

accordance with the requirements of the IEE Regulations and British Standards.

2. Upon completion of testing and inspection, the Contractor shall

forward to the Contract Administrator, copies of Test and Inspection Certificates on NICEIC Forms

.2 Test Equipment

1. Test Equipment shall be correctly calibrated and certified for the

limits of accuracy necessary. If an instrument used is considered suspect it shall be tested by an authorised standard testing laboratory.

3.3.13 LABELLING AND IDENTIFICATION

The Contractor shall provide and fix identification labels and to all items of plant including busbar tap-off units, switches, fused switches, distribution boards, cables etc. Labels shall be attached to each switch by a secure approved means and shall indicate the following:

The reference number of the switch as designated by the particular specification. The specified current rating. The size and number of cores of the cable controlled. The distribution board or equipment controlled. Any other information as required by relevant standards or codes. Labels fitted on distribution boards shall be in accordance with those for switches and shall indicate the following: The reference number of the board. Type of board, i.e. lighting, socket outlets, etc.

Size of cable supply to the board. Where to isolate the feeder. Labels shall be fitted to all Sub mains cables, at 5m centres along their length, and shall be secured by means of plastic strapping. The labels shall be manufactured from engraved ‘traffolyte’ to a colour code agreed with the Consulting Engineer.


Page 16 of 16

£ p

To collection:

Labels shall be generally not less than 75mm x 50mm provided with upper case lettering of a suitable height but in any case letters shall not be less than 3mm in height. All items of equipment enclosing conductors connected to more than one phase shall be provided with labels stating "DANGER 415 VOLTS". These labels shall be manufactured from engraved traffolyte, red on white, and fixed to the equipment by a secure approved means. A schedule of labelling giving suggested layouts and inscriptions shall be submitted to the Consulting Engineer for his approval before manufacture and installation. Additional labelling shall be provided for any special requirement that may be provided in the particular sections of this Specification. Within the main low voltage switchroom the Contractor shall allow to supply and install an A1 sized printed schematic of the main and sub main distribution low voltage distribution network, of a non-fading durable nature fixed to the switchroom wall.

3.3.13 INFORMATION AND ‘AS INSTALLED’ DRAWINGS

1. Upon completion of the project the Electrical Contractor shall

supply an Operation and Maintenance Manual and "As Installed" drawings of the project.

2. A draft of the documents shall be handed over by the Contractor

three weeks before practical completion and two copies of the final documents shall be handed over within three weeks of practical completion, along with 1 additional copy on CD.

3. The Manual shall include Health and Safety Information, Adequate

instructions for operating and maintaining the system, copies of all relevant test and inspection certificates, and copies of manufacturers’ literature.

4. As installed drawings shall be in the form of CD compatible with

AutoCAD 2000 or later, accompanied by one paper print per drawing. The contractor may be required to supply additional drawings as requested by the Contract Administrator. These drawings are over and above drawings supplied as part of O&M manual.


Page 1 of 22

SECTION 4.4

ELECTRICAL SERVICES

PARTICULAR WORKS


Page 2 of 22

S Section 4.4 Electrical Services Particular Works

4.4 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................. 3

4.4.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................ 3

4.4.1.1 SCOPE OF WORKS ............................................................................. 3

4.4.2 RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR ................. 3

4.4.3 REGULATIONS, STANDARDS AND DESIGN CRITERIA ................... 4

4.4.3.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................ 4

4.4.4 ASBESTOS .......................................................................................... 6

4.4.5 ELECTRICAL STRIP OUT WORKS ..................................................... 6

4.4.6 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY ....................................................................... 6

4.4.7 METERING ........................................................................................... 6

4.4.8 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION ......................................................... 6

4.2.9 LIGHTING INSTALLATION .................................................................. 9

4.2.10 EMERGENCY LIGHTING INSTALLATION .......................................... 9

4.2.11 EXTERNAL LIGHTING INSTALLATION ............................................ 10

4.4.12 SMALL POWER ................................................................................. 10

4.4.13 WIRING SYSTEMS ............................................................................ 12

4.4.14 SECURITY ALARM INSTALLATION ................................................. 13

4.4.15 FIRE ALARM ...................................................................................... 14

4.4.16 TELEPHONE INSTALLATION ........................................................... 15

4.4.17 DATA.................................................................................................. 16

4.4.18 FACILITIES FOR THE DISABLED ..................................................... 17

4.4.19 MECHANICAL SERVICES WIRING ................................................... 18

4.4.20 DOOR ACCESS SYSTEM .................................................................. 18

4.4.21 MOUNTING HEIGHTS ....................................................................... 19

4.4.22 EARTHING AND BONDING ............................................................... 19

4.4.23 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ..................................................... 20

4.4.24 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION ......................... 21

4.4.25 CONTRACT INFORMATION .............................................................. 22

4.4.26 ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS ............................................................. 22

4.4.27 BUILDERS WORK ............................................................................. 22


Page 3 of 22

£ p

To collection:

4.4 INTRODUCTION 4.4.1 GENERAL

a) The purpose of this part of the specification is to outline the Electrical Engineering services to be incorporated within the refurbishment of the existing Wellness Centre to suit the new proposed redevelopment.

b) The Electrical Services Installer shall be responsible for the installation of the electrical services described in this specification and illustrated on the electrical services drawings. All services shall be co-coordinated installed and commissioned by the Services Installer.

c) Designer, Structural and Building Services Engineer’s drawings and specification and any other supplemental information which comprises the primary documentation.

4.4.1.1 SCOPE OF WORKS

The refurbishment involves an existing two storey building to be completed with new main reception, counselling rooms, staff facilities, offices and meeting rooms.

Works will involve alterations to the existing site services and the installation of new electrical & mechanical services throughout the site.

FORM OF CONSTRUCTION

The building is of masonry construction under a pitched roof fixed plaster board ceilings. Walls and partitions will be of plaster finish.

4.4.2 RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR

The works consist of the co-ordination supply installation setting to work and commissioning of the complete electrical service. The works can be summarised but not limited to the following:

a) The contractor shall SURVEY EXISTING INSTALLATION ON SITE BEFORE TENDER.

b) The provision and issue of FULL WORKING DRAWINGS for the new installations.

c) Provide, install and set to work the complete lighting installation to all areas.


Page 4 of 22

£ p

To collection:

d) Provide, install and set to work the complete small power services to all areas.

e) Provide alterations to existing fire alarm system to suit new layout.

f) Provide alterations to existing security system to suit new layouts & wire ways for a new door entry system.

g) Provide alterations to existing Data Installation system to suit new

layout. h) Provide alterations to existing Telephone containment & cabling

system to suit new layout. i) Provide and install supplies to ventilation systems. j) Provide and install supplies air conditioning systems. k) Provide full test certificates for new systems installed. l) Test certificates shall be provided to BS7671. These shall be issued

before these areas are handed over to the client. m) Include for a complete test and inspection of the specialist services

i.e. fire alarm, security alarm, etc and provide the relevant test certificates. These shall be issued before these areas are handed over to the client.

n) Include for employing the lighting & control manufacture to commission the lighting system in accordance with CIBSE Lighting Guides.

o) Provide full test certificates for new systems installed.

All in accordance with the drawings and this technical specification.

4.4.3 REGULATIONS, STANDARDS AND DESIGN CRITERIA 4.4.3.1 GENERAL All materials and work carried out will be in accordance with the

standards specified and will conform to:

1) BS 7671: 2008:2011 -Requirements for Electrical Installations -IEE Wiring Regulations Seventeenth Edition (hereinafter referred to as the IEE Regulations) including any amendments, as and when issued.

2) Building Regulations.


Page 5 of 22

£ p

To collection:

3) Electricity Safety, Quality and Continuity Regulations 2002.

4) Factories Act including Electricity (Factories Act) Special Regulations, 1961.

5) Requirements of the Health and Safety Executive under the Health and Safety at Work Act.

6) Requirements of the Regional Electricity Company.

7) Relevant British Standard Specification and/or Codes of Practice for materials and equipment and method of installation.

8) Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers Codes and Technical Memoranda.

9) The Electricity at Work Regulations, 1989.

10) The Control of Pollution Act.

11) COSHH (Control of Substances Hazardous to Health) Regulations.

12) Requirements of the Local Authorities.

a) Environmental Health Department b) Building Control Officer

13) Requirements of Insurance Companies concerned.

14) Requirements of the Fire Authority.

15) Such other regulations and statutory devices as may from time to time apply.

16) The Construction Design and Management (CDM) Regulations. 17) (BSCP) British Standard Code of Practice BS 7594 for Audio

Frequency Induction Loop Systems (AFILS) BS EN 60118-4:2006 18) Ingleton Wood LLP Electrical Specification. 19) Ingleton Wood LLP Mechanical Specification.


Page 6 of 22

£ p

To collection:

4.4.4 ASBESTOS

The Contractor shall note that Asbestos may be present within the existing building, the contractor shall review the site asbestos register prior to commencement of works.

It is the Electrical Services Installers responsibility to review the

asbestos document to satisfy himself that he has fully understood the methods of work required should works around asbestos identified areas are included in his tender. No additional cost will be considered if the information supplied and as above is misinterpreted/ ignored.

If during the course of the works material suspected of being

asbestos is found, that is not already identified in the asbestos report, works must be stopped immediately and the CA informed. A Client appointed specialist contractor will be responsible for the identification, removal and making safe of any asbestos found. These works will not form part of this specification and contract.

4.4.5 ELECTRICAL STRIP OUT WORKS

The Electrical Services Installer shall survey the area of works for the existing property and then allow to trace, identify, adapt existing circuits where necessary as shown on the associated drawings.

The contractor shall allow for co-ordination of the strip out works

with the proposed electrical services layout drawings and retain existing outlets and circuits noted on the drawings. The contractor shall allow for modification of existing circuits and wiring to suit new electrical services layout.

4.4.6 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY The existing incoming supplies to the existing building shall remain

as existing.

4.4.7 METERING

The existing metering to the existing building shall remain as existing.

4.4.8 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION The supply for the building shall originate from the existing external

mains intake.


Page 7 of 22

£ p

To collection:

All boards shall be as manufactured by Eaton MEM; DB P - 12way Type B EBM182 c/w EBMS1251N Switch

disconnector kit (including single phasing link) DB L - 6way Type B EBM61 c/w EBMS1251N Switch

disconnector kit (including single phasing link) An Eaton MEM EBMXDC6 enclosure shall be mounted adjacent to

DB L for external lighting timeclock / contactor. All distribution boards shall incorporate the following elements: • Labelling and blanking plates for unused spaces Any damage to cable sheath insulation during the cabling

installation shall be made good using heat shrink sleeving coloured black.

Final circuits supplying general power socket outlets shall be

provided with earth leakage current protection. RCBO's shall be provided for the circuit protection unless otherwise specified. The RCBO’s shall utilise no more than 1-way on the distribution board and be rated at 30mA.

Distribution board/Circuits serving high integrity circuits shall use

additional Eaton earth bars EBMNE8. Refer to distribution schedules for details including board sizes,

protective device sizes and cable sizes. Metering The installer shall use the enclosure mentioned above for sub

metering of both distribution boards. Sub-meters shall have a pulse output facility for future connection to a BMS system.

Connections to be made as per manufacturer’s instructions. Where

the distribution board already has an enclosure adjacent for external timeclock control and contactor, this enclosure shall be suitably sized to accommodate the sub-meter also.

The meters shall be Crompton Instruments model DRK-1PCT-240

for single phase. An MCB shall be fitted to a spare way of the board to supply the meter.


Page 8 of 22

£ p

To collection:

Labels Distribution boards and enclosures shall be installed with traffolyte

type labelling and secured using nuts and bolts. On no account are self adhesive labels to be used.

All switchgear / isolators shall be fully labelled i.e. circuit ref, fed

from, cable size etc in accordance with BS 7671. The Electrical Services Installer shall ensure that all switchgear,

distribution boards and controls enclosures carry the appropriate hazard warning labels to identify the presence of electricity and whether they are single phase or three phase.

Electric Shock Treatment notices shall be fixed at the main

switchgear/metering position. Provide all labelling / warning labels in accordance to the

requirements of all the new wiring colours for the electrical installation.

All the electrical services shall be fully tested, commissioned and

appropriate certification. Comprehensive typed circuit schedules mounted in a laminated

protected frame shall be provided to all switchgear / distribution boards which have been modified.

Installation Strategy The electrical installation in the building shall be provided as

follows:- All new cabling installed clipped direct or Beta strap/ universal

binding neatly above the ceiling. Cabling drops from this containment system shall be enclosed in

galvanised steel conduit for non-RCD protected circuits and heavy duty PVC conduit for RCD protected circuits. All conduit drops shall be enclosed within the fabric of the building. Where indicated multiple power and data in offices shall be enclosed within dado trunking.

Where dado trunking is installed cabling shall be run to enter in the

corner where possible at high level into the dado. The dado trunking will then run vertically down and around the room to serve various desk positions.


Page 9 of 22

£ p

To collection:

4.2.9 LIGHTING INSTALLATION The lighting shall be provided to all areas as detailed in the electrical

specification and on the drawings. The lighting shall be wired in XLPE insulated LSF sheathed cables

with integral CPC (6242B) above the ceiling with conduits drops flush in the wall, generally as indicated on the electrical, schematic drawings and sizes shall be as detailed in the distribution board schedules.

The lighting will comply with current CIBSE lighting requirements. In general the lighting will be controlled as follows:-

Lighting in the offices / general use spaces shall be controlled via local switches.

Lighting in Stores, toilets, shall be controlled via occupancy light

sensor.

Lighting in the Kitchen / Kitchenette areas shall be controlled via occupancy light sensor and override light switch.

Lighting in the corridor area shall be illuminated by fluorescent

luminaries mounted in the plasterboard ceiling, which shall be controlled via occupancy light sensors.

All cabling and containment shall be provided in line to the Manufacturer’s requirements. 4.2.10 EMERGENCY LIGHTING INSTALLATION The lighting shall be provided to all areas as detailed in the electrical

specification and on the drawings. The emergency lighting shall be provided by factory conversions of

the standard light fittings which shall be self-test facility to provide 3 hour emergency use duration to comply with BS 5266.

The emergency lighting generally shall be non-maintained lights

except for all the exit signs which shall be maintained type. These lights shall be wired so that they are only on when the main lights are on.

The emergency lighting shall be wired in XLPE insulated LSF

sheathed cables in the same manner as within the lighting section.


Page 10 of 22

£ p

To collection:

The emergency lighting shall be fully tested, commissioned and appropriate certification shall be produced in accordance with BS 5266 at end of each phase of works.

4.2.11 EXTERNAL LIGHTING INSTALLATION External General / Emergency lighting shall be provided to the

building as detailed on the associated drawings. All external lighting shall be controlled via time clock and photocells. External car park lighting shall be served in XLPE/SWA/LSF cabling. 4.4.12 SMALL POWER A complete low voltage cabling and outlet installation to serve the

small power needs of the building to BS 7671: 2008(2011) shall be provided.

General: Wiring to socket outlets and general power outlets shall be carried

out using XLPE insulated, LSF sheathed cables with integral CPC (6242B) routed in ceiling voids and with flush drop protected as described elsewhere within this specification.

Socket outlets shall be recessed and mounted at 450mm AFFL.

Accessories shall be manufactured by MK Ltd their Logic plus range

finish white. All socket outlets shall be the type described on the drawings having

dual earth terminals and on/off switches set towards the side of the plate, the circuit protective conductors of the ring circuit shall be made off into separate set of terminals.

On no account are the circuit protective conductors to be connected

into the same terminal with the individual outlet and the MCB distribution Board.

Ventilation Equipment: Wall/Ceiling mounted extract fans shall be connected to the local

lighting circuit of that room. If the local lighting circuit is not controlled via a presence detector then one shall be installed for the fan. 3 pole isolation switch shall be installed. Refer to mechanical equipment schedules for further clarification.

Details of extract fans and local isolation can be found on the

Mechanical Services drawing.


Page 11 of 22

£ p

To collection:

Separate presence detectors shall be allowed to control extract fans

and shall be supplied and installed by the Electrical Services Installer. Presence detectors are to be mounted flush in the ceiling finish. Where the Presence detector ONLY switches a fan or fan & damper the associated indicating fused connection unit shall be wall mounted at 50mm below the finished ceiling level.

Where extract fans are switched in conjunction with lights the feed

shall be taken from the lighting circuit via a fused connection unit. Disabled Person Toilet Alarm: Alarm call systems are to be provided within the access WC as

indicated on the drawings. The system shall be as marketed by C-TEC NC951 system having

power supply unit incorporating a battery back up to maintain operation during mains power failure periods, reset unit, emergency pull switch and over door audio / visual alarm. A repeater display/buzzer is to be installed in the main Reception.

Air Conditioning/Cooling Units – Internal: The Electrical Services Installer shall supply and install a fused

connection unit in a convenient location to supply the power requirements to the internal ceiling and wall mounted units. Controls to be installed as indicated within the mechanical services specifications. Refer to mechanical drawings for exact positions of internal units.

External Condensing Units: The Electrical Services Installer shall provide and install electrical

supplies to all external condenser units in a convenient location adjacent to each unit. The electrical supply shall terminate within an IP65 rotary isolator suitably sized to the rating of the circuit. Controls to be installed as indicated within the mechanical services specifications. Refer to mechanical drawings for exact positions of external condensing units.

IT Cabinet Power Supply A new IT cabinet is to be installed within the first floor IT Store. A

dedicated supply shall be installed to the IT cabinet along with a 10mm² single G/Y CPC from DB P’s main earth bar.

Key switch operated fused connection unit to comprise MK grid

switch plus components to be installed with flexible cord. The Electrical Services Installer shall allow to make final connections to the Data Specialist’s rack mounted PDU.


Page 12 of 22

£ p

To collection:

Fire Alarm Panel Supply A 10 amp single phase supply is to be installed to supply power to

the fire alarm panel. A 20 amp double pole lockable fire alarm isolator switch (MK K4780WHI) to be installed adjacent to the panel. The Electrical Services Installer is to ensure that the cable installed between the local isolator and the panel is no less than 2.5mm².

General All electrical services and containment system shall be fire stopped,

acoustic sealed around the services which are passing through the walls, partitions and below the raised floor areas.

The Electrical Services Installer shall allow a contingency of two man days for unforeseen works.

The Electrical Services Installer shall not invoice these works unless

provided with an appropriate instruction. 4.4.13 WIRING SYSTEMS

In general all wiring shall be carried out using the types of cable indicated on the drawings and described elsewhere in this Specification. Fire Alarm Cabling The fire alarm system wiring shall be carried out using 2 core “softskin” fire rated cables with an overall OHLS sheath coloured red (as Draka UK Firetuf) installed in flush galvanised conduit in walls, concealed within ceiling voids/spaces. These cables shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and BS5839 Section 26.2 Recommendations. Methods of cable support should be such that circuit integrity will not be reduced below that afforded by the cable used, and should withstand similar temperature and duration to that of the cable, while maintaining adequate support. In effect this precludes the use of plastic clips, cable ties or trunking where these products are the sole means of support. Fire alarm cabling within ceiling voids to be installed onto dedicated cable trays or fixed directly to the fabric of the building using P clips. Cabling installed for drops to accessories to be installed within a suitable galvanised conduit system. Sub Circuit Cabling - RCD/RCBO Protected Sub-circuit wiring in general, shall be carried out using XLPE insulated, LSF sheathed cables with integral earth continuity conductor.


Page 13 of 22

£ p

To collection:

The cables shall be installed within ceiling voids/spaces with drops enclosed in high impact plastic conduits, installed in the cavity between concrete wall panel’s plasterboard linings or installed flush within plaster walls. Where surface installation is required, cabling is to be contained within an appropriate sized conduit / trunking containment system. Where outlets are to be fitted onto dado or skirting trunking the wiring shall enter via vertical surface dado trunking drops or flush conduits as indicated on the drawings. Multi cable runs within ceiling/roof voids shall be supported on appropriately sized steel cable tray or cable basket.

Sub Circuit Cabling - MCB Protected Sub-circuit wiring in general, shall be carried out using XLPE insulated, LSF sheathed cables with integral earth continuity conductor.

The cables shall be installed within ceiling voids/spaces with drops enclosed in an earthed galvanised conduit containment system installed in the cavity between concrete wall panels and plasterboard linings or installed flush within plaster walls. Where outlets are to be fitted onto dado or skirting trunking the wiring shall enter via vertical surface dado trunking drops or flush conduits as indicated on the drawings. Multi cable runs within ceiling/roof voids shall be supported on appropriately sized steel cable tray or cable basket.

4.4.14 SECURITY ALARM INSTALLATION

The Electrical Services Installer shall modify the existing intruder alarm system to suit the new layout as indicated on the drawings. The existing intruder control panel is located in the ground floor store room adjacent to the side entrance.

The Electrical Services Installer shall employ the Client’s preferred Security specialist to modify the existing security alarm installation to the existing building to suit the proposed layouts on the associated drawings. The work to the security alarm system shall comply with all current standards and regulations. The system shall comprise of presence movement detectors, door contacts to all external doors.


Page 14 of 22

£ p

To collection:

The security alarm system shall be fully tested and commissioned by the contractor and the appropriate documentation; certification shall be produced at the end the works.

All security alarm services and containment system shall be fire stopped, acoustic sealed around the services which are passing through the walls, partitions and below the raised floor areas. It is the responsibility of the Electrical services installer to ensure that the quotation provided by the security specialist reflects the correct quantities indicated on the drawings The Electrical Services Installer shall allow a contingency of two working man days for unforeseen works. The Electrical Services Installer shall not invoice these works unless provided with an appropriate instruction.

4.4.15 FIRE ALARM The Electrical Services Installer shall include for employing a fire

alarm specialist supply and install a new fire alarm system as detailed in the specification and on the drawing.

New compatible fire alarm services shall be installed from the new

fire alarm panel to throughout the building as indicated on the alarm layout drawings.

Fire Alarm Interface Units shall be provided for:

All access controlled doors;

Open automatic doors;

The fire alarm system shall be installed in accordance with BS 5839 and coverage L2.

All new devices to be wired onto new 1.5mm² 2-core Fire Tuf / FP-

200 cabling. Equipment New equipment and devices shall be supplied and installed as

indicated on the drawings and the Electrical Services Installer is to ensure that all such equipment and devices are compatible with and suitable for connection to the existing system.

Manual call points shall be flush mounted as with flush fixing plate.


Page 15 of 22

£ p

To collection:

The Electrical Services Installer shall provide pattress for all fire alarm detectors mounted on ceilings and shall make sure all works and costs shall be included for in the submitted tender figure.

Commissioning Upon completion of the works, the fire alarm system shall be fully

commissioned. The Electrical Services Installer shall make all arrangements for

commissioning and shall include for an electrician to be present during the commissioning to carry out any remedial works that may become apparent. All testing shall be coordinated to be carried out outside normal working hours.

Where the Main Contractor’s works involve phase completion dates

the Electrical Services Installer is to include for the appropriate number of commissioning visits to ensure that the system in the occupied parts are operating correctly.

The Electrical Services Installer is to obtain information regarding

the Main Contractor’s proposed construction and completion programme before submitting his tender and is to allow for this in his price.

The commissioning certificates MUST be available before hand over

of the building works take place. All fire alarm services and containment system shall be fire stopped,

acoustic sealed around the services which are passing through the walls, partitions and below the raised floor areas.

The Electrical Services Installer shall allow a contingency of two

man days for unforeseen works. The Electrical Services Installer shall not invoice these works unless

provided with an appropriate instruction. 4.4.16 TELEPHONE INSTALLATION The existing telephone system shall be retained and modified to suit

the new proposed layout as indicated on the drawings. The Electrical Services Installer’s Data Specialist shall allow for the

relocation of the existing Telephone boxes to the new IT store on the first floor to suit the client’s requirements. The Electrical Services Installer shall provide containment for this.

Standard telephones are to be supplied, installed and patched in by

the clients existing provider.


Page 16 of 22

£ p

To collection:

Equipment Electrical Services Installer is to ensure that all new equipment and

devices are compatible with and suitable for connection to the existing system.

The system is to be fully tested, commissioned and configured to

the client’s requirements. 4.4.17 DATA Provisions for IT CAT 6 cabling by others is to be made by the

Electrical Services Installer and is to consist of one gang 42mm deep outlet boxes each with a 25mm dia minimum steel conduit rising to above the ceiling void and terminating adjacent to the wire basket with a brass ring bush fitted at its end complete with draw wire.

The Electrical Services Installer shall where possible ensure that

where data cables and mains voltage power cables are run alongside each other they are at least 50mm apart when separated by a metallic divider, 400mm when a metallic divider is not present and shall only pass each other at 90° to minimise interference.

The Electrical Services Installer is to include for PVC trunking drops

from the ceiling void to the hub cabinet to contain IT cabling only. New System The new data system shall be wired utilising UTP CAT 6 LSF (low

smoke and fume) cabling from each point location back to the designated cabinet position as shown on the drawings.

Prior to any works commencing, the Electrical Services Installer

shall confirm the position of the cabinet and adjust the installation accordingly.

The electrical services installer shall provide and install 1Nr 18U wall

mounted data cabinet to be located within the first floor IT Server cupboard.

The Electrical Services installer shall allow for terminals at both

ends, i.e. each point location and the patch panel in the cabinet position.

The Electrical Services Installer/Specialist shall liaise fully with the

client as to the provision, position and requirements of space within the cabinet for active equipment.


Page 17 of 22

£ p

To collection:

IT Cabling System The Electrical Services Installer shall include for a Data Specialist

installer to supply and install the IT cabling system throughout the existing building.

The Electrical Services Installer shall ensure that the Data Specialist

is in full possession of, prices for and installs the system to comply with the Client’s requirements and the details shown on the accompanying drawings.

Telephone System The Data Specialist shall size, supply and install a multi-core cable

and associated patch panel as detailed in the Telephone section of this specification.

Data Specialist Installer The Electrical Services Installer is to submit as part of their tender

package their data cabling specialist installers details / proposals. Interactive White Boards & Wall/Ceiling Mounted Projectors The specialist installer shall provide & install the VGA / HDMI cable

links complete with outlet plates for the audio/visual (A/V) to the ceiling mounted Projector. VGA cable end connections to be terminated on site to facilitate installation in conduits.

Adjacent to the interactive white board the Electrical Services

Installer shall allow to install a vertical dado drop. Within this dado drop the Electrical Services Installer shall allow for back boxes for the A/V specialist to wire to.

The Electrical Services Installer shall allow for containment and

back boxes for all A/V containment. The Electrical Services Installer is to include as part of their tender

package the supply, installation and commission of the Interactive White Board and Projector installation and submit this proposal as part of their tender package.

It is the responsibility of Electrical Services Installer to ensure that the quotation provided by the specialist installer reflects the correct quantities indicated on the drawings.

4.4.18 FACILITIES FOR THE DISABLED Toilet Alarm The disabled WC system shall be as marketed by C-TEC NC951

system having power supply unit incorporating a battery back up to maintain operation during mains power failure periods, reset unit, emergency pull switch and over door audio / visual alarm.


Page 18 of 22

£ p

To collection:

When activated the disabled alarm shall operate the associated remote lamp and tone unit, mounted external to the toilet cubicle above the door head

A remote lamp and tone unit shall also be installed within the

reception as indicated on the drawings. Induction Loop System The Electrical Service Installer shall allow for the provision of two

portable induction loop units as marketed by C-TEC PL1. These shall be handed over to the client upon completion of the works.

4.4.19 MECHANICAL SERVICES WIRING The electrical contractor shall supply and install fused connection

outlets and mains isolator adjacent to the mechanical plant as shown on the Mechanical Installers drawings.

The electrical contractor shall feed the mechanical services from the

local distribution board. External supplies shall be in multi core SWA cables.

All ways shall be clearly labelled. Final connections to all of the mechanical plant shall be by the

Electrical Services Installer. The systems are, but not limited to extract fans, controllers, and A/C supplies.

4.4.20 DOOR ACCESS SYSTEM Alterations to the existing main door entry and access system is to

be included for by the contractor. The Electrical Services Installer shall allow for installation and supply of electrical supplies to power supplies and wire-ways to keypads, door release press to exit units and emergency break glass units as indicated on the drawing.

The systems shall be interfaced with the fire alarm system such that

an alarm signal will disable the system to allow:

Unimpeded egress from the building;

Open the main entrance foyer doors; The Electrical Services Installer shall allow to be in attendance to

agree drop/chase positions of keypads accessories, etc. which will need to have conduits installed / first fixed.

The Electrical Services Installer shall supply and fix flush back

boxes for the various components. Final positions of equipment to be confirmed.


Page 19 of 22

£ p

To collection:

4.4.21 MOUNTING HEIGHTS For tender purposes the mounting heights, to centre line of

components, are to be assumed as:

Lighting switches at 1100mm

Socket outlets etc, not on trunking systems at 450mm

Dado trunking (TBC)

Outlets noted as “H/L” at 2200mm

Fire alarm call points at 1100mm

Fire alarm sounders at 2200mm 4.4.22 EARTHING AND BONDING The electrical contractor shall verify the existing earthing and

bonding system is in accordance with BS7671 to the building. Provide protective and functional earthing arrangements for the

electrical system for the purpose of limiting the potential of current carrying conductors forming part of the system and non-current carrying metalwork associated with equipment connected to the system.

A complete supply system; earthing and equipment earthing

arrangements shall be provided to maintain a complete equipotential zone within the building.

The system shall include equipotential bonds to all necessary

elements of the mechanical and electrical services installations, and any necessary exposed or extraneous conductive parts of the building structure or fabric and shall connect to the following:

Electrical supply systems.

Main Incoming Services / Utilities intakes, e.g. water, gas.

Mechanical services plant.

Exposed conductive pipework.

Exposed conductive metalwork associated with containment including cable tray, trunking, and conduit.

Exposed extraneous conductive parts of the building structure. Every electrical circuit shall be provided with its own individual CPC

throughout its entire route of the circuit. The Electrical Services Installer shall confirm that all services

entering the building including water, gas, services leaving the plant room including cold water pipework etc are satisfactory.


Page 20 of 22

£ p

To collection:

Bonding shall be provided for all extraneous conductive parts, structural steelwork and as required.

Structural steelwork, members, staircases, handrails etc shall be

effectively bonded, and it shall be indicated that appropriate measures have been carried out when submitting completion documentation.

Bonding conductors shall be secured to cable trays and other metal

containment throughout their entire length using proprietary fixings. Within each room / area all extraneous conductive parts shall be

connected to the earthing system via supplementary bonding conductors. These conductors shall derive from the electrical installation accessory earthing terminal and shall be contained by the LV cable management system.

External electrical equipment shall be weatherproof and corrosion

resistant to marine grade. 4.4.23 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING The electrical contractor shall carry out all testing of the complete

electrical installation (including the existing circuits) in accordance with the IEE Regulations BS7671 and provide fully detailed test results on NICEIC forms.

The full ECA or NICEIC test and inspection certificates are to be

produced and presented to the CA for verification. On the electrical test and inspection certificate the electrical

contractor shall indicate the next Electrical condition report shall take place in 5 years.

This is to include wiring inspection and testing, emergency lighting,

security systems, data cabling tests and fire alarm system. Copies of the test instrument calibration certificates are to be

provided by the Electrical Services Installer with test certificates. The fire alarm installation shall be tested and a new certification

shall be provided for the complete installation in accordance with BS 5839 for construction, installation, design and testing.

A test certificate shall be provided for the new emergency lighting

installation in accordance with BS 5266: 2011.


Page 21 of 22

£ p

To collection:

A test certificate shall be provided for the security alarm, door access systems, induction loops and specialist services where applicable.

Testing certificates shall be provided for the voice and data

installation. The electrical contractor shall allow to offer to the consultant

witnessing of the installed and tested installation after the contractor’s testing.

The certificate is to form part of the Operation and Maintenance

Manual with the original certificate. All switches, socket outlets and fused connection units shall be

provided with a self-adhesive printed label of its relevant circuit placed on the outlet/switch.

4.4.24 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

Provide a comprehensive Operating and Maintenance Manual to cover all the works detailed within this specification. The manual shall include:

Health and Safety recommendations

Description of installation

Manufacturer’s information

Operation instructions

Fault finding procedures

Emergency Procedures

Maintenance recommendations

“As installed” drawings

Test certificates

The O&M Manual should contain maintenance procedures, details of all equipment installed, test and inspection Certificates for the electrical wiring, emergency lighting and Fire alarm installation. The Health and Safety Manual shall also form part of the O&M Manual and be integral part of the same file.

Copies of the as fitted drawings are to be included in the manual

with the hard copies to be in A1 format and the DVD-Rom copies are to consist of CAD drawings and PDF copies.

Two paper copies of the manual shall be provided together with an

interactive PDF copy on DVD, with drawings in a form compatible with AutoCAD 2010 and in PDF format. The paper copies shall be bound in stout A4 ring binders.


Page 22 of 22

£ p

To collection:

A draft copy of the manual shall be handed over for comment a minimum of THREE weeks prior to Practical Completion.

Forward final copy of the O & M, Health & Safety documentation

and Technical Literature for as installed products to CA no later than 1 weeks before completion. Practical completion will not be issued until documentation has been received to the CA's satisfaction.

4.4.25 CONTRACT INFORMATION

On the successful contractor being appointed and the placing of a contract document for the works a full schedule of rates is to be provided by the electrical contractor. This schedule will form part of the contract documents and "No" additional works will be paid unless the schedule is agreed and in place prior to starting on site.

4.4.26 ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS

If the tenderer wishes to offer alternative materials to those listed in this specification any design calculations (i.e. lighting levels) are to be produced in evidence with compliance with regulations and given to the CA for verification before authorisation for use by the contractor. Written authorisation must be received by the contractor for their use from the CA. No alternative materials are to be used without authorisation of the electrical consultant.

The contractor will be solely responsible for the design where these

materials are agreed to be used and any operating problems will be deemed to be the responsibility of the contractor.

If the tenderer wishes to offer alternative materials to those listed in

this specification are to be listed in the appropriate section of the tender return document in the section provided. If no alternative materials are listed with the tender return then no alternative materials will be considered. The specified materials must be used for the tender and priced for the tender to be valid.

4.4.27 BUILDERS WORK

The electrical contractor will be responsible for all holes up to 25mm diameter and the builder for all remaining builders’ works.




Page 1 of 11

APPENDIX A

ELECTRICAL SERVICES

MANUFACTURERS SCHEDULES




Page 2 of 11

PREFERRED MANUFACTURERS

Socket Outlets

MK Logic Plus White

Light Switches

MK Logic Plus White

Fused Connection Units MK Logic Plus White

Trunking

MK Prestige 3D

Disabled Toilet Alarm

C-TEC

Data Installer Proposed by Electrical Services Installer for approval

Telephone Cabling By Data Installer

Door Entry

Included within Main Contractor’s Package

Security

As Per Existing

Fire Alarm

As Per Existing

Projectors & Interactive

Whiteboards

Proposed by Electrical Services Installer for approval




Page 3 of 11

APPENDIX B

DISTRIBUTION BOARD SCHEDULES




PROJECT:

PROJECT No:

LOCATION:

Engineer: CB Date: 1-Dec-13 Revision:

Existing Isolator:

Way No

Protective

Device Rating

(A)

Protective Device

Type

Cable Size

(mm²)Cable Type RCD

1 6 60898 1.5 6491B

2 6 60898 1.5 6491B

3 6 60898 1.5 6491B

4 6 60898 1.5 6491B

5 6 60898 1.5 6491B

6 6 60898 1.5 6491B

7 6 60898 1.5 6491B

8 - - - - -

9 6 60898 1.5 6491B

10 6 60898 1.5 6491B

11 6 60898 1.5 6491B

12 6 60898 1.5 6491B

13 - - - - -

14 6 60898 2.5 6491B 30

15 6 60898 2.5 6491B 30

16 6 60898 2.5 6491B 30

17 - - - - -

18 - - - - -

Note:

FINAL CIRCUIT BOARD SCHEDULE

DISTRIBUTION BOARD REF: DBL Colchester Mind

42353

Reception

T0

No. of SP&N Ways: 24 way Protective Devices:

Sub-Main Supply Cable: Integral 60A. SP&N Switch

Circuit Description

GF LTG Circuit - Meeting Room , Managers Office

GF LTG Circuit - Activity/Family Room & Counselling Rm 3

GF LTG Circuit - Corridor

GF LTG Circuit - HR Office, Cleaners Store, WC

GF LTG Circuit - Reception, Kitchenette

GF LTG Circuit - Waiting Room, DDA WC, Lobby

GF LTG Circuit - Counselling Rm 1, Counselling Rm 2

SPARE

FF LTG Circuit - Office 2, CEO Office, Fund Raising Office

All Circuits to be provided with CPC sized in accordance with Table 54G of BS 7671:2008, the 17th Edition IEE Wiring regulations.

CPC's shall either comprise a separate conductor or shall be part of a multicore cable or cable armouring.

FF LTG Circuit - Corridor

FF LTG Circuit - Server Room, Staff Area, Male WC, Female WC

FF LTG Circuit - Office 1

SPARE

External LTG Circuit 1



SPARE

SPARE




PROJECT:

PROJECT No:

LOCATION:

Engineer: CB Date: 1-Dec-13 Revision:

Existing Isolator:

Way No

Protective

Device Rating

(A)

Protective Device

Type

Cable Size

(mm²)Cable Type RCD

1 32 61009 2.5 6491B 30

2 32 61009 2.5 6491B 30

3 32 61009 2.5 6491B 30

4 32 61009 2.5 6491B 30

5 32 61009 2.5 6491B 30

6 32 61009 2.5 6491B 30

7 32 61009 2.5 6491B 30

8 32 61009 2.5 6491B 30

9 16 61009 2.5 6491B 30

10 32 61009 2.5 6491B 30

11 32 61009 2.5 6491B 30

12 32 61009 2.5 6491B 30

13 32 61009 2.5 6491B 30

14 32 61009 2.5 6491B 30

15 10 60898 2.5 6491B -

16 32 60898 6.0 6724 SWA/LSZH

17 32 60898 6.0 6724 SWA/LSZH

18 32 60898 2.5 6242B

19 32 60898 2.5 6242B

20 16 61009 2.5 6242B

21 32 61009 2.5 6491B 30

22 - - - - -

23 - - - - -

24 - - - - -

25 - - - - -

26 - - - - -

27 - - - - -

28 16 60898 2.5 6491B

29 32 60898 2.5 6491B

30 - - - - -

31 - - - - -

32 - - - - -

33 6 60898 2.5 6491B

34 6 60898 2.5 6491B

35 6 60898 2.5 6491B

36 6 60898 2.5 6491B

Note:All Circuits to be provided with CPC sized in accordance with Table 54G of BS 7671:2008, the 17th Edition IEE Wiring regulations.

CPC's shall either comprise a separate conductor or shall be part of a multicore cable or cable armouring.

Spare

Door Access Controls

Disabled Alarm Panel

IT Supply

Automatic Door Supply

Fire Alarm Panel

Intruder Alarm Panel

Spare

Spare

Internal AC Fan 3 Supply

FF Pwr Ring Circuit 1 - Office 1

FF Pwr Ring Circuit 2 - Office 1

FF Pwr Ring Circuit - Office 2

FF Pwr Ring Circuit - CEO Office, Fund Raising Office

FF Pwr Ring Circuit - Staff Area & FF Corridor

Internal AC Fan 1 & 2 Supply

Extract Fan Radial Circuit

External AC Condensor Unit 1 Supply

External AC Condensor Unit 2 Supply

GF Pwr Ring Circuit - Kitchenette & GF Corridor

GF Pwr Ring Circuit - HR Office

GF Pwr Ring Circuit - Reception 1

GF Pwr Ring Circuit - Reception 2

GF Pwr Ring Circuit - Counselling Room 1 & 2

Fused Spur Supply - Overdoor Heater

Sub-Main Supply Cable: Integral 60A. SP&N Switch

Circuit Description

GF Pwr Ring Circuit - Meeting Room

GF Pwr Ring Circuit - Managers Office

GF Pwr Ring Circuit - Activity/Family Room & Counselling Rm 3

Reception

T0

No. of SP&N Ways: 36 way Protective Devices:

FINAL CIRCUIT BOARD SCHEDULE

DISTRIBUTION BOARD REF: DBP Colchester Mind

42353

Spare

Spare

Spare

Existing FF Boiler

Immersion Heater

Spare

Spare

Spare




Page 4 of 11

APPENDIX C

MECHANICAL SERVICES

SCHEDULE OF DAYWORKS AND TENDER SUMMARY




Page 5 of 11

SCHEDULE OF DAYWORKS The Tenderer shall indicate here the day work charge rates to be applied for variation purposes: Labour Foreman ................................................................... £ per hour Tradesman ................................................................... £ per hour Labourer ................................................................... £ per hour Apprentice ................................................................... £ per hour Materials Actual Cost Plus Plant Actual Cost Plus Signed ................................................................... For and on Behalf of: ................................................................... ................................................................... ................................................................... Date: ...................................................................




Page 6 of 11

£ p

TENDER SUMMARY

1. GENERAL a) The Tenderer is required to insert, under each sub-heading, the

sums required for the erection of work described within the Specification and contained on the Tender Drawings. Failure to do so may result in the tender submission not being accepted.

b) The sums included shall contain all costs and expenses, which may

be required in, and for, the erection of the work described, together with all risks, liabilities and obligations set forth and implied on the Contract Documents.

c) Where special risk liabilities and obligations cannot be dealt with, as

above, then the cost thereof is to be separately stated by the Tenderer.

d) Tenderer may be required to complete a schedule of rates.

Following receipt of the tenders, Tenderers whose offer is being given further consideration will be required to submit a schedule of rates prior to the signing of a contract for the works.

2. TENDER SUMMARY

a) The prices inserted by the Tenderer in this Summary shall be fixed Price in accordance with the Contract Particulars and shall be fully inclusive of all obligations contained within the Tender Documents for the complete Mechanical Services Installation.

4.2.1 PRELIMINARIES........................................................................................ 4.2.1.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................ 4.2.1.2 THE ENGINEERING WORKS .................................................................... 4.2.1.3 EXTENT OF WORK ................................................................................... 4.2.1.4 REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS .......................................................... 4.2.1.5 DESIGN CRITERIA .................................................................................... 4.2.1.6 SITE VISIT.................................................................................................. 4.2.1.7 METHOD OF SUPPORT ............................................................................ 4.2.1.8 APPROXIMATE POSITIONS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS ............................ 4.2.1.9 PLANNED MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS ............................................... 4.2.1.10 REDUNDANT SERVICES .......................................................................... 4.2.1.11 INSPECTION AND TESTING ..................................................................... 4.2.1.12 COMPLIANCE WITH C.D.M. REGULATIONS ...........................................

Balance carried forward £




Page 7 of 11

£ p

Balance brought forward £

4.2.2 DESCRIPTION OF SERVICES .................................................................. 4.2.2.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 4.2.2.2 System Interfaces ..................................................................................... 4.2.2.3 Services Evaluation Works ...................................................................... 4.2.2.4 Enabling Works ........................................................................................ 4.2.3 COMFORT COOLING ................................................................................ 4.2.3.1 Split System Comfort Cooling ................................................................. 4.2.3.2 Installation Requirements ........................................................................ 4.2.3.3 Condensate Removal ............................................................................... 4.2.3.4 Commissioning, Testing and Setting to Work ........................................ 4.2.4 DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER SERVICES .................................... 4.2.4.1 Pipework and Fittings............................................................................... 4.2.4.2 Domestic Hot Water Calorifier ................................................................. 4.2.4.3 DHWS Secondary Circulation Pump ....................................................... 4.2.4.4 Thermostatic Mixing Valves ..................................................................... 4.2.4.5 Cleaning and Flushing ............................................................................. 4.2.4.6 Test and Commission .............................................................................. 4.2.4.7 Water Regulations .................................................................................... 4.2.5 VENTILATION ............................................................................................ 4.2.5.1 Extract Fans .............................................................................................. 4.2.5.8 Ductwork ................................................................................................... 4.2.5.9 Ductwork Cleaning and Cleaning Access Panels .................................. 4.2.5.10 Supply and Extract Grilles ....................................................................... 4.2.5.11 Ductwork Fire Dampers ............................................................................ 4.2.5.12 Transfer Grilles ......................................................................................... 4.2.5.13 Roof Terminals ......................................................................................... 4.2.6 LTHW HEATING ........................................................................................ 4.2.6.1 Pipework and Fittings............................................................................... 4.2.6.2 LTHW Boilers ............................................................................................ 4.2.6.3 Heat Emitters ............................................................................................ 4.2.6.4 Electric Heaters ........................................................................................ 4.2.6.5 LPHW Water Treatment ............................................................................ 4.2.6.6 Commissioning ......................................................................................... 4.2.7 CONTROLS AND POWER ........................................................................ 4.2.8 NATURAL GAS SERVICES ....................................................................... 4.2.8.1 Pipework and Fittings............................................................................... 4.2.8.2 Testing and Commissioning .................................................................... 4.2.10 BUILDERS WORK ..................................................................................... 4.2.11 ELECTRICAL SERVICES ASSOCIATED WITH MECHANICAL PLANT .. 4.2.11.1 General ...................................................................................................... 4.2.11.2 Standards .................................................................................................. 4.2.12 INSPECTION AND TESTING ..................................................................... 4.2.13 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ........................................ 4.2.14 SCHEDULE OF RATES ............................................................................. 4.2.14 CONTINGENCIES ...................................................................................... Total £ :




Page 8 of 11

APPENDIX D

ELECTRICAL SERVICES

SCHEDULE OF DAYWORKS AND TENDER SUMMARY




Page 9 of 11

SCHEDULE OF DAYWORKS The Tenderer shall indicate here the day work charge rates to be applied for variation purposes: Labour Foreman ................................................................... £ per hour Tradesman ................................................................... £ per hour Labourer ................................................................... £ per hour Apprentice ................................................................... £ per hour Materials Actual Cost Plus Plant Actual Cost Plus Signed ................................................................... For and on Behalf of: ................................................................... ................................................................... ................................................................... Date: ...................................................................




Page 10 of 11

£ p

TENDER SUMMARY

1. GENERAL

a) The Tenderer is required to insert, under each sub-heading, the sums required for the erection of work described within the Specification and contained on the Tender Drawings. Failure to do so may result in the tender submission not being accepted.

b) The sums included shall contain all costs and expenses, which

may be required in, and for, the erection of the work described, together with all risks, liabilities and obligations set forth and implied on the Contract Documents.

c) Where special risk liabilities and obligations cannot be dealt with,

as above, then the cost thereof is to be separately stated by the Tenderer.

d) Tenderer may be required to complete a schedule of rates.

Following receipt of the tenders, Tenderers whose offer is being given further consideration will be required to submit a schedule of rates prior to the signing of a contract for the works.

2. TENDER SUMMARY

a) The prices inserted by the Tenderer in this Summary shall be fixed Price in accordance with the Contract Particulars and shall be fully inclusive of all obligations contained within the Tender Documents for the complete Electrical Services Installation.

4.4.5 Electrical Strip Out Works ................................................................

4.4.6 Electricity Supply..............................................................................

4.4.7 Metering ...........................................................................................

4.4.8 Low Voltage Distribution ..................................................................

4.4.9 Lighting Installation ..........................................................................

4.4.10 Emergency Lighting Installation .......................................................

4.4.11 External Lighting Installation…………………………………………….

4.4.12 Small Power .....................................................................................

4.4.13 Wiring Systems ................................................................................

Balance carried forward £




Page 11 of 11

£ p

Balance brought forward £

4.4.14 Security Alarm Installation ..............................................................

4.4.15 Fire Alarm ......................................................................................

4.4.16 Telephone Installation ....................................................................

4.4.17 Data & A/V Installation ...................................................................

4.4.18 Facilities For The Disabled .............................................................

4.4.19 Mechanical Services Wiring ...........................................................

4.4.20 Door Access System ......................................................................

4.4.21 Mounting Heights ...........................................................................

4.4.22 Earthing And Bonding ....................................................................

4.4.23 Testing And Commissioning ...........................................................

4.4.24 Operation And Maintenance Information ........................................

4.4.25 Contract Information.......................................................................

4.4.26 Alternative Materials .......................................................................

4.4.35 Builders Work.................................................................................

________________ Total £


SECTION 5.0: GENERAL SUMMARY


Page 1 of 1

GENERAL SUMMARY TO FORM OF TENDER 1.0 NBS Preliminaries incl Provisional Sums £ 2.0 NBS Materials and Workmanship £ 3.0 Schedule of Works £ 4.0 M&E £ TOTAL TO FORM OF TENDER £ Contractor’s Name …………………………………………………………………………………….. Contractor’s Address ………………………………………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………………………………………………….. Signed …………………………………………………………………………………… Designation …………………………………………………………………………….. Date ……………………………………………………………………………………..

Form of Tender

Re: Conversion and Refurbishment of Existing Doctors Surgery into New Colchester MIND Wellbeing Centre.

Colchester MIND

c/o Ingleton Wood LLP 874 The Crescent Colchester Business Park Colchester, Essex CO4 9YQ

Dear Sir, We have read the Specifications/Schedule of Works supplied and examined the drawings, and having visited the site and being familiar with the contract conditions, do hereby offer to execute and complete the whole of the works specified for the sum of

(£ : )

In the event of acceptance of this tender we undertake to commence work on ................................. and to complete in .................................... weeks We agree to this tender remaining open for acceptance for a period of 3 months Dated this ......................................... day of ...................................... 2013

Signed:

Address:

Internal and External - Alterations and RefurbishmentColchester MIND – TENDERJob No: 42353 Date: December 2013

APPENDIX ADRAINAGE SURVEY


APPENDIX BFINISHES & FITTING SCHEDULE

New Wellbeing Centre Colchester Mind Job No. 42353 Finishes and Fittings Schedule 900 Author: NN Checked by: PR Date: 28th November 2013 Status: Tender Issue

Finishes and Fittings Schedule 900: New Wellbeing Centre Job no: 42353 - Date: 28th November 2013. Tender Issue

G:\files\Jobs\40000-59999 - COLCHESTER\42301 - 42400\42353 Colchester Mind - New Wellbeing Centre - Full Design\9. Reports, Documents, Photos\9.3 Documents\Interior Design\42353 - 900 Finishes & Fittings Schedule.docx Page 2 of 25

CONTENTS:

0.0 General 5 1.0 GF: Main Entrance and Waiting area 6 2.0 GF: Reception Office 7 3.0 GF: Accessible WC 7 4.0 GF: Cleaners room 8 5.0 GF: Counselling room 1 9 6.0 GF: Counselling room 2 10 7.0 GF: HR/Payroll Office 11 8.0 GF: Corridors/Staircase 12 9.0 GF: Staff WC 13 10.0 Kitchenette 14 11.0 GF: Counselling room 3 15 12.0 GF: Family meeting room 16 13.0 GF: Activity room 17 14.0 GF: Managers Office 18



15.0 GF: Meeting room 19

16.0 FF: Office 20 17.0

FF: Female WC

20

18.0

FF: Male WC

21

19.0 FF: Staff area 22 20.0

FF: Server room

22

21.0 FF: Boiler 23 22.0 FF: Fundraising Office and Store 23 23.0 FF: CEOs Office 24 24.0 FF: PA to CEOs Office 24 25.0 FF: Corridors 25



Manufactures contact details: Gradus www.gradusworld.com Park Green, Macclesfield, Cheshire SK117LZ England Tel: 01625 428 922

Forbo Flooring Systems www.forbo-flooring.co.uk Person of contact: Fern Percival 79 John Street, Clerkenwell, London, EC1M 4NR Tel: 01592 643777

H&R Johnson tiles www.johnson-tiles.com Johnson Tiles Harewood Street Tunstall Stoke on Trent ST6 5JZ United Kingdom Tel: 01782 575575

Tektura www.tektura.com Customer Services 34 Harbour Exchange Square London E14 9GE Tel: 020 7536 3300

Dulux Trade

ICI Paints, Wexham Road, Slough, Berkshire SL2 5DS

Tel : 0870 242 1100

Muraspec

www.muraspec.com

Person of contact: Monica Keska

Muraspec 74-78 Wood Lane End Hemel Hempstead Herts HP2 4RF

Tel: 08705 117118

Nantmor Blinds Ltd

www.nantmorblinds.com

1 Brindley Road Gorse Lane Ind. Estate Clacton-on-Sea Essex CO15 4XL Tel: 01582 860970



0.0 General

Area

Description/Use Supplier Range Reference Finish/Colour Notes

Walls Circulation and GF Dulux Diamond Matt

- tbc -

Walls Staircases & Circulation First Floor

Dulux Diamond Matt - tbc -

Skirting/Wood work/Window Boards

General areas

Dulux Satinwood - White -

Skirting Wet areas

Forbo Varies refer to schedule

- Varies refer to schedule

100mm coved flooring skirting

Floor Threshold Strips

Forbo WA Transition WA Grey To be provided at all door openings and between floor finishes

Doors New Doors

- - Laminate finish American White Oak -

Doors Door Frames

Dulux Satinwood - White -

Ceiling

Existing ceilings Dulux Vinyl Silk

- White -



1.0 GF: Main Entrance and Waiting area

Area


Floor Entrance matting Forbo Coral Printed Logo

- tbc To have Colchester Mind Logo printed. Approx entrance matting area 13m2

Floor Carpet Forbo Create Space 3 Carpet tiles tbc -

Floor Feature Carpet Forbo Westbond Plain Carpet tiles tbc Approx 8m2

Walls General paint Dulux Diamond Matt - tbc -

Walls Feature Paint

Dulux Diamond Matt - tbc 1no wall approx. 4m2

Walls Digital wallpaper Muraspec UV Digital wallpaper

- Image tbc 1no wall approx. 6 m2

Walls Frameless pinboard Forbo Bulletin board - tbc 2no size 1200 x 900mm & to be mounted on FR MDF

Ceiling

Existing ceiling Dulux Vinyl Silk - White -

Blinds Vertical slat blinds Nantmor Blinds Ltd

Vertical louvre Carnival fabric

cream To 1no existing window



2.0 GF: Reception Office

Area



Walls General paint Dulux Diamond Matt

- tbc -

Walls Frameless pinboard Forbo Bulletin board - tbc 2no 1200 x 900mm & mounted FR MDF

Wood work General areas Dulux Satinwood - tbc Wood work

Ceiling



Vertical louvre Carnival fabric Cream To 1no existing window

3.0 GF: Accessible WC

Area


Floor Non-slip vinyl Forbo Surestep

Stone tbc Coved flooring skirting

Walls General paint Dulux

Diamond Matt - tbc -

Walls Ceramic tiles H&R Johnsons Prismatics Tiles to be 200 x 100mm stretcher bond pattern

White (Price option 2)

Splashback, 3no rows high behind sink

Ceiling

Existing ceiling Dulux Vinyl Silk - White

-



4.0 GF: Cleaners Cupboard

Area


Floor Non-slip vinyl Forbo Surestep Original tbc Coved flooring skirting



Walls Ceramic tiles H&R Johnsons Prismatics Tiles to be 200 x 200mm

White (Price option 2)

Splashback, 3no rows high behind cleaners sink

Ceiling


-



5.0 GF: Counselling room 1

Area


Floor Carpet

Forbo Arran Carpet tiles tbc -

Walls General paint Dulux Diamond Matt - tbc

-

Walls Frameless pinboard

Forbo Bulletin board - tbc

1no required, size 1200 x 900mm & to be mounted on FR MDF

Walls Feature wallpaper

Textura tbc - tbc 1no wall, approx 6m2

Ceiling







Area


Floor Carpet



-





Textura Fabric Backed Vinyl

- tbc 1no wall, approx 6m2

Ceiling






7.0 GF: HR/Payroll Office

Area




- tbc -

Walls Frameless pinboard Forbo Bulletin board

- tbc 2no required, size 1200 x 900mm & to be mounted on FR MDF

Ceiling






8.0 GF: Corridors/Staircase

Area



Floor Staircase Carpet Forbo Create Space 2 Carpet tiles tbc -

Floor Staircase nosing Gradus

XT Aluminium GXT11 Insert colour tbc -


- tbc -

Walls Frameless pinboard Forbo Bulletin board - tbc 2no required, size 1200 x 900mm & to be mounted on FR MDF

Ceiling




9.0 GF: Staff WC

Area







White (price option 2)


Ceiling


-



10.0 GF: Kitchenette

Area



Wood tbc Coved flooring skirting





Tiles full length of worktop to underside of wall cupboards

Ceiling


-

Kitchen Cupboards

Kitchen Cupboards Howdens Burford - Oak Laminate -

Kitchen Worktop

Kitchen Worktop Howdens Burford - Black Melamine -




Area


Floor Carpet



-





Textura tbc - tbc 1no wall, approx 7m2

Ceiling






12.0 GF: Family Meeting room

Area


Floor Carpet

Forbo Create Space 2 Carpet tiles tbc -

Floor Feature Carpet Forbo Create Space 2 Carpet tiles tbc Approx. 3m2


-




Walls Digital wallpaper

Muraspec Digital Wallpaper UV

1no wall also in Activity area approx. area 8m2

Ceiling






13.0 GF: Activity Area

Area


Floor Non-slip vinyl Forbo Surestep Colour tbc -

Floor Transition strip Gradus Clip Top PVC-u range

RT42/AFT28 tbc Transition strip between carpet and vinyl to be provided.


- tbc -

Walls Ceramic tiles H&R Johnsons Prismatics - White (Price Option 2)


Ceiling


Cupboard units Cupboard units Howdens Burford - tbc -

Worktop

Worktop Howdens Burford 40mm worktop tbc -





14.0 GF Managers Office

Area




- tbc -

Ceiling






15.0 GF Meeting Room

Area



Floor Feature Carpet Forbo Westbond Plain

Carpet tiles tbc Approx 6m2


- tbc -

Walls Wipe clear paint Muraspec Ideapaint IPCLEAR Clear Allow for Ideapaint accessories kit IPACCSKIT

Walls Ceramic tiles H&R Johnsons Prismatics - White (price option 2)


Ceiling


Blinds Vertical slat blinds Ashley Contracts Ambassador 30 -

tbc To 1no existing window

Cupboard units Cupboard units Howdens Burford - tbc -

Worktops

Worktops Howdens Burford 40mm worktop tbc -



16.0 FF: Office

Area




- tbc -

Ceiling




17.0 FF: Female WC

Area









Ceiling


-



18.0 FF: Male WC

Area








Splashback, 3no high behind sink

Ceiling


-



19.0 FF: Staff area

Area


Floor Non-slip vinyl Forbo Surestep Wood tbc Coved flooring skirting





Splashback, 3no high behind sink

Ceiling


-

Blinds Vertical slat blinds Ashley Contracts Ambassador 30 -

tbc To 1no existing window

Kitchen Cupboards

Kitchen Cupboards Howdens Burford - Oak Laminate -

Kitchen Worktop

Kitchen Worktop Howdens Burford - Black Melamine -

20.0 FF: Server room

Area


Floor Vinyl Forbo Eternal Smaragd tbc

-


- White -

Ceiling




21.0 Boiler room

Area


Floor Non-slip vinyl Forbo Surestep Original tbc

-


- White -

Ceiling


22.0 FF: Fundraising Office

Area




- tbc -

Ceiling






23.0 FF: CEOs Office

Area




- tbc -

Ceiling




24.0 FF: PA to CEO Office

Area




- tbc -

Ceiling






25.0 FF: Corridors

Area




- tbc -

Walls Frameless pinboard Forbo Bulletin board -

Ceiling



APPENDIX CSANITARY SCHEDULE

Project no: 42353 Report generated: 29/11/2013 11:24

Project title: Colchester Mind Author: Karl Curnock

Please check the information contained within this specification carefully as it is your responsibility toensure it is accurate. Any supply of product would of course be in accordance with our StandardTerms and Conditions of Sale.All references below are from Ideal Standard and Armitage Shanksunless otherwise stated.

Ideal Standard Ltd. Armitage ShanksThe Bathroom Works Old RoadNational Avenue ArmitageKingston Upon Hull RugeleyHU5 4HS Staffordshire

WS15 4BT

Tel. 01482 346461 Tel. 01543 490253

Produced using IdealSpec please visit www.idealspec.co.uk to view the catalogue or sign in andgain access to the comprehensive specification tools, including Totals reports and Prime Cost sumguide prices.

Area: Ground Floor (001)

Room Item type / description SAP code Finish Qty

DDA facility(001)

WC pan S3116 01 1Contour 21 back to wall rimless raisedheight WC pan, 75cm projection withhorizontal outlet

Washbasin S2474 01 1Contour 21 37cm handrinse washbasin righthand taphole no overflow or chainstay hole,bottom outlet

Washbasin wall fixings S9110 67 1Hangers concealed, Steel

Brassware A4169 AA 1Contour 21 washbasin mixer thermostatic 1hole, single sequential long lever, coppertube inlet

Waste (Washbasin / sink / bidet) S8810 01 1Waste 1¼" plastic strainer, dished pattern80mm unslotted tail

Trap S8910 67 1Trap 1¼" plastic bottle, 75mm seal,multi-purpose outlet

Grab Rail S6454 AC 1Contour 21 grab rail straight 60cm long x35mm diameter

Grab Rail S6452 AC 1Contour 21 grab rail straight 45cm long x35mm diameter

Grab Rail S6360 AC 1Contour 21 hinged support rail 80 x 35mmdiameter.

Toilet roll holder S6363 AC 1Toilet roll holder for Contour 21 hinged armrail

Cistern S3621 67 1Conceala 2 cistern 4.5 or 6 litre single flushsyphon bottom supply and internal overflow,alternative height plastic flushbends no

lever

WC seat S4066 01 1Contour 21 seat no cover, top fixing hingesand retaining buffers

WC Actuator S4516 AA 1Lever flushing spatula for Conceala cistern

WC back support S6466 AC 1Contour 21 back support rail for 75cmprojection WC, 40 x 22 x 35mm diametertube

WC cushion S6884 67 1Cushion for back support with clips, newdesign

WC extended flushpipe S4302 67 1Contour 21 flushpipe constructed,necessary for installation

Staff WC (002) WC pan E7543 01 1Alto Eco close coupled WC pan withhorizontal outlet

Cistern E7544 01 1Alto Eco close coupled cistern 4/2.6 litredual flush valve bottom supply and internaloverflow

WC seat E7590 01 1Alto seat and cover with stainless steelhinges

Brassware B9676 AA 1Alto washbasin pillar taps.

Kitchenette(003)

Slop hopper S5873 MY 1Sandringham Select sink, inset stainlesssteel 1.5 bowl complete with ½" basketstrainer waste

Brassware B4449 AA 1Sandringham sink mixer 1 hole, leveroperated with single flow swivel spout

Activity area(004)



Meeting Room(005)

Washbasin S2624 MY 1Troon 2 washbasin 39cm, fixing clips, nooverflow

Brassware B8262 AA 1Nuastyle 21 inclined ½" washbasin pillartaps, lever operated, dual hot and coldindices, anti-vandal water saving nozzle

Waste (Washbasin / sink / bidet) S8811 01 1Waste 1¼" plastic strainer, 50mm unslottedtail


Area: First Floor (002)

Room Item type / description SAP code Finish Qty

Male Toilets(001)

WC pan E7543 01 1Alto Eco close coupled WC pan withhorizontal outlet


WC seat E7590 01 1

Alto seat and cover with stainless steelhinges

Washbasin E7456 01 1Alto 55cm washbasin, 2 tapholes

Washbasin pedestal E7402 01 1Alto/Space pedestal


Waste (Washbasin / sink / bidet) E6760 AA 1Waste 1¼" brass waste with chain and plug,80mm slotted tail, bolt stay


Female Toilets(002)

WC pan E7543 01 1Alto Eco close coupled WC pan withhorizontal outlet


WC seat E7590 01 1Alto seat and cover with stainless steelhinges

Washbasin E7456 01 1Alto 55cm washbasin, 2 tapholes

Washbasin pedestal E7402 01 1Alto/Space pedestal


Waste (Washbasin / sink / bidet) E6760 AA 1Waste 1¼" brass waste with chain and plug,80mm slotted tail, bolt stay


Staff Room(003)



Finish Key

Code Description

01 White

67 Neutral / No Finish

AA Chromium plated

AC White

MY Stainless Steel